JP2021049107A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To enhance an interest in a game.SOLUTION: A game machine can execute a notice performance that can be set to any setting value from among plural setting values having different degrees of advantage and displays a notice image for suggesting control to an advantageous state, and a setting suggestive performance for displaying a setting suggestive image that is an image differing from a notice image and is related to a setting suggestion on display means. When a notice performance and a setting suggestive performance are executed in parallel, a notice image and a setting suggestive image are displayed in mutually different display areas. The game machine can display a specific image by a normal mode, and a specific image by a special mode for suggesting that a degree of expectation toward control to an advantageous state is higher than the normal state. The game machine can display a specific image by adding a first particular performance element when displaying the specific image by a special mode, and can display the specific image by adding a second particular performance element differing from the first particular performance element when displaying the specific image by a normal mode.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 8-49

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player and can be set to any of a plurality of set values that have different advantages for the player.

Conventionally, in a gaming machine that can set a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player, a setting suggestion effect for displaying characters such as a giraffe, an elephant, and a lion that suggest the set setting values is displayed at the time of change. (See, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-200902

However, in Patent Document 1, there is a problem that the effects other than the setting suggestion effect are not considered, and the improvement of the game entertainment by the setting suggestion effect may be insufficient.

The present invention has been made by paying attention to such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of improving the game entertainment.

The game machine of means 1
It is possible to control an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to set one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6) having different advantages for the player. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1)
A display means capable of displaying an image (for example, an image display device 5) and
A preview image suggesting that the image is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, image 245SG005s of character A, image 245SG005t of character B, image 245SG005u of character C, group image 245SG005v of characters A to C, in the examples. A notice effect for displaying a notice image (sometimes referred to as a specific image) on the display means, and a setting suggestion image (for example, "cherry" or "watermelon") that is different from the notice image and is related to the setting suggestion. An effect executing means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes an effect process during variable display) capable of executing a setting suggestion effect for displaying a reel image 245SG005G for stopping and displaying a symbol on the display means.
With
When the notice effect and the setting suggestion effect are executed in parallel, the notice image and the setting suggestion image are displayed in different display areas (for example, FIG. 8-49 as a modification 245SG-8). As shown in the above, when the reel image 245SG005G and the group image 245SG005v of the characters A to C are simultaneously displayed on the image display device 5, the reel image 245SG005G is displayed at the lower right of the image display device 5, and the characters A to C are displayed. The part that displays the group image 245SG005v of C at the upper part of the image display device 5),
further,
A process including super reach A to C in step 097IWS104 in the effect control CPU 120, which can execute a specific effect (for example, super reach A to C) suggesting whether or not it is controlled in an advantageous state. A part in which a table is selected and steps 097IWS106 and S305 are executed), a specific image (for example, a chance-up image) and a predetermined image (for example, character image 097IW11, character image 097IW21) different from the specific image during execution of the specific effect. ) Is provided (for example, a portion in which the process table including the super reach A to C and the chance-up effect is selected in step 097IWS104 in the effect control CPU 120 and steps 097IWS106 and S305 are executed). The specific effect executing means can execute a plurality of types of specific effects (for example, super reach A to C) including at least a first specific effect (for example, super reach A) and a second specific effect (for example, super reach B). Yes, the image display means can display at least the first specific image (for example, image A1, image A2, image A3, image A4) as the specific image during the execution of the first specific effect, and the second specific effect. The second specific image (for example, image B1, image B2, image B3) can be displayed during the execution of the above, and the specific image in the normal mode (for example, white) and the expectation that the specific image is controlled in a more advantageous state than the normal mode. It is possible to display a specific image in a special mode (for example, blue, green, red, iridescent) suggesting a high degree, and the predetermined image is a display mode not related to the expectation degree controlled in an advantageous state. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 10-9 to 10-16, the display mode of the character image 097IW11 and the character image 097IW21 does not change), the image display means is the first special when displaying a specific image according to the special mode. It is possible to display a specific image by adding an effect element (for example, an effect image of display colors of blue, green, red, and rainbow colors), which is different from the first special effect element when displaying a specific image in a normal mode. It is characterized in that a specific image can be displayed by adding a second special effect element (for example, an effect image having a white display color) (see FIGS. 10-9 to 10-16).
According to this feature, the visibility of both the specific image and the setting suggestion image is ensured, so that it is possible to prevent the effect of either the advance notice effect or the setting suggestion effect from being reduced. Because it can be done, the game entertainment can be improved. Further, it is possible to make the player recognize that the specific image is a preview image, and it is possible to draw the player's attention to the specific image.

The gaming machine of the means 2 is the gaming machine according to the means 1.
The display means can display a game progress information display (for example, the fourth symbol 245SG005F or the error notification image 245SG005J) corresponding to the progress of the game.
When the game progress information display and the setting suggestion image are simultaneously displayed on the display means, the game progress information display is displayed so as to have higher visibility than the setting suggestion image (for example). As shown in FIG. 8-39 (F), when the reel image 245SG005G and the error notification image 245SG005J are displayed at the same time on the image display device 5, the error notification image 245SG005J is displayed with priority over the reel image 245SG005G. Part to be done)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the visibility of the game progress information display can be ensured, it is possible to prevent misidentification of the game progress information display.

The gaming machine of the means 3 is the gaming machine according to the means 1 or the means 2.
A gaming machine capable of executing variable display in a specific display area of the display means (for example, each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R of "left", "middle", and "right").
When the setting suggestion image is displayed in the specific display area, the setting suggestion image is displayed so as to have higher visibility than the variable display image variably displayed in the specific display area (for example). , As shown in FIG. 8-39 (B), when the reel image 245SG005G is displayed overlapping in the symbol display area 5C in the image display device 5, the reel image 245SG005G has priority over the decorative symbol in the symbol display area 5C. (The part displayed as)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the visibility of the setting suggestion image can be ensured in the specific display area, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

The gaming machine of the means 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to the means 3.
The display means has an effect-related image display area (for example, a first hold storage display area 245SG005D and a second hold storage display area 245SG005D) capable of displaying at least an effect-related image (for example, a hold display) related to an effect different from the advance notice effect and the setting suggestion effect. Has a hold storage display area 245SG005U)
When the setting suggestion image is duplicated in the effect-related image display area, the setting suggestion image has higher visibility than the effect-related image displayed in the effect-related image display area. (For example, as shown in FIG. 8-37 (B), when the reel image 245SG005G is overlapped with the first hold storage display area 245SG005D, the reel image 245SG005G is displayed in the first hold storage display area 245SG005D. The part that is displayed with priority over 245SG005D)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the visibility of the setting suggestion image can be ensured in the effect-related image display area, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

The gaming machine of the means 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to the means 4.
As the specific image, the effect executing means includes a first specific image (for example, an image 245SG005s of a character A indicating that the jackpot expectation is low) and a second specific image (for example, a character A indicating that the jackpot expectation is high). The group image of ~ C 245SG005v) can be displayed on the display means.
When the first specific image and the setting suggestion image are simultaneously displayed on the display means, the setting suggestion image is displayed so as to have higher visibility than the first specific image (for example,). As shown in FIG. 8-50 (D), when the reel image 245SG005G and the image 245SG005s of the character A are displayed at the same time on the image display device 5, the reel image 245SG005G is displayed with priority over the image 245SG005s of the character A. The part to be done),
When the second specific image and the setting suggestion image are simultaneously displayed on the display means, the second specific image and the setting suggestion image are displayed in different display areas (for example, FIG. 8-). As shown in 50 (E), when the reel image 245SG005G and the group image 245SG005v of the characters A to C are simultaneously displayed on the image display device 5, the reel image 245SG005G is displayed at the lower right of the image display device 5. A part to be displayed and displaying a group image 245SG005v of characters A to C at the upper part of the image display device 5)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the visibility of the setting suggestion image can be ensured, and when the second specific image is displayed, the visibility of the second specific image can also be ensured. By directing both, the game entertainment can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 6 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 5.
In the setting suggestion effect, the effect execution means can display a special setting suggestion image corresponding to the control of the advantageous state on the display means (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-37 (E), a reel effect. The part where the "7" symbol, which indicates that the variable display result is a big hit, can be stopped and displayed)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, attention to the setting suggestion effect can be increased, and the game entertainment can be improved.

The gaming machine of the means 7 is the gaming machine according to the means 6.
The advantageous state has a first advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state of jackpot A) and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state.
The effect executing means can display a special setting suggestion image corresponding to the second advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state of a jackpot B or a jackpot C) as the special setting suggestion image on the display means (for example, a modification). As shown in FIGS. 8-51 (C) and 8-51 (D) as Example 245SG-10, when the variable display result is a big hit and the big hit type is a big hit A, a white “7” is used as a reel effect. If the symbol can be stopped and displayed, the variable display result is a jackpot, and the jackpot type is jackpot B or jackpot C, the black "7" symbol can be stopped and displayed as a reel effect)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, attention to the setting suggestion effect can be further increased, and the game entertainment can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 8 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 7.
The effect executing means includes a non-suggestion image (for example, a "bell" symbol) that does not suggest the setting, and as the setting suggestion image, a first setting suggestion image (for example, a "watermelon" symbol) and the first setting suggestion image. It is characterized in that it is possible to display a second setting suggestion image (for example, a “cherry” symbol) suggesting that a setting value more advantageous to the player is set.
According to this feature, it is possible to pay attention to the type of the image displayed in the setting suggestion effect, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

c
The effect executing means is
As the advance notice effect, an effect in which the specific image is in a predetermined operation state (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-52 (C) as a modification 245SG-11, a plurality of characters right the display area of the image display device 5). It is possible to perform a group production that crosses from the direction to the left),
The setting suggestion image can be superimposed and displayed on the specific image in the predetermined operating state (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-52 (C) as a modified example 245SG-11, the image display device 5 In the part where the reel image 245SG005G is displayed with priority over the group production)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the setting suggestion image from being lowered when the specific image is in a predetermined operation state.

The gaming machine of the means 10 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to the means 9.
A motion detecting means (for example, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B) capable of detecting a predetermined motion of a player is provided.
The effect executing means is
It is possible to execute an operation promotion notification effect (for example, a portion displaying the operation promotion image 245SG005H in the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 8-38 (B)) that prompts the execution of the predetermined operation.
As the advance notice effect, the specific image can be displayed based on the detection of the predetermined operation by the operation detection means, accompanied by the execution of the operation promotion notification effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-38, the advance notice effect). Is the image of the character A 245SG005s, the image of the character B 245SG005t, the image of the character C 245SG005u, and the characters A to C by operating the push button 31B after the operation promotion image 245SG005H is displayed on the image display device 5. The part where any of the group image 245SG005v is displayed),
As the setting suggestion effect, the setting suggestion image can be displayed based on the detection of the predetermined motion by the motion detection means without executing the motion promotion notification effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-37). In the reel effect, the operation promotion image 245SG005H is not displayed on the image display device 5, and the player operates the stick controller 31A to display "cherry", "watermelon", "7", and "cherry" on the reel image 245SG005G. The part where one of the "Gekiatsu", "Chance", and "Bell" symbols is stopped and displayed)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the setting suggestion effect in which the setting suggestion image is suggested is not accompanied by the operation promotion notification effect, so that the player who is not interested in the setting suggestion does not execute the setting suggestion effect. Since the player who is interested in the setting suggestion can execute the setting suggestion effect, it is possible to execute the effect that suits the player's taste.

Further, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the inventions according to the following means 11 to 17. Conventionally, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-136430 in a game machine,
As a game machine, a game ball, which is a game medium, is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when the game ball wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player. There is something that can be done. Further, a variable display device capable of variable display (also referred to as “variation”) of the identification information is provided, and when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the specific display result in the variable display device, the gaming state (game). The state of the machine. Therefore, specifically, the state in which the game machine is controlled) is changed to give a predetermined game value to the player (so-called pachinko machine).
Further, after setting a predetermined number of bets for one game on a predetermined game medium, the player operates the start lever to start variable display of the identification information by the variable display device, and the player changes each. By operating the stop button provided corresponding to the display device, the variable display of the identification information is stopped within the range of the maximum delay time predetermined from the operation timing, and the variable display of all the variable display devices is displayed. When a prize is generated according to the display result derived when the game is stopped, a predetermined game medium determined in advance is paid out according to the prize, and a specific prize is generated, the player sets the game state to the predetermined game value. There is something that is configured to give to (so-called slot machine).
The game value means that the state of the variable winning ball device provided in the game area of the game machine is in an advantageous state for the player who is likely to win a prize, or is in an advantageous state for the player. It is to generate rights and to be in a state where the conditions for paying out prize balls are easily satisfied.
In the pachinko gaming machine, as a display result of the variable display of the special symbol (identification information) started in the variable display device based on the winning of the game ball in the starting winning opening, a predetermined specific display mode is derived and displayed. If so, a "big hit" will occur. The derivation display is to finally stop and display the symbol (final stop symbol). When a big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times to shift to a big hit game state in which a hit ball is easy to win. Then, in each opening period, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the large winning openings are won, the large winning openings are closed. The number of times the large winning opening is opened is fixed to a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 rounds). An opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the large winning opening is closed when the opening time elapses. Hereinafter, the opening period of each large winning opening may be referred to as a round. In addition, a game in a round may be called a round game.
Further, in the variable display device, symbols other than the symbol that becomes the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol among the left, middle, and right symbols) are stopped and shaken in a state of being consistent with a specific display result for a predetermined time. A big hit can occur before the final result is displayed due to movement, enlargement / reduction or deformation, multiple symbols fluctuating synchronously with the same symbol, or the positions of the displayed symbols being swapped. The effect performed in the state where the sex continues (hereinafter, these states are referred to as the reach state) is referred to as the reach effect. In addition, the reach state and its state are referred to as a reach mode. Further, the variable display including the reach effect is called the reach variable display. Then, when the display result of the symbol that is variablely displayed on the variable display device is not a specific display result, it becomes "off" and the variable display state ends. The player plays the game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.
In such a game machine, a specific image can be displayed during execution of a specific effect, and a specific image according to a normal mode and a special mode suggesting that the expectation of being controlled in an advantageous state is higher than that of the normal mode are specified. Some are configured so that an image can be displayed and a specific image can be displayed by adding a special effect element when displaying a specific image in a special mode. For example, in Patent Document 1, when the first try effect (specific image according to a special aspect) is executed, the player is likely to display the try information (special effect element) and enter the specific game state. It is described that the try information is not displayed when the second try effect (specific image according to the normal mode), which is less likely to be in the specific game state than the first try effect, is executed.
However, when a specific image in a normal mode is displayed, it is difficult for the player to recognize that the specific image is a preview image whose mode changes according to the degree of expectation that the specific image is controlled in an advantageous state, and the player is assigned to the specific image. I can't pay attention to it.

Therefore, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of making a player recognize that a specific image is a preview image and drawing the player's attention to the specific image.

The gaming machine of means 11
A gaming machine that can play a game and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player, and has a specific effect (for example, Super Reach A to C) that suggests whether or not the game is controlled to the advantageous state. ) And the specific effect executing means (for example, a part in which the process table including the superreach A to C is selected in step 097IWS104 in the effect control CPU 120 and steps 097IWS106 and S305 are executed) and the specific effect is being executed. An image display means capable of displaying a specific image (for example, a chance-up image) and a predetermined image (for example, character image 097IW11, character image 097IW21) different from the specific image (for example, super reach in step 097IWS104 in the effect control CPU 120). The process table including A to C and the chance-up effect is selected and steps 097IWS106 and S305 are executed), and the specific effect execution means is at least the first specific effect (for example, super reach A) and the second specific effect. It is possible to execute a plurality of types of specific effects (for example, Super Reach A to C) including an effect (for example, Super Reach B), and the image display means is, as a specific image, at least during the execution of the first specific effect. 1 specific image (for example, image A1, image A2, image A3, image A4) can be displayed, and a second specific image (for example, image B1, image B2, image B3) is displayed during execution of the second specific effect. By a specific image in a normal aspect (eg, white) that is possible and in a special aspect (eg, blue, green, red, iridescent) that suggests that there is a higher expectation of being controlled in a more advantageous state than the normal mode. A specific image can be displayed, and the predetermined image is a display mode that is not related to the expectation degree controlled in an advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-9 to 10-16, the character image 097IW11 and the character. The display mode of the image 097IW21 does not change), and the image display means adds a first special effect element (for example, an effect image of blue, green, red, and rainbow display colors) when displaying a specific image according to the special mode. When displaying a specific image in a normal manner, a second special effect element different from the first special effect element (for example, an effect image having a white display color) is added to the specific image. Can be displayed (see FIGS. 10-9 to 10-16). According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player recognize that the specific image is a preview image, and it is possible to draw the player's attention to the specific image.

The gaming machine of the means 12 is the gaming machine according to the means 11.
The image display means can display the first specific image in different modes (for example, blue, green, red, rainbow color) depending on the degree of expectation controlled in an advantageous state during the execution of the first specific effect. The first specific image can be displayed by adding a first special effect element (for example, an effect image having a display color of blue, green, red, or rainbow color) in a display mode corresponding to the mode of the first specific image (FIG.). It may be configured as shown in 10-9 to 10-16). According to such a configuration, it is possible to emphasize the difference in the mode of the specific image depending on the display mode of the added first special effect element.

The gaming machine of the means 13 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 11 to the means 12.
The image display means can display an image of a common mode (for example, image X) as the first specific image and the second specific image, and when displaying the image of the common mode, the common first special effect. Even if it is configured so that an element (for example, an effect image of a rainbow-colored display color) can be added to display a first specific image and a second specific image (see FIGS. 10-4 and 10-5). Good. According to such a configuration, the player can be made to recognize that the image of the common mode is displayed as the specific image.

The game machine of the means 14 is the game machine according to any one of the means 11 to 13, and is a notification effect (for example, output of a notification sound) when a specific image is displayed by adding a first special effect element. ) Is provided (for example, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 that executes step 097IWS311), and the notification effect executing means adds a second special effect element to display a specific image. May not execute the notification effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 does not shift to step 097IWS311 when it is Y in step 097IWS310). According to such a configuration, the player can be made aware of it only when the expectation of being controlled in an advantageous state is high.

The gaming machine of the means 15 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 11 to 14, and the image display means is a specific image to which the second special effect element is added and a specific image to which the first special effect element is added. (For example, chance-up effects A7, B7, C5) may be configured to be feasible (see FIGS. 10-4 to 10-6). According to such a configuration, the expectation can be maintained even when the specific image is displayed by adding the second special effect element.

The gaming machine of the means 16 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 11 to 15, and the specific effect executing means is the effect of the first period (for example, the period of the first half of the effect period of the super reach A to C). The effect of the second period (for example, the effect of Super Reach A to C) including the effect of notifying whether or not the control is performed in an advantageous state after the first period (for example, notification of the result of success or failure). It is possible to execute a specific effect including the effect of the latter half period), and the image display means can display the specific image during the first period and restricts the display of the specific image during the second period (the effect of the latter half period). It may be configured as shown in FIG. 10-8). According to such a configuration, the player's consciousness can be focused on whether or not the control is performed in an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of the means 17 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 11 to the means 16, and is set to any one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values 1 to 6) having different advantages for the player. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be set to a value, and a predetermined effect executing means (for example, an effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a predetermined effect by any one of a plurality of types of effect modes. , As a variable display effect, a setting suggestion based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7, or a portion capable of executing a reach notice based on the patterns PT-8 and PT-9) is provided, and the effect mode of the predetermined effect is provided. Is a special aspect that suggests control to an advantageous state (for example, a reach notice based on the special pattern pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9) and a specific aspect that suggests setting (for example, a specific pattern). The predetermined effect executing means can execute both the predetermined effect of the special mode and the predetermined effect of the specific mode (for example, the setting suggestion based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7). At the timing when a predetermined period elapses after the variable display of the symbol is started (the timing before the variable display mode reaches the reach), the predetermined effect of the special mode can be executed with priority over the predetermined effect of the specific mode. (For example, when the effect control CPU 120 wins the pattern PT-9 in the reach notice lottery in the variable display effect determination process shown in FIG. 9-15 of the first embodiment, it is based on the pattern PT-9 in 103SGS294. The part that prioritizes the execution of the reach notice (high) over the setting suggestion, and even if the lottery of the setting suggestion is executed in 103SGS296, the setting suggestion (high) based on the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 is won. If not, the portion in which the execution of the reach notice (low) based on the pattern PT-8 is prioritized over the setting suggestion (low) based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 in 103SGS301, etc./ The effect control CPU 120 executes an effect based on any of the patterns PT1 to PT-9 at a ratio of reach notice (high)> setting suggestion (high)> reach notice (low)> setting suggestion (low). It may be configured as a part to be determined (see FIG. 9-20 of Modification 1). According to such a configuration, when the control is performed in an advantageous state, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect of a specific mode from being executed and the effect from becoming inappropriate.

The present invention may have only the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention, and has a configuration other than the invention-specific matters together with the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention. It may be a thing.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of 1st special symbol process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko game machine. It is a rear perspective view of a pachinko machine. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating production control commands. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is a figure which illustrates the fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of each big hit. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a fluctuation pattern determination table for big hits, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a fluctuation pattern determination table for small hits. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern determination table for detachment. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning prize determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the random value value determination processing at the time of a prize. It is a flowchart which shows the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the effect control process process. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the reel production determination process. (A) to (F) are explanatory views which show the determination ratio of each effect result of a reel effect. It is a flowchart which shows the cut-in effect determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the cut-in effect determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the cut-in effect determination process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution decision ratio of the cut-in effect and the determination rate of an effect pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution decision ratio of the cut-in effect and the determination rate of an effect pattern. It is explanatory drawing of the production pattern of a cut-in production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution decision ratio in the pattern CI-3 of a cut-in effect. It is a flowchart which shows the advance notice production decision processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution ratio of the advance notice effect and the determination rate of an effect pattern, and is explanatory drawing of the effect pattern of the advance notice effect. It is explanatory drawing of the acceptance period of the button operation for each variation pattern, the reel effect execution enable period, and the notice effect execution enable period. It is explanatory drawing of the acceptance period of the button operation for each variation pattern, the reel effect execution enable period, and the notice effect execution enable period. It is explanatory drawing of the acceptance period of the button operation for each variation pattern, the reel effect execution enable period, and the notice effect execution enable period. It is explanatory drawing of the acceptance period of the button operation for each variation pattern, the reel effect execution enable period, and the notice effect execution enable period. It is explanatory drawing of each effect which can be executed in the variable display. It is explanatory drawing about the drawing layer of an effect image. It is a figure which shows the effect mode of the reel effect in the variable display. It is a figure which shows the effect mode of the cut-in effect which is executed when the reel effect is not executed. It is a figure which shows the effect mode of the cut-in effect which is executed at the time of executing a reel effect. It is a figure which shows the production mode of the cut-in effect in the variable display. It is a figure which shows the notification mode of the variable display result for every variation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution decision ratio of the cut-in effect and the decision rate of an effect pattern in a modification 245SG-1. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution decision ratio of the cut-in effect and the decision rate of the effect pattern in the modification 245SG-2. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution decision ratio of the cut-in effect and the decision rate of the effect pattern in the modification 245SG-3. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution decision ratio of the advance notice effect and the determination rate of an effect pattern in a modification 245SG-4. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution decision ratio of the cut-in effect and the decision rate of an effect pattern in a modification 245SG-5. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution decision ratio of the cut-in effect and the decision rate of an effect pattern in a modification 245SG-6. It is a figure which shows the execution period of the set value suggestion effect and the execution decision ratio of the set value suggestion effect in the modification 245SG-7. It is a figure which shows the effect mode of the cut-in effect executed at the time of executing a reel effect in the modification 245SG-8. It is a figure which shows the effect mode of the cut-in effect executed at the time of executing a reel effect in the modification 245SG-9. It is a figure which shows the flow of the variable display of a jackpot which is executed at the time of executing a reel production in the modification 245SG-10. It is a figure which shows the effect mode of the advance notice effect which is executed at the time of execution of a reel effect in the modification 245SG-11. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram of a button operation acceptance period, a reel effect executable period, and a notice effect executable period in the case of normal reach or super reach in the modified example 245SG-12. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of selection of the effect mode in the modification 245SG-13. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect mode of the cut-in effect which suggests the set value in the modification 245SG-14. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko game machine. It is a rear perspective view of a pachinko machine. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating production control commands. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is a figure which illustrates the fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of each big hit. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table (for jackpot A), and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table (for jackpot B and jackpot C), (C). Is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern determination table for small hits. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern determination table for detachment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the received command buffer at the time of a moving prize. (A) is a front view of the display monitor, (B) is a view showing a display mode of the display monitor, and (C) is an explanatory view of the display contents. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect determination processing during variable display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the effect type during variable display. (A) is a diagram showing the effect (reach notice) type determination table A, and (B) is a diagram showing the effect (setting suggestion) type determination table B. (A) to (C) are diagrams showing the flow of the effect during variable display. (A) is a diagram showing an effect mode of reach notice (low) based on pattern PT-8, and (B) is a diagram showing an effect mode of reach notice (high) based on pattern PT-9. (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the effect determination process during variable display as a modification 1, and (B) is a diagram showing a determination ratio of reach notice and setting suggestion when the effect type determination table C is used. (A) is a diagram showing an effect period of the variable display effect as in the second embodiment, and (B) is a diagram showing an effect execution determination table during variable display. (A) is a diagram showing the execution decision ratio of reach notice and setting suggestion in the first period and the second period at the set value 1 and the set value 6 when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach, and (B) is set when the fluctuation pattern is super reach. It is a figure which shows the execution decision ratio of the reach notice and the setting suggestion in the 1st period and the 2nd period in the value 1 and the setting value 6. It is a figure which shows the effect type determination ratio during variable display in the 1st period when the fluctuation pattern is a normal reach. It is a figure which shows the effect type determination ratio during variable display in the 2nd period when the fluctuation pattern is a normal reach. It is a figure which shows the effect type determination ratio during variable display in the 1st period when the fluctuation pattern is super reach. It is a figure which shows the effect type determination ratio during variable display in the 2nd period when the fluctuation pattern is super reach. (A) is a diagram showing the execution decision ratio of the reach notice and the setting suggestion in the first period and the second period in the set value 1 and the set value 6 when the fluctuation pattern is the normal reach in the third embodiment, and (B) is the figure showing the execution decision ratio of the setting suggestion. It is a figure which shows the execution decision ratio of the reach notice and the setting suggestion in the 1st period and the 2nd period in the set value 1 and the set value 6 in super reach. It is a figure which shows the effect type determination ratio during variable display in the 1st period when the fluctuation pattern is a normal reach. It is a figure which shows the effect type determination ratio during variable display in the 2nd period when the fluctuation pattern is a normal reach. It is a figure which shows the effect type determination ratio during variable display in the 1st period when the fluctuation pattern is super reach. It is a figure which shows the effect type determination ratio during variable display in the 2nd period when the fluctuation pattern is super reach. It is a figure which shows the production period of the effect during variable display as Example 4. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect determination processing during variable display as Example 4. (A) is a diagram showing the execution decision ratio of the reach notice and the setting suggestion in the first period at the set value 1 and the set value 6 in the fluctuation pattern common to the normal reach and the super reach in the fourth embodiment, and (B) is the fluctuation pattern. The figure showing the execution decision ratio of the reach notice and the setting suggestion in the second period at the set value 1 and the set value 6 in the normal reach, (C) shows the fluctuation pattern in the second period in the set value 1 and the set value 6 in the super reach. It is a figure which shows the execution decision ratio of the reach notice and the setting suggestion of. It is a figure which shows the effect type determination ratio during variable display in the 1st period. It is a figure which shows the effect type determination ratio during variable display in the 2nd period when the fluctuation pattern is a normal reach. It is a figure which shows the effect type determination ratio during variable display in the 2nd period when the fluctuation pattern is super reach. It is a figure which shows the production period of the effect during variable display as a modification 2. (A) is a diagram showing the execution decision ratio of the reach notice and the setting suggestion in the first period at the set value 1 and the set value 6 which are common to all the variation patterns in the modified example 2. The figure showing the execution decision ratio of the reach notice and the setting suggestion in the second period in the set value 1 and the set value 6 in common, (C) shows the variation pattern common to the normal reach and the super reach, and the third in the set value 1 and the set value 6. It is a figure which shows the execution decision ratio of the reach notice and the setting suggestion in 3 periods. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the fluctuation pattern table. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the chance up effect setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the chance up production decision table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the chance up production decision table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the chance up production decision table. It is a flowchart which shows the effect processing during variable display. It is a timing chart for explaining the display timing of the chance-up image and the success / failure result notification during the execution of the super reach. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the production mode of super reach. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the production mode of super reach. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the production mode of super reach. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the production mode of super reach. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the production mode of super reach. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the production mode of super reach. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the production mode of super reach. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the production mode of super reach.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1 etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the right side of the game area), a variable display (also referred to as a special figure game) of a special symbol (also referred to as a special figure) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed. The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to be performed are provided. Each of these consists of 7-segment LEDs and the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Fluctuations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. When the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later is changed, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbols described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. The variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinked and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be expressed as a variable display or a variable display.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effects images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol is synchronized with the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Is variablely displayed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to as simply variable display.

On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display in which execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. Hold display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of stored items on hold. The number of reserved storage corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storage corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. Further, the total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as a total reserved storage number.

Further, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided, and the first hold indicator 25A has the number of LEDs lit. The first hold storage number is displayed, and the second hold display 25B displays the second hold storage number according to the number of LED lights.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening that is always kept in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the first special figure game may be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, so that the tip of the movable wing pieces is in a vertical position. Is close to the winning ball device 6A and is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening is closed). On the other hand, the variable-sweep wing device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is on (second start). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls can be paid out and the second special figure game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any as long as it changes between the closed state and the open state, and is not limited to the one provided with the electric tulip type accessory.

A general winning opening 10 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four positions on the lower left and right sides of the game area), which is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and has a large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for special electric accessory) is off, the big winning door closes the big winning door and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is on, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the large winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball. When a game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters, for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the left side of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of the ordinary symbol as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from the special symbol. The ordinary symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal figure game.

A passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided on the left side of the image display device 5. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the normal drawing game is executed.

A normal symbol display 25C is provided above the normal symbol display 20. The normal figure hold display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is held, by the number of LEDs lit.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the game machine frame 3, and game effect lamps 9 for game effects are further provided around the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 is configured to include an LED.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (not shown in FIG. 1), a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided.

At the lower right position of the game machine frame 3, a ball striking operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch the game ball toward the game area by the striking ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, the game balls paid out as prize balls and the game balls rented by the predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to the hitting ball launching device. ) A hit ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) is provided, in which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be gripped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the rotation operation of the ball striking operation handle 30 included in the pachinko game machine 1 by the player. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal drawing game is being executed (when the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 but the normal drawing game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the normal symbol (a symbol that is out of the normal symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol is "out of the normal symbol". When it becomes "per normal drawing", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed or during the period controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (the start prize has occurred). If the special figure game based on the start winning cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" and a jackpot symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes "small hit". Further, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the opening upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A jackpot type is set for "big hit". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and opening upper limit period) of the big winning opening and game states after the big hit game state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc., which will be described later) are prepared, and the big hit is made accordingly. The type is set. As the jackpot type, a jackpot type in which many prize balls can be obtained or a jackpot type in which few or almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

In the small hit game state, the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as the big hit game state in some big hit types (the number of times the big winning opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same. Etc.), the big winning opening is opened. As with the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability change state according to the jackpot type.

In the time saving state, control (time saving control) is executed in which the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shortened as compared with the normal state. In the time saving state, the average fluctuation time of the normal map (the period during which the normal map is changed) is shortened from the normal state, and the probability of becoming a "normal map hit" in the normal map game is improved from the normal state. Controls (high opening control, high base control) that make it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening are also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

In the probability variation state (probability fluctuation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probabilistic state is a state that is more advantageous for the player because it is a state in which a “big hit” is likely to occur in addition to improving the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol.

The time saving state and the probability change state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as a number-cutting (time-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state, a time saving state, and a probability change state, which is advantageous for the player, and the display result in the normal drawing game is "normal drawing hit". The pachinko game machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit" returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on (for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in the same controlled state as (when the process is not executed).

The state in which the probability change control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which the probability change control is not executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which the time saving control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time saving control is not executed is also called a low base state. By combining these, it is also called a low-accuracy high-base state in the time-saving state, a high-accuracy high-base state in the probability variation state, and a low-accuracy low-base state in the normal state. The high-accuracy state and low-base state are also called the high-accuracy low-base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs. If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that there may be no "small hit" as the display result of the special figure game.

The game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probabilistic state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, and in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or the game effect lamp 9 It may be performed by turning on / off the points, etc., and operating the movable body 32.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display of a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is a mode in which is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative symbol. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher hit reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of a "probability change jackpot" that is controlled to a probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and displayed as a stop, and the probability change state is entered after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be aligned and displayed as a stop. In this case, the odd decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probabilistic symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability change symbol becomes the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability change jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", a fixed decorative symbol (for example, "for example," "is a predetermined small hit combination as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5. 1 3 5 ”etc.) Is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a“ small hit ”). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state), and when it becomes "small hit". , A common fixed decorative symbol may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "off", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the variable display result of the decorative symbol is a fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach off") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach off"). In addition, when the display result is "off", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is changed to the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination that is not a jackpot combination ("reach loss"). The fixed decorative symbol (also called "") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "out of reach").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution and a look-ahead notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the look-ahead notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small hit game state, the small hit medium effect for notifying the small hit game state is executed. It should be noted that the big hit game during the small hit game state and in some big hit types (the big hit type in the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, the big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a highly accurate state). By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not know whether the player is currently in the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high accuracy state and the low accuracy state. You may.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a game state, a small hit game state, a game state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be one that is updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (one that is updated by software).

The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting (a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game ball passes or is passed) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). (A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for a prize-winning door. To transmit.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) issues an effect control command (command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a jackpot type)) and a variation pattern used when executing a special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of winning, the number of stored memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing the program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed). (Including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CG ROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes the effect based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, thereby causing the image display device 5 to display the effect image. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the output sound) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or, a lamp signal (a signal for designating a lamp lighting / extinguishing mode) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. To do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes audio output, lamp lighting / extinguishing control (sound designation signal, lamp signal supply, etc.), and movable body 32 control (signal supply for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 updatablely counts numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used to execute various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. It is configured to include the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operations on the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output ports, etc.), settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on the power supply board, for example. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the game machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop processing, a processing of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up to the RAM 102, a data protection processing of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes addition of an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, various timer states, etc.) for advancing the game, as well as the state of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (used by using an error detection code) and determines whether or not the data is normal (step). S5). In step S5, for example, the parity bit and the checksum are used to determine whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped. When it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the change of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing recovery from the power failure to the effect control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, the effect control command that specifies the game state before the power failure that is backed up, and the effect control that specifies the display result of the special figure game that is being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may want to send a command. For these commands, the same commands that are set to be transmitted in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command that specifies the time of recovery from the power failure, the image display device 5, for example, notifies that the image display device 5 has recovered from the power failure or is recovering from the power failure. Display the screen to do so. The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

After the restoration process or the initialization process is completed and the effect control command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and interrupts are permitted (step S12). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to perform the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, the jackpot information (information indicating the number of times the jackpot has occurred) and the start information (starting) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data such as information indicating the number of times of winning (information indicating the number of times of winning, etc.) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of the probability change state) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process (step S25). By executing the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the CPU 103, it is possible to manage the execution and hold of the special symbol game, control the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control the game state, and the like (for details, refer to the details. See below).

Following the special symbol process processing, the normal symbol process processing is executed (step S26). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure hit". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of normal figure reservations is displayed by turning on the normal figure hold display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When the start winning is generated, the display result (including the jackpot type) and the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After the hold information and the number of hold storages are stored, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for designating the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning prize, the number of hold storages, and the look-ahead determination is made on the effect control board 12. .. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set to "big hit" or "small hit" based on the random value for determining the display result, and the big hit type when the display result is set to "big hit". Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a definite special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or an outlier symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. The special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be memorized, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be satisfied in the winning order (also referred to as winning order digestion).

When making various determinations based on the random number value, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (a table in which the determination value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the determination result) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this fluctuation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is set using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a preliminary determination result of whether or not the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". The process of deciding on is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special symbol game (special symbol fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. It specifies the content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol change processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are set to change the special symbol, and the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol. It includes processing to measure. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. Contains the process of making settings for. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is "off", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "missing", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of cuts is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot release preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting to start the execution of the round in the big hit game state and open the big winning opening based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the upper limit period for opening the big winning opening and the upper limit number of executions for the round are set according to which type of jackpot is used. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the big winning opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the device from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. End the processing while the jackpot is open.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-opening process of the jackpot, a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of the round that opens the jackpot has reached the set maximum number of executions, and a jackpot game state when the maximum number of executions is reached. It includes processing to make settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the special figure process flag is set. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the post-launch processing is completed.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect action for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing to make various settings to start control and time reduction control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end processing ends.

The small hit release preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This small hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting the large winning opening to be in the open state in the small hit game state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to measure the elapsed time from the opening state of the big winning opening and to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing to determine whether or not it is. When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the processing during the small hit opening process ends.

The small hit end process in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. The small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end process ends.

(Main operation of the effect control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. When the effect control board 12 receives the power supply voltage from the power source board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122, set various initial values, and press the effect control board 12. Set the registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process process or the like. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitting body such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and a movable body 32. Controls are performed to operate various production devices such as the driving operation of the LED. Further, regarding the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process process in step S76, the effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the read-ahead notice setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, and setting for executing the look-ahead notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command or the like for designating the start of the variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is to be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, their modes, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is completed. The display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , Driving the movable body 32, outputting voice and sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting the command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and commanding the lamp control board 14 (illumination signal). Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED according to the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is to be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol, which is the display result of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when the effect control command for specifying the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to "6". Update to. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process. In addition, when the reception waiting time of the command elapses without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The small hit medium effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “4”. In this small hit medium effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set content. .. Further, in the small hit middle effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify that the small hit game state is terminated, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. Update to a certain "5" and end the small hit medium production process.

The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end effect process is terminated.

The jackpot effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the big hit middle effect process, for example, the value of the effect control process flag is set to the value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the big hit game state. Update to 7 ”and end the production process during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process ends.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, but the game medium is enclosed and a score is given based on the occurrence of a prize. It may be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko game machine 1 is shown as a game machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player When a symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, if the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by the detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on the network connected via the communication line or the like by providing the communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the programs and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a proportion of "0%" and the other may have a proportion of "100%" or less than "100%".
(Explanation of feature section 245SG)

Next, the game machine in the feature unit 245SG of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-1 to 8-41.

First, FIG. 8-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 245SG of the present embodiment, and shows the layout of the main members. As shown in FIGS. 8-1 and 8-3, the pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into an outer frame 245SG001a formed in a vertically long square frame shape and a gaming board (gauge) constituting the game board surface. It is composed of a board) 2 and a game machine frame (underframe) 245SG003 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area. Further, in the game machine frame 245SG003, between a door opening position in which a glass door frame 245SG003a having a glass window opens the front surface of the game machine frame 245SG003 centering on the left side and a door closing position in which the front surface is closed. It is rotatably provided, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 245SG003a, and when the glass door frame 245SG003a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

Further, the game machine frame 245SG003 can be opened by inserting the door key owned by the game machine clerk or the like into a lock (not shown) and unlocking it, and the game machine frame 245SG003 and the glass can be opened by players other than the clerk. The door frame 245SG003a cannot be opened.

The left game area 245SG002L is a game area in which the (left-handed) game ball launched relatively weakly by the operation of the ball striking operation handle 30 flows down, and the right game area 245SG002R is the left game area 245SG002L by the operation of the ball striking operation handle 30. This is a game area in which a (right-handed) game ball launched more strongly than the game ball flowing down passes through the upper path 245SG002C of the image display device 5 and flows down.

Further, a general winning opening 10 is arranged in the left game area 245SG002L, and in the right game area 245SG002R, a passing gate 41, a variable winning ball device 6B, and a general winning ball device 6B are arranged from the upstream side to the downstream side of the right game area 245SG002R. A winning opening 10 and a special variable winning ball device 7 are arranged. That is, the game ball flowing down the left game area 245SG002L can win a prize in the first starting winning opening formed by the general winning opening 10 and the winning ball device 6A, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 245SG002R is variable. It is possible to win a prize in the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, the general winning opening 10 and the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7, and it is possible to pass through the passing gate 41.

As shown in FIG. 8-1, a plurality of obstacle nails 245SGK1 are arranged between the winning ball device 6A, the variable winning ball device 6B, and the special variable winning ball device 7. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the left game area 245SG002L cannot win the second start winning opening or the large winning opening, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 245SG002R cannot win the first starting winning opening. It has become.

Further, the first reserved storage display area 245SG005D and the second reserved storage display area 245SG005U are displayed at two positions on the left and right below the display area of the image display device 5. In the first hold storage display area 245SG005D and the second hold storage display area 245SG005U, the hold storage display (hold display) for identifiablely displaying the hold storage number (special figure hold storage number) of the variable display corresponding to the special figure game is displayed. Will be done. The fourth symbol 245SG005F is displayed at the right end of the hold display area of the image display device 5. The fourth symbol 245SG005F is a symbol that blinks during execution of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in order to make the player recognize that the variable display is being executed.

As shown in FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3, the main substrate 11 in the feature portion 245SG of the present embodiment is housed in the substrate case 245SG201 which is configured to be openable by the first member and the second member. It is mounted on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the state. Further, on the main board 11, a lock switch 245SG051 for switching the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to a changeable set value change state, a jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) described later in the set value change state, and the like are used. A setting changeover switch 245SG052 that functions as a setting switch for changing a set value, and an open sensor 245SG090 that detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 245SG003 are provided. The set value change state in the feature unit 245SG of the present embodiment is also a state in which a clerk of the game hall or the like can confirm the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (set value confirmation state).

The setting switching main body portion provided with an operation unit that can be operated by the player, such as the lock switch 245SG051 and the setting changeover switch 245SG052, is housed in the board case 245SG201 together with the main board 11, and the lock switch 245SG051 and the setting changeover switch 245SG052. Is exposed to the back side through an opening formed in the back surface of the board case 245SG201 so that it can be operated without opening the board case 245SG201.

Since the board case 245SG201 having the lock switch 245SG051 and the setting changeover switch 245SG052 is provided on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is extremely difficult to operate the gaming machine frame 245SG003 when the gaming machine frame 245SG003 is closed. It can be operated by opening the gaming machine frame 245SG003. Further, since the lock switch 245SG051 requires the operation of the setting key owned by the clerk of the amusement park or the like, only the clerk who possesses the setting key can operate the lock switch 245SG051. The lock switch 245SG051 is also a switch capable of executing an ON / OFF switching operation described later by using a setting key. In the feature unit 245SG of the present embodiment, a mode in which the door key and the setting key are separate keys is illustrated, but these may be shared by one key.

Further, in the board case 245SG201, a display monitor 245SG029 capable of displaying a set value and a base value described later is arranged. The display monitor 245SG029 is connected to the main board 11 and is arranged on the upper part of the board case 245SG201. That is, the display monitor 245SG029 is arranged in front of the board case 245SG201 when the main board 11 is visually recognized. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the gaming machine frame 245SG003 is not opened, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized is the back surface side of the gaming board 2 when the gaming machine frame 245SG003 is opened. This is the front when visually recognizing, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 245SG, if the lock switch 245SG051 and the release sensor 245SG09 are turned on when the power is turned on, the set value is changed and the set value is displayed on the display monitor 245SG029. Is displayed. At this time, by operating the setting changeover switch 245SG052, the numerical value (set value) displayed on the display monitor 245SG029 can be updated and displayed.

Then, by turning off the lock switch 245SG051 while any numerical value from 1 to 6 is displayed on the display monitor 245SG029, the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 245SG029 is set as a new set value. To. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the CPU 103 sends a setting value designation command, which will be described later, to the effect control board 12 regardless of whether or not a new setting value is set (set). By doing so, the effect control CPU 120 can specify the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the set value designation command.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-1 and 8-2, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a predetermined position (for example, a lower left position of the gaming area) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature portion 245SG of the present embodiment. 1 First special symbol display device 245SG004A capable of variable display of 1 special figure, 2nd special symbol display device 245SG004B capable of executing variable display of 2nd special symbol, 1st hold display capable of displaying 1st hold storage number Instrument 245SG025A, 2nd hold indicator 245SG025B capable of displaying the 2nd hold storage number, normal symbol display 245SG020 capable of executing variable display of the normal symbol, normal symbol hold indicator 245SG025C capable of displaying the normal symbol hold storage number, In the game state where the round display 245SG131 that can display the number of rounds (big hit type) of the big hit game during the big hit game, and the game ball such as the high base state (time saving state) or the big hit game state is launched toward the right game area 245SG002R. A game information display unit 245SG200 is provided in which a right-handed lamp 245SG132 that lights up, a probability change lamp 245SG133 that lights up in the probability change state, and a time reduction lamp 245SG134 that lights up in the high base state (time reduction state) are collectively arranged.

The first special symbol display device 245SG004A and the second special symbol display device 245SG004B are each composed of 8-segment LEDs. Further, in the first special symbol display device 245SG004A and the second special symbol display device 245SG004B, if the variable display result of the special symbol is off or a small hit, the variable display result can be derived and displayed by a common combination. ing.

In the case where the variable display result is a big hit in the variable display of the first special symbol, the first special symbol display device 245SG004A has a variable display result with two types of big hit symbols (combination of lit LEDs) for each big hit type. Derived display is possible. Further, in the case where the variable display result is a big hit in the variable display of the second special symbol, the second special symbol display device 245SG004B is variablely displayed by two kinds of big hit symbols (combination of lit LEDs) for each big hit type. The results can be derived and displayed.

In the feature unit 245SG of the present embodiment, the jackpot symbols that can be derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 245SG004A and the second special symbol display device 245SG004B are all different, but the first special symbol display device 245SG004A At least a part of the jackpot symbol that can be derived and displayed in the above and the jackpot symbol that can be derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 245SG004B may overlap.

In the first hold indicator 245SG025A and the second hold indicator 245SG025B, LEDs of four segments are arranged in parallel in the left-right direction. In these first hold indicator 245SG025A and second hold indicator 245SG025B, if the number of hold storage is one, only the LED at the left end is lit, and each time the number of hold storage increases, it is the second from the left. The third LED from the left and the fourth LED from the left light up in sequence. Then, each time the variable display is executed, the LED on the hold display corresponding to the variable display is set in a predetermined shift direction (feature of the present embodiment) in response to the decrease (consumption) of the hold memory. In part 245SG, the lights are turned off toward the left).

In the feature unit 245SG of the present embodiment, when both the first special figure holding memory and the second special figure holding storage exist, the variable display based on the second special figure holding storage is preferentially executed. It has become like. Therefore, for example, when one first special figure hold memory exists and two second special figure hold memories exist (only the LED at the left end of the first hold indicator 245SG025A is lit and the second hold is held. (When the two LEDs on the left of the display 245SG25B are lit), the first special figure hold is held after the second special figure hold memory becomes 0 by executing the variable display based on the second special figure hold memory. Variable display based on memory is executed.

Further, the round display 245SG131 is composed of five segments (LEDs). As the jackpot types in the feature unit 245SG of the present embodiment, a total of three jackpot types are provided: a jackpot A which is a 5-round jackpot, a jackpot B which is a 10-round jackpot, and a jackpot C which is a 15-round jackpot. Therefore, which segment of the segments constituting the round display 245SG131 is lit differs depending on the jackpot type.

The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control an image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used to control audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. And LED control commands used to control the lighting operation of decorative LEDs and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 in the feature unit 245SG of the present embodiment includes a first movable body 245SG321 and a second movable body 245SG322 that can operate between the origin position and the effect position during variable display and the like. The origin detection sensor 245SG331 capable of detecting that the 1 movable body 245SG321 is located at the origin position of the first movable body 245SG321 and the second movable body 245SG322 are located at the origin position of the second movable body 245SG322. The origin detection sensor 245SG332 capable of detecting this is connected to the origin detection sensor 245SG332.

FIG. 8-4 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the feature unit 245SG in the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 8-4 (A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 8-4 (A), the command 8001H is a first variable display start command for designating the start of variable display in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 245SG004A. .. The command 8002H is a second variable display start command for designating the start of the variable display in the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 245SG004B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is a fluctuation pattern specification command that specifies a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) such as a symbol. Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the content of instruction by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be specified.

The command 8CXXXH is a variable display result notification command, and is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (B), the determination result (predetermined result) of whether the variable display result is "missing", "big hit", or "small hit". ) Or, different EXT data are set according to the determination result (big hit type determination result) of which of a plurality of types the jackpot type is set when the variable display result is "big hit".

In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (B), the command 8C00H is the first variable display result designation command indicating a predetermined result indicating that the variable display result is “missing”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit A" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit B" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit C" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying a preliminary determination result that the variable display result is a "small hit".

The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating the change stop (confirmation) of the decorative symbol in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a game state designation command for designating the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to, for example, the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state specification command corresponding to the game state (low base state, normal state) in which the time reduction control is not performed, and the command 9501H is the game state (high base state) in which the time reduction control is performed. , Time saving state) is used as the second game state specification command.

The command 96XXH is an error (abnormal) designation command that specifies the occurrence of an error (abnormality) and the type of the error (abnormality) that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the error (abnormality) designation command, for example, by setting the EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormality), it is specified which error (abnormality) has been determined on the effect control board 12 side. The occurrence of the specified error (abnormality) can be notified by the error notification process described later.

The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state. The command A1XXH is a notification command during the opening of the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening is in the open state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state.

In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determination result and the jackpot type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command. .. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command or the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result notification command. .. In the notification command while the big winning opening is open and the notification command after opening the big winning opening, different EXT data is set according to the number of rounds executed (for example, "1" to "15") in the big hit game state or the small hit game state. Will be done.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) is generated. This is a first start opening winning designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 245SG004A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) is generated. , The second start opening winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 245SG004B has been satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first hold storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure hold storage number in order to display the special figure hold storage number identifiable on the image display device 5 or the like. The command C2XXH is a second hold storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure hold storage number in order to display the special figure hold storage number identifiable on the image display device 5 or the like. The first hold memory number notification command is, for example, when the first start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The second hold memory number notification command is, for example, when the second start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Further, the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command are used in the special figure game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the hold storage number decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command, the total hold storage number notification command for notifying the total hold storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total hold storage number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) of the total hold storage number.

The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (commands for designating a winning determination result) indicating the contents of the winning determination result. Of these, the command C4XXH is a symbol designation command that indicates whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit" and the judgment result of the big hit type (probability change, non-probability change, or sudden change) as the judgment result at the time of winning. Further, the command C6XXH is a variation category indicating a determination result of whether the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is the variation pattern of "non-reach", "super reach", or "other" as the determination result at the time of winning. It is a command.

The command D0XXH is a setting value designation command for designating the newly set setting value from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120).

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which is a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing game control programs, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. The RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides the area, the CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes the game control program to perform the control operation, and the numerical data indicating the random value are updated independently of the CPU 103. It is configured to include a random number circuit 104 to perform, an I / O (Input / Output port) 105, and a real-time clock (RTC) 106 capable of outputting time information.

As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed by executing the program read from the ROM 101 by the CPU 103. At this time, a fixed data read operation in which the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, a variable data writing operation in which the CPU 103 writes various variable data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores them, and various variable data temporarily stored in the RAM 102 by the CPU 103. The variable data read operation, the CPU 103 receives input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and the CPU 103 goes to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. A transmission operation that outputs various signals is also performed.

FIG. 8-5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the side of the main board 11. As shown in FIG. 8-5, in the feature unit 245SG of this embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the fluctuation pattern. Numerical data indicating each of the random value MR3 for determination, the random value MR4 for determining the display result of the general map, and the random value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 are controlled so as to be countable. In addition, a random number value other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random number values MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

In the present embodiment, each random value MR1 to MR5 is used as a value in the range shown in FIG. 8-5, but the present invention is not limited to this, and each random value is not limited to this. The range of MR1 to MR5 may be different depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

FIG. 8-6 shows the fluctuation pattern in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is "off", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" and "reach", respectively, and is variable. A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance in response to a case where the display result is a "big hit". In addition, one variation pattern is prepared in advance in response to a case where the variable display result is a "small hit". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern"). The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "out of reach" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "out of reach variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the missed fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “off”. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" is called a big hit fluctuation pattern. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "small hit" is called a small hit fluctuation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed, and a super reach in which a super reach effect such as super reach α, super reach β, super reach γ, and super reach δ is executed. There is a fluctuation pattern. In the present embodiment, only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and like the super reach, the normal reach α, the normal reach β, ... A plurality of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided. Further, the super reach variation pattern may be provided with 5 or more super reach variation patterns.

As shown in FIG. 8-6, regarding the special figure fluctuation time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed in the feature unit 245SG of the present embodiment, the super reach fluctuation patterns, super reach α and super reach β, are shown. , Super reach γ, and super reach δ are set shorter. Further, regarding the special figure fluctuation time of the super reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach production of the super reach such as super reach α, super reach β, super reach γ, and super reach δ in the feature portion 245SG of the present embodiment is executed, the super reach The special figure fluctuation pattern is set longer in the order of δ, super reach γ, super reach β, and super reach α.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the variable display result is set to be "big hit" in the order of super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach. Therefore, since the big hit expectation is set to be high, the normal reach fluctuation pattern and the normal reach fluctuation pattern and In the super reach fluctuation pattern, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

However, in the feature unit 245SG of the present embodiment, as the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ, the variable display result is notified that the variable display result is a big hit after once notifying that the variable display result is out of order as the reach effect of the super reach γ. A variation pattern (PB1-5 shown in FIG. 8-6) for executing the revival effect is provided. Therefore, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ that executes the revival effect is set to have a longer special figure fluctuation time than the normal fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ and a shorter special figure fluctuation time than the fluctuation pattern of the super reach δ. However, it is an exceptionally high fluctuation pattern (100%) with the highest expectation of big hits.

In the feature unit 245SG of the present embodiment, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns are classified into, for example, a non-reach type, a normal reach type, a super reach type, and the like. Rather than determining the variation patterns to be executed from the variation patterns belonging to the variation patterns belonging to the determined type after determining them first, only the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is determined without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, in addition to the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern type is provided to determine these fluctuations. The type of the variation pattern may be determined first from the random value for determining the pattern type, and then the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the variation pattern belonging to the determined type.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-6, the feature unit 245SG of the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the fluctuation content (effect content) is predetermined for each fluctuation pattern, but the present invention illustrates this. The variation content (effect content) may be different depending on the set value, even if the variation pattern is the same. For example, in the case of the fluctuation pattern PA2-1 that is out of normal reach, if the set value is 1, the fluctuation pattern is out of normal reach, and if the set value is 2, a pseudo-continuous effect is performed. As a fluctuation pattern that is executed twice and becomes non-reach out of reach, when the set value is 3, the pseudo-continuous effect may be executed three times to make a fluctuation pattern that is out of super reach.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes the program read from the ROM 101, and by using the RAM 102 as the work area, various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are executed. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of the various random numbers used on the side of the main board 11 by executing the random number generation program.

The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data and the like used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data that constitutes a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. 8-7 to 8-14, which are prepared by the CPU 103 for performing various determinations and determinations. Further, the ROM 101 contains table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and a variation mode of each symbol in a variable display such as a special symbol or a normal symbol. A fluctuation pattern table or the like that stores a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is stored.

The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIGS. 8-7 and 8-8, and the second special figure display result determination shown in FIGS. 8-9 and 8-10. Table, jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in FIG. 8-11 (A), jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 8-11 (B), and jackpot fluctuation pattern determination A table, a small hit variation pattern determination table, an outlier variation pattern determination table, a general map display result determination table (not shown), a general map variation pattern determination table (not shown), and the like are included.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature unit 245SG of the present embodiment is configured such that the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing described later, the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) is changed by using the display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the set value. .. The set value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest payout rate, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the lower the advantage is. In other words, as for the set value, 6 which is the largest value is the most disadvantageous value for the amusement park side, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is the more advantageous value for the amusement park side. Become.

8-7 to 8-10 are explanatory views showing a display result determination table. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set for each set value. In the feature unit 245SG of the present embodiment, as the display result determination table, individual display result determination tables are used for the first special figure and the second special figure, but the present invention is not limited thereto. , The display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure may be used.

In FIG. 8-7 (A), the variable special figure is the first special figure, the set value is 1, and the gaming state is the normal state (low probability low base state) or the time saving state (low probability high base state). This is a display result determination table for the first special figure selected in a certain case. In the first special figure display result judgment table, out of the hit judgment values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment, up to 1020 to 1237 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

FIG. 8-7 (B) is the first special figure selected when the variable special figure is the first special figure, the set value is 1, and the gaming state is the probabilistic state (high probability high base state). This is a display result judgment table. In the first special figure display result judgment table, out of the hit judgment values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment, up to 1020 to 1346 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

In FIG. 8-7 (C), the variable special figure is the first special figure, the set value is 2, and the gaming state is the normal state (low accuracy low base state) or the time saving state (low accuracy high base state). This is a display result determination table for the first special figure selected in a certain case. In the first special figure display result judgment table, out of the hit judgment values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment, up to 1020 to 1253 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

FIG. 8-7 (D) is the first special figure selected when the variable special figure is the first special figure, the set value is 2, and the gaming state is the probabilistic state (high probability high base state). This is a display result judgment table. In the first special figure display result judgment table, among the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result judgment, which is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, up to 1020-1383 It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

In FIG. 8-7 (E), the variable special figure is the first special figure, the set value is 3, and the gaming state is the normal state (low accuracy low base state) or the time saving state (low accuracy high base state). This is a display result determination table for the first special figure selected in a certain case. In the first special figure display result judgment table, out of the hit judgment values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result judgment, up to 1020-1272 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

FIG. 8-7 (F) is the first special figure selected when the variable special figure is the first special figure, the set value is 3, and the gaming state is the probability variation state (high accuracy and high base state). This is a display result judgment table. In the first special figure display result judgment table, out of the hit judgment values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment, up to 1020 to 1429 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

In FIG. 8-8 (A), the variable special figure is the first special figure, the set value is 4, and the gaming state is the normal state (low probability low base state) or the time saving state (low probability high base state). This is a display result determination table for the first special figure selected in a certain case. In the first special figure display result judgment table, out of the hit judgment values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result judgment, up to 1020 to 1292 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

FIG. 8-8 (B) is the first special figure selected when the variable special figure is the first special figure, the set value is 4, and the gaming state is the probabilistic state (high probability high base state). This is a display result judgment table. In the first special figure display result judgment table, out of the hit judgment values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result judgment, up to 1020 to 1487 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33049 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

In FIG. 8-8 (C), the variable special figure is the first special figure, the set value is 5, and the gaming state is the normal state (low probability low base state) or the time saving state (low probability high base state). This is a display result determination table for the first special figure selected in a certain case. In the first special figure display result judgment table, among the hit judgment values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment, up to 1020 to 1317 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

FIG. 8-8 (D) is the first special figure selected when the variable special figure is the first special figure, the set value is 5, and the gaming state is the probabilistic state (high probability high base state). This is a display result judgment table. In the first special figure display result judgment table, out of the hit judgment values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment, up to 1020 to 1556 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

In FIG. 8-8 (E), the variable special figure is the first special figure, the set value is 6, and the gaming state is the normal state (low accuracy low base state) or the time saving state (low accuracy high base state). This is a display result determination table for the first special figure selected in a certain case. In the first special figure display result judgment table, out of the hit judgment values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment, up to 1020 to 1346 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

FIG. 8-8 (F) is the first special figure selected when the variable special figure is the first special figure, the set value is 6, and the gaming state is the probabilistic state (high probability high base state). This is a display result judgment table. In the first special figure display result judgment table, out of the hit judgment values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment, up to 1020 to 1674 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

In FIG. 8-9 (A), the variable special figure is the second special figure, the set value is 1, and the gaming state is the normal state (low probability low base state) or the time saving state (low probability high base state). This is a display result determination table for the second special figure selected in a certain case. In the second special figure display result judgment table, out of the hit judgment values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result judgment, up to 1020 to 1237 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of place".

FIG. 8-9 (B) is the second special figure selected when the variable special figure is the second special figure, the set value is 1, and the gaming state is the probabilistic state (high probability high base state). This is a display result judgment table. In the second special figure display result judgment table, out of the hit judgment values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment, up to 1020 to 1346 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

In FIG. 8-9 (C), the variable special figure is the second special figure, the set value is 2, and the gaming state is the normal state (low accuracy low base state) or the time saving state (low accuracy high base state). This is a display result determination table for the first special figure selected in a certain case. In the second special figure display result judgment table, out of the hit judgment values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment, up to 1020 to 1253 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

FIG. 8-9 (D) is the second special figure selected when the variable special figure is the second special figure, the set value is 2, and the gaming state is the probabilistic state (high probability high base state). This is a display result judgment table. In the second special figure display result judgment table, among the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result judgment, which is a numerical value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, up to 1020-1383 It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of place".

In FIG. 8-9 (E), the variable special figure is the second special figure, the set value is 3, and the gaming state is the normal state (low accuracy low base state) or the time saving state (low accuracy high base state). This is a display result determination table for the second special figure selected in a certain case. In the second special figure display result judgment table, out of the hit judgment values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result judgment, up to 1020-1272 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of place".

FIG. 8-9 (F) is the second special figure selected when the variable special figure is the second special figure, the set value is 3, and the gaming state is the probabilistic state (high probability high base state). This is a display result judgment table. In the second special figure display result judgment table, out of the hit judgment values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment, up to 1020 to 1429 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of place".

In FIG. 8-10 (A), the variable special figure is the second special figure, the set value is 4, and the gaming state is the normal state (low accuracy low base state) or the time saving state (low accuracy high base state). This is a display result determination table for the second special figure selected in a certain case. In the second special figure display result judgment table, out of the hit judgment values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment, up to 1020 to 1292 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of place".

FIG. 8-10 (B) is the second special figure selected when the variable special figure is the second special figure, the set value is 4, and the gaming state is the probabilistic state (high probability high base state). This is a display result judgment table. In the second special figure display result judgment table, out of the hit judgment values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment, up to 1020 to 1487 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "out of place".

In FIG. 8-10 (C), the variable special figure is the second special figure, the set value is 5, and the gaming state is the normal state (low accuracy low base state) or the time saving state (low accuracy high base state). This is a display result determination table for the second special figure selected in a certain case. In the second special figure display result judgment table, among the hit judgment values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result judgment, up to 1020 to 1317 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

FIG. 8-10 (D) is the second special figure selected when the variable special figure is the second special figure, the set value is 5, and the gaming state is the probabilistic state (high probability high base state). This is a display result judgment table. In the second special figure display result judgment table, out of the hit judgment values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment, up to 1020 to 1556 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

In FIG. 8-10 (E), the variable special figure is the second special figure, the set value is 6, and the gaming state is the normal state (low accuracy low base state) or the time saving state (low accuracy high base state). This is a display result determination table for the second special figure selected in a certain case. In the second special figure display result judgment table, out of the hit judgment values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment, up to 1020 to 1346 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

FIG. 8-10 (F) is the first special figure selected when the variable special figure is the first special figure, the set value is 6, and the gaming state is the probabilistic state (high probability high base state). This is a display result judgment table. In the first special figure display result judgment table, out of the hit judgment values that are numerical values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 and are compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment, up to 1020 to 1674 are It is assigned to "big hit", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

As described above, in each display result judgment table, when the game state is in the probability change state (high probability state), more judgment values than in the normal state or the time saving state are the special figures of "big hit". It is assigned to the display result. As a result, in the probabilistic state in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 performs probabilistic change control, the probability that it is determined to control the special figure display result as a "big hit" in the big hit game state in the normal state or the time saving state (the present embodiment). In the feature unit 245SG of, 1/300 when the set value is 1, 1/280 when the set value is 2, 1/260 when the set value is 3, and 1/240 when the set value is 4. Compared to 1/220 when the set value is 5 and 1/200 when the set value is 6, the probability that the special figure display result will be controlled as a "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state is higher (this). In the feature unit 245SG of the embodiment, when the set value is 1, 1/200, when the set value is 2, 1/180, when the set value is 3, 1/160, and when the set value is 4, 1 / 140, 1/120 when the set value is 5, 1/100 when the set value is 6). That is, in each display result determination table, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the probabilistic state, the probability that it is determined to control the jackpot gaming state is higher than in the normal state or the time saving state. , The determination value is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state.

In the feature unit 245SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-7 to 8-10, the magnification of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time saving state is different according to each set value. Different (for example, if the set value is 1, the probability variation of the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state is 1.5 times, and if the setting value is 2, the probability variation with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state is 1.5 times. The jackpot probability multiplier in the state is about 1.56 times, and if the set value is 3, the jackpot probability multiplier in the probability variation state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state is 1.625 times). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the multiplication factor of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time saving state at each set value is constant (for example, 5 times). ) May be set.

Further, in each of the first special figure display result determination tables, the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state is the same regardless of the game state or the set value. Judgment values are assigned as follows. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-7 and 8-8, in the first special figure display result determination table, the special figure display result is set as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or the set value. The probability of being determined to control the small hit game state is set to 1/200.

On the other hand, in each display result determination table for the second special figure, the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state is the first special regardless of the game state or the set value. Judgment values are assigned so that the values are the same as those in the display result judgment table for figures. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-9 and 8-10, in the second special figure display result determination table, the special figure display result is set as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or the set value. The probability of being determined to control the small hit game state is set to 1/100.

It should be noted that the feature unit 245SG of the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the probability of being determined to control the small hit game state with the special figure display result as "small hit" is the same regardless of the set value. The present invention is not limited to this, and the probability of being determined to control the small hit game state with the special figure display result as a "small hit" may be different depending on the set value. Further, the feature unit 245SG of the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" and the small hit gaming state is different according to the variable special map. The invention is not limited to this, and the probability of being determined to control the small hit gaming state with the special figure display result as a "small hit" may be the same probability regardless of the variable special figure.

Here, focusing on the numerical range of the hit judgment values assigned to the "big hit" and "small hit" in each display result judgment table, the display result for the first special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. In the determination table, the range from 102 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of ~ set value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is a range of 1238 to 1253 for the set value 2, a range of 1238 to 1272 for the set value 3, a range of 1238 to 1292 for the set value 4, and a range of 1238 to 1317 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the feature unit 245SG of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the value is in the range of 0 to 65535 when the set value is 1. Of the hit judgment values that can be taken, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical value among the big hit judgment values is common. Numerical values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the numerical range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1238 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). I will go.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is to determine the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value of. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, the hit judgment values from 102 to 1346 are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, while they are small. The hit judgment value is 32767 to 33094 with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit judgment value in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1346) in the case of the set value 6. Since it is set in the range, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the big hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

Next, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the probability change state, the range from 102 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of ~ set value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the set value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the set value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for the set value 4, and the range of 1347 to 1556 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the feature unit 245SG of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the probabilistic state, the value can be taken in the range of 0 to 65535 when the set value is 1. Of the hit judgment values, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical range of the big hit judgment values is set. Numerical values within the range including the non-common numerical range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1347 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). I will go.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit determination value is the same as the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of these, the range from 32767 to 33094 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, 1020 to 1674 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, while they are small. The hit judgment value is in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1674) in the case of the set value 6, and 32767 is set as the reference value of the small hit judgment value (small hit reference value) of 32767 to 33094. Since it is set in the range, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the big hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result judgment table for the second special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit judgment values is the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of ~ set value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is a range of 1238 to 1253 for the set value 2, a range of 1238 to 1272 for the set value 3, a range of 1238 to 1292 for the set value 4, and a range of 1238 to 1317 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the feature unit 245SG of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the value is in the range of 0 to 65535 when the set value is 1. Of the hit judgment values that can be taken, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical value among the big hit judgment values is common. Numerical values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the numerical range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1238 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). I will go.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is to determine the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value of. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, the hit judgment values from 102 to 1346 are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, while they are small. The hit judgment value is 32767 to 33421 with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit judgment value in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1346) in the case of the set value 6. Since it is set in the range, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the big hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

Next, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the probability change state, the range from 102 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of ~ set value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the set value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the set value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for the set value 4, and the range of 1347 to 1556 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the feature unit 245SG of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table for FIG. 2 when the gaming state is the probabilistic state, when the set value is 1, the value can be taken in the range of 0 to 65535. Of the judgment values, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the big hit judgment values are not included in the common numerical range. Numerical values within the range including the common numerical range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1347 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). I will go.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit determination value is the same as the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of these, the range from 32767 to 33421 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, 1020 to 1674 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, while they are small. The hit judgment value is 32767 to 33421 with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit judgment value in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1674) in the case of the set value 6. Since it is set in the range, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the big hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

As described above, in the feature unit 245SG of the present embodiment, in each display result determination table, regardless of the game state and the set value, the common numerical range or the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set based on the hit determination value 1020. The judgment value included in the continuous numerical range of 1 consisting of is set as the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and the continuous numerical range of 1 is based on the hit judgment value 32767 regardless of the game state and the set value (common). The variable display result is judged by using the judgment value included in the numerical range) as the numerical range of the small hit judgment value.

Further, in each of these display result judgment tables, when the fluctuation special figures are the same, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is the same regardless of the game state (the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is Same). Further, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value differs depending on whether the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure (small in the display result judgment table for the first special figure). While the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the hit judgment value is 328, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value in the display result judgment table for the second special figure is about 655. On the other hand, the numerical range of the small hit determination value itself is set to 32767 as a reference value (small hit reference value).

Further, as described above, in each gaming state, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, there is a probability that it is determined that the special figure display result is controlled to the jackpot gaming state as the "big hit". Judgment values are assigned so that the lower the value of the set value and the larger the value of the set value, the higher the probability that the special figure display result will be determined to be controlled to the jackpot gaming state as "big hit" (big hit probability: set value 6> set value). 5> Set value 4> Set value 3> Set value 2> Set value 1).

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and when the value of MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the jackpot, the CPU 103 hits the jackpot (big hit) with respect to the special symbol. It is decided to be A to jackpot C). Further, when MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hit, it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit. That is, the winning of the big hit and the small hit is decided with the probability according to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIGS. 8-7 to 8-10 indicates the probability of a big hit (ratio) and the probability of a small hit (ratio). Further, determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control the big hit game state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display device 245SG004A or the second special symbol display device 245SG004B is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a big hit design. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control the small hit gaming state, but the stop at the first special symbol display device 245SG004A or the second special symbol display device 245SG004B. It also means deciding whether or not to make the symbol a small hit symbol.

In the feature unit 245SG of the present embodiment, a total of 6 set values of 1 to 6 are provided as set values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this. , The set value that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more.

8-11 (A) and 8-11 (B) are explanatory views showing a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) and a jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101. Is. Of these, FIG. 8-11 (A) determines the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). It is a table when you do. Further, FIG. 8-11 (B) determines the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the second start winning opening (that is, when the second special symbol is variably displayed). It is a table of cases.

In the jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, the jackpot type is selected from jackpot A to jackpot C based on the random number (MR2) for determining the jackpot type. The table referenced to determine.

Here, the jackpot type in the feature portion 245SG of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-12. In the feature unit 245SG of the present embodiment, the jackpot types include jackpot A (also referred to as non-probability variable jackpot) in which only the time saving control is executed after the end of the jackpot game state and the game shifts to the low probability high base state. After the end, the high-accuracy control and the time-saving control are executed, and the jackpot B and the jackpot C (also referred to as the probability variation jackpot) that shift to the high-accuracy high-base state are set.

The jackpot game state by "big hit A" is a normally open jackpot that is repeatedly executed five times (so-called 5 rounds) in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state that is advantageous to the player. The jackpot game state by "B" is a normal open jackpot in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state which is advantageous for the player. Further, the big hit game state by the "big hit C" is a normal open big hit in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed 15 times (so-called 15 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state which is advantageous for the player.

The time saving control executed after the end of the big hit game state by the "big hit A" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the feature unit 245SG of the present embodiment), or the special figure game of the predetermined number of times is executed. Figure Ends when the game is in a jackpot game state before the game is executed.

On the other hand, the high-accuracy control and the time saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the jackpot B or the jackpot C are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Therefore, when the big hit that occurs again is the big hit B or the big hit C, the high accuracy control and the time saving control are executed again after the end of the big hit game state, so that the big hit game state is continuous without going through the normal state. It becomes a so-called consecutive villa state that occurs in.

In the feature portion 245SG of the present embodiment, a mode in which three types of jackpot A to jackpot C are provided as jackpot types is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is 2. There may be less than one type, or four or more types.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-11 (A), in the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol), 0 to 99 out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 is assigned to the jackpot A. 100 to 249 are assigned to jackpot B, and 250 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8-11 (B), in the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol), 0 to 99 out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 is assigned to jackpot A. 100 to 199 are assigned to jackpot B, and 200 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. That is, in the feature unit 245SG of the present embodiment, the determination ratio of the jackpot type differs depending on whether the winning opening in which the game ball has won is the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening. , The jackpot type is determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

In the feature unit 245SG of the present embodiment, the jackpot type is determined by using MR2 which is a random value for determining the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is not limited to this. It may be determined using MR1 which is a random value for determining the special figure display result.

Further, the ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining the variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the variation pattern can be selected from the plurality of types described above according to the predetermined determination result. Determine to one of the fluctuation patterns of.

Specifically, as the fluctuation pattern judgment table, the fluctuation pattern judgment table for big hits used when it is predetermined to set the variable display result to "big hit" and the variable display result to be "small hit". A fluctuation pattern judgment table for big hits used when it is pre-determined, and a fluctuation pattern judgment table for misses used when it is pre-determined to make the variable display result "off" are prepared in advance. ing.

In the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3), and the revival effect are executed. Not Super Reach γ Jackpot Fluctuation Pattern (PB1-4), Super Reach γ Jackpot Fluctuation Pattern (PB1-5), Super Reach δ Jackpot Fluctuation Pattern (PB1-6) On the other hand, a predetermined random number value is assigned as the determination value in the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-13 (A), in the jackpot variation pattern determination table, 1 to 50 of the MR3 determination value ranges 1 to 997 are normal reach jackpot variation patterns (PB1). -1) is assigned, 51 to 200 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 201 to 400 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). It is assigned, and 401 to 650 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ jackpot (PB1-4) that does not execute the resurrection effect, and 651 to 700 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ jackpot that executes the resurrection effect. It is assigned to (PB1-5), and 701 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-6) of the super reach δ jackpot.

Further, in the feature unit 245SG of the present embodiment, regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the fluctuation pattern for big hits is determined by using the fluctuation pattern determination table of 1, that is, the pachinko. The present invention exemplifies a mode in which the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern is the same when the variable display result is a big hit regardless of the set value set in the game machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this. , The determination ratio of each fluctuation pattern may be different for each set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Further, in the small hit variation pattern determination table, a predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is the determination value for the variation pattern of the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1). Is assigned as. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-13 (B), in the variation pattern determination table for small hits, the variation pattern of small hits from 0 to 997 in the range 0 to 997 of the determination value of MR3 ( It is assigned to PC1-1). Although only PC1-1 is provided as the variation pattern of the small hit in the feature unit 245SG of the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variation pattern of the small hit is 2 or more. Fluctuation pattern of may be provided.

Further, the deviation pattern determination table includes the deviation pattern determination table A used when the number of reserved storages is 1 or less in the low base state in which the game state is not subjected to the time reduction control, and the low base. The deviation pattern determination table B used when the total number of reserved storages is 2 to 4 in the state, and the deviation variation used when the total number of reserved storages is 5 to 8 in the low base state. A pattern determination table C and a variation pattern determination table D for deviation used when the game state is a high base state in which time reduction control is performed are prepared in advance.

In the deviation pattern determination table A, the non-reach deviation variation pattern without shortening (PA1-1), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), the super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), and the super Random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is taken for the fluctuation pattern of reach β off (PA2-3), the fluctuation pattern of super reach γ out of reach (PA2-4), and the fluctuation pattern of super reach δ off (PA2-5). A predetermined random number value within the possible range is assigned as a judgment value.

As shown in FIG. 8-14 (A), in the deviation pattern determination table A (for a low-base medium total hold storage number of 1 or less), 1 to 450 of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3. Are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), 451 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 850 are out of super reach α. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 851 to 930 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) out of super reach β, and 931 to 970 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2) out of super reach γ. -4) is assigned, and 971 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-5) out of super reach δ.

Further, in the deviation pattern determination table B, the shortened non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-2), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super Reach α out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), Super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) Super reach γ out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-4), Super reach δ out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-5) On the other hand, a predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take is assigned as the determination value.

As shown in FIG. 8-14 (B), in the deviation pattern determination table B (for 2 to 4 low-base medium total pending storage numbers), 1 to 1 of the MR3 determination value ranges 1 to 997. Up to 500 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), 501 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 850 are out of super reach α. Is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) of, 851 to 930 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β out of order (PA2-3), and 931 to 970 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach γ out of order (PA2-3). It is assigned to PA2-4), and 971 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-5) out of super reach δ.

Further, in the deviation pattern determination table C, the shortened non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-3), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super Fluctuation pattern of reach α off (PA2-2), fluctuation pattern of super reach β off (PA2-3), fluctuation pattern of super reach γ off (PA2-4), fluctuation pattern of super reach δ off (PS2-5) On the other hand, a predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take is assigned as the determination value.

As shown in FIG. 8-14 (C), in the deviation pattern determination table C (for low-base medium total hold storage number of 5 or more), 1 to 550 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3. Are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), 551 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 850 are out of super reach α. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 851 to 930 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) out of super reach β, and 931 to 970 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2) out of super reach γ. -4) is assigned, and 971 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-5) out of super reach δ.

Further, in the deviation pattern determination table D, the shortening non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-4), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super reach α deviation variation pattern corresponding to the time reduction control are performed. (PA2-2), fluctuation pattern of super reach β out of alignment (PA2-3), fluctuation pattern of super reach γ out of alignment (PA2-4), fluctuation pattern of super reach δ out of alignment (PA2-5) A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value in the range that the MR3 can take.

As shown in FIG. 8-14 (D), in the deviation pattern determination table D (for high base and medium), 1 to 550 of the judgment value ranges 1 to 997 of MR3 are non-reach deviation variations. It is assigned to the pattern (PA1-4), and 551 to 700 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), and 701 to 850 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2). 851 to 930 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β out of order (PA2-3), and 931 to 970 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of out of super reach γ (PA2-4). The numbers 971 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-5) out of the super reach δ.

As described above, when the deviation pattern determination tables A to D are used, the ratio for determining the non-reach variation pattern and the normal reach variation pattern is set higher than the ratio for determining the super reach variation pattern. When the deviation pattern determination tables A to D are used, 701 to 850 of the determination values are the fluctuation patterns of the super reach α deviation, and 851 to 930 are the deviation patterns of the super reach β, regardless of the fluctuation pattern determination table. Fluctuation patterns, 931 to 970 are assigned to the fluctuation patterns of the super reach γ, and 971 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation patterns of the super reach δ, that is, when the variable display result is out of alignment, the super reach Since the fluctuation pattern is determined by a common determination ratio, it is possible to prevent the effect from being lowered due to the variable display according to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach not being executed.

In the feature unit 245SG of the present embodiment, as the deviation pattern, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α deviation, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β deviation, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ deviation, and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach δ deviation Although the respective determination ratios exemplify the completely same form between the set values, the present invention is not limited to this, and these fluctuation patterns of the super reach α deviation and the fluctuation of the super reach β deviation are illustrated. The determination ratios of the pattern, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ deviation, and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach δ deviation may be different for each set value.

In the feature unit 245SG of the present embodiment, when the variable display result is out of alignment, the embodiment in which the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is the same is illustrated, but the present invention is limited to this. If the variable display result is out of alignment, the determination ratios of all the fluctuation patterns of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach may be the same, and the fluctuation of either non-reach and normal reach may be the same. Only the pattern determination rate may be the same.

The non-reach non-reach variation pattern (PA1-2) has a shorter variation time than the non-reach non-reach variation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening, and the non-reach variation pattern (PA1-2) is shorter than the non-reach variation pattern (PA1-2). The deviation pattern (PA1-3) has a shorter fluctuation time (see FIG. 8-6). Therefore, when the number of reserved memories increases, the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time is determined, so that the reserved memories are easily digested, and the number of reserved memories reaches the upper limit of 4. By winning a start prize while the player is in the game, it becomes difficult for a useless start prize that is not stored on hold to occur, and when the number of stored memories decreases, the fluctuation time is long and the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation is not shortened. By determining the pattern (PA1-1), the variable display time becomes longer, so that it is possible to prevent the game from being less interesting due to the variable display not being executed.

Further, in the feature unit 245SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-14 (A) to 8-14 (C), variations are made using a variation pattern determination table for deviation, which differs depending on the total number of reserved storages. Although the form of determining the pattern is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of reserved memories in the special symbol to be changed (for example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the first is the first. The variation pattern may be determined using a variation pattern determination table for deviation, which differs depending on the number of reserved memory of the special symbol and the number of reserved memory of the second special symbol when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed.

Further, the feature unit 245SG of the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which there is a one-to-one correspondence between whether or not to execute the reach effect and which reach effect is to be executed for each determined fluctuation pattern. The present invention is not limited to this, and whether or not the effect control CPU 120 executes the reach effect based on the special figure variation time of the variation pattern, the variable display result, etc., and which reach effect is executed. You may decide whether to do it by lottery.

The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 8-1 may be a backup RAM in which a part or all of the RAM 102 is backed up by a backup power source created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 are stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied with power). To. In particular, at least the data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as the special figure process flag) and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data according to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for recovering the control state before the occurrence of the power failure or the like based on the data when the data is restored after the power failure or the like occurs. Further, the data corresponding to the control state and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as the data indicating the progress state of the game.

Such a RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area (not shown) as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The game control data holding area includes a first special figure holding storage unit, a second special drawing holding storage unit, a normal drawing holding storage unit, a game control flag setting unit, a game control timer setting unit, and a game control counter. It has a setting unit and a game control buffer setting unit.

The first special figure reservation storage unit is a special figure in which the game ball passes (enters) through the first start winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and a starting prize (first starting winning) is generated, but has not yet been started. The reserved data of the game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 245SG004A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the holding number with the first starting winning opening, and satisfies the first starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the above, are reserved data. , Store until the number of stored items reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game. ) Will be the pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

In the second special figure reservation storage unit, the game ball passes (enters) through the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, and a starting winning (second starting winning) is generated, but the special drawing has not been started yet. The reserved data of the figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 245SG004B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the holding number with the second starting winning opening, and satisfies the second starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the above, are reserved data. , Store until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The hold data stored in the second special figure hold storage unit in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game. ) Will be the pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

It should be noted that the hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) through the first start winning opening and the game ball passing (entering) through the second start winning opening. The hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning prize may be stored in association with the hold number in the common hold storage unit. In this case, the start port data indicating which of the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball has passed (entered) may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the hold number. ..

The normal figure hold storage unit stores the hold information of the normal figure game that has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 245SG020 even though the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the normal map holding storage unit is associated with the hold numbers in the order in which the game balls pass through the passage gate 41, and is for determining the normal figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game balls. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 of the above is set as pending data, and is stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

The game control flag setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of flags that can update the state according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit may be provided with a random counter for the CPU 103 to count a part or all of the game random numbers so that they can be updated by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit, a random number value not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating the random number values MR2 to MR4 is stored as a random count value, and periodically according to the execution of the software by the CPU 103. Numerical data indicating each random number value is updated targetly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the operation of updating the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. It may be for updating the random count value by performing a predetermined process such as scramble processing or arithmetic processing on all or a part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

Further, the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 is provided with an effect control data holding area as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation. The effect control data holding area includes an effect control flag setting unit, an effect control timer setting unit, an effect control counter setting unit, and an effect control buffer setting unit.

There are a plurality of types of effect control flag setting units that can update the state according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 and the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. A flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as the display operation of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the effect control timer setting unit stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The effect control counter setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit stores data indicating the count values of the plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In addition, the data constituting the start winning command buffer is stored in the predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit. The command buffer received at the time of starting winning corresponds to the storage area (buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4" corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved storages in the first special figure reserved storage. A storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number "1-0") corresponding to the first special figure during variable display is provided. Further, in the start winning command buffer, the storage area (buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4" corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved storages in the second special figure reserved storage is stored. (Area corresponding to) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”) corresponding to the second special figure during variable display are provided. When there is a start prize to the 1st start winning opening or the 2nd starting winning opening, the starting opening winning designation command (1st starting opening winning designation command or the 2nd starting opening winning designation command) or the hold memory number notification command ( Commands such as the first hold storage number notification command or the second hold storage number notification command) are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. The storage area corresponding to the 1st special figure hold storage and the storage area corresponding to the 2nd special figure hold storage in the received command buffer at the time of starting winning associate these commands, and the 1st special figure hold storage and the 2nd special figure hold storage. Figure A storage area (entry) for storing separately from the reserved storage is secured.

The stored contents of these storage areas (entries) will be described later when the start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the highest held storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") is started. It is shifted up one by one so that it does.

The effect control CPU 120 stores the command at the time of starting winning to the first starting winning opening from the beginning (the entry with the youngest buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the first special figure hold storage of the received command buffer at the time of starting winning. At the time of starting winning to the second starting winning opening, the command is stored from the beginning (the entry with the youngest buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the second special figure hold storage of the received command buffer at the time of starting winning. At the time of the start winning, the start opening prize designation command to the hold storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, when the command is received, each command is stored in the storage area corresponding to each of the end "1" to "4" of the buffer number corresponding to the first special figure hold storage or the second special figure hold storage. I will go.

Next, the process executed by the CPU 103 in the feature unit 245SG of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 8-15 is a flowchart showing the start winning determination process (S101) shown in FIG. In the start winning determination process, as shown in FIG. 8-15, the CPU 103 first receives a detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. Based on this, it is determined whether or not the first start port switch 22A is ON (245SGS501a). At this time, if the first start port switch 22A is on (245SGS501a; Y), the number of reserved special figure reservations, which is the number of reserved special figure games using the first special figure, is the predetermined upper limit value (245SGS501a; Y). For example, it is determined whether or not the upper limit storage number is "4") (245SGS502). The CPU 103 may specify the first special figure reserved storage number by reading, for example, the first reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the first reserved storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit. When the number of reserved storages in the first special figure is not the upper limit value (245SGS502; N), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit is set to "1" (245SGS503).

When the first start port switch 22A is off at 245SGS501a (245SGS501a; N) or when the first special figure hold storage number reaches the upper limit value at 245SGS502 (245SGS502; Y), the variable winning ball device 6B Based on the detection signal from the second start port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second start winning opening formed by, it is determined whether or not the second start port switch 22B is on (245SGS501b). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is on (245SGS501b; Y), the number of reserved special figure reservations, which is the number of reserved special figure games using the second special figure, is the predetermined upper limit value (245SGS501b; Y). For example, it is determined whether or not the upper limit storage number is "4") (245SGS505). The CPU 103 may specify the second special figure reserved storage number by reading, for example, the second reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the second reserved storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit. When the second special figure hold storage number is not the upper limit value in 245SGS505 (245SGS505; N), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit is set to "2" (245SGS506).

When the second start port switch is not on (245SGS501b; N) or when the second special figure reserved storage number is the upper limit value (245SGS505; Y), the start winning determination process ends.

After executing any of the processes of 245SGS503 and 245SGS506, the special figure hold storage number corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the stored value of the start port buffer, is updated to be added by 1 (245SGS507). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first hold storage count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the second hold storage count value is added by 1. In this way, the first hold memory count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. Further, the second reserved memory count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. At this time, the total number of reserved storages is also updated to be added by 1 (245SGS508). For example, the total hold storage count value, which is the stored value of the total hold storage counter provided in the game control counter setting unit, may be updated so as to be added by 1.

After executing the process of 245SGS508, the CPU 103 uses the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the jackpot type determination from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is extracted (245SGS509). Numerical data indicating each random number value extracted in this way is stored by being set as hold information at the beginning of an empty entry in the special figure hold storage unit corresponding to the start port buffer value (245SGS510). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the numerical data indicating the random numbers MR1 to MR3 is stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the first 2 Numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the special figure hold storage unit.

The numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set as "big hit", and further, the variable display result. It is used to determine the type of big hit when it is called "big hit". The random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol. By executing the process of 245SGS509, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random number values used for determining the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol and the variable display mode including the variable display time.

Following the processing of the 245SGS510, the transmission setting of the start opening winning designation command according to the start opening buffer value is performed (245SGS511). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the storage address of the first start port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer. The setting for transmitting the first start opening prize designation command to 12 is made. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second start port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, so that the effect control board 12 is subjected to. Make settings to send the second start port winning designation command. The start port winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. Will be done.

Following the processing of 245SGS511, the random number value determination processing at the time of winning is executed (245SGS512). After that, for example, the hold storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 by storing the storage address of the hold storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. (245SGS513). The hold storage number notification command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. Will be done.

After executing the process of 245SGS513, it is determined whether or not the start port buffer value is "1" (245SGS514). At this time, if the start port buffer value is "1" (245SGS514; Y), the start port buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0", and then the process proceeds to (245SGS515) and 245SGS501b. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2" (245SGS514; N), the start port buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (245SGS516), and then the start winning determination process is performed. To finish. As a result, even when both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect a valid start prize for the game ball, the process based on the detection of both valid start prizes can be reliably completed.

FIG. 8-16 (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed by the 245 SGS 512 of FIG. 8-15 as the winning random number value determination process. When the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is started in the feature unit 245SG, the game state, the special symbol for executing the variable display, and the display according to the set value are displayed in the special symbol normal processing (step S22 in FIG. 5). Select the result judgment table (see FIGS. 8-7 to 8-10), and use the selected display result judgment table to set the special figure display result (variable display result of the special symbol) as a "big hit" and make a big hit game state. It is determined whether or not to control the game and whether or not to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" in the small hit game state.

On the other hand, apart from these determinations, the CPU 103 executes the winning random number value determination processing of the 245SGS512 at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning opening (the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening). Therefore, it is determined whether or not it is determined that the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the special symbol display result, and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the predetermined display mode accompanied by super reach. Do. As a result, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit before the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the start winning opening is started, that is, at the start of the variable display. It is determined that the special figure display result is "big hit" or "small hit" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is the variable display mode of which category, and based on this judgment result. Then, as will be described later, the effect control CPU 120 or the like executes a look-ahead advance notice effect such as a hold display advance notice effect.

In the winning random number value determination process shown in FIG. 8-16 (A), the CPU 103 first confirms the state of the time saving flag and the probability variation flag provided in, for example, the game control flag setting unit 245SG152, for pachinko gaming. The current gaming state of the machine 1 is specified (245SGS521). The CPU 103 identifies that it is in the probability change state (high probability high base state) when the probability change flag is on, and is in the time saving state (low probability high base state) when the probability change flag is off and the time saving flag is on. When both the probability variation flag and the time saving flag are off, it is sufficient to specify that the normal state (low probability low base state).

Following the processing of the 245SGS521, the CPU 103 specifies a set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (245SGS522). Next, the display result determination table according to the current game state, the start opening buffer value, and the set value is selected and set (245SGS524).

Specifically, when the start port buffer value is "1", the set value is 1, and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the first special figure shown in FIG. 8-7 (A) is used. When the display result judgment table is set and the set value is 1 and the game state is the probability change state, the display result judgment table for the first special figure shown in FIG. 8-7 (B) is set and the set value is 2. When the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the display result determination table for the first special figure shown in FIG. 8-7 (C) is set, the set value is 2, and the game state is in the probable change state. If there is, the display result determination table for the first special figure shown in FIG. 8-7 (D) is set, and if the set value is 3 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, FIG. 8-7 (E). ) Is set, and when the set value is 3 and the gaming state is the probabilistic state, the display result judgment table for the first special figure shown in FIG. 8-7 (F) is set. To set.

When the start port buffer value is "1", the set value is 4, and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the first special figure display result determination shown in FIG. 8-8 (A) is determined. When the table is set and the set value is 4 and the gaming state is the probabilistic state, the display result determination table for the first special figure shown in FIG. 8-8 (B) is set, and the set value is 5 and When the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the display result determination table for the first special figure shown in FIG. 8-8 (C) is set, and when the set value is 5 and the gaming state is the probabilistic state. When the display result determination table for the first special figure shown in FIG. 8-8 (D) is set and the set value is 6 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is shown in FIG. 8-8 (E). The display result determination table for the first special figure is set, and when the set value is 6 and the gaming state is the probabilistic state, the display result determination table for the first special figure shown in FIG. 8-8 (F) is set. ..

When the start port buffer value is "2", the set value is 1, and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the display result determination for the second special figure shown in FIG. 8-9 (A) is determined. When the table is set and the set value is 1 and the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, the display result determination table for the second special figure shown in FIG. 8-9 (B) is set, and the set value is 2 and When the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the display result determination table for the second special figure shown in FIG. 8-9 (C) is set, and when the set value is 2 and the gaming state is the probabilistic state. When the display result determination table for the second special figure shown in FIG. 8-9 (D) is set and the set value is 3 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is shown in FIG. 8-9 (E). The display result judgment table for the second special figure is set, and when the set value is 3 and the gaming state is the probabilistic state, the display result judgment table for the second special figure shown in FIG. 8-9 (F) is set. ..

Further, when the start port buffer value is "2", the set value is 4, and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the display result determination for the second special figure shown in FIG. 8-10 (A) is determined. When the table is set and the set value is 4 and the gaming state is the probabilistic state, the display result determination table for the second special figure shown in FIG. 8-10 (B) is set, and the set value is 5 and When the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the display result determination table for the second special figure shown in FIG. 8-10 (C) is set, and when the set value is 5 and the gaming state is the probabilistic state. When the display result determination table for the second special figure shown in FIG. 8-10 (D) is set and the set value is 6 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is shown in FIG. 8-10 (E). The display result judgment table for the second special figure is set, and when the set value is 6 and the gaming state is the probabilistic state, the display result judgment table for the second special figure shown in FIG. 8-10 (F) is set. ..

After setting the display result determination table, the variable display result determination module (245SGS525) performs a process of determining whether the special figure display result is "big hit", "small hit", or "missing". In the variable display result judgment module, the numerical range of the big hit judgment value or the small hit judgment value in the set variable display result judgment table is compared with the value of the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment, and the disorder is described. If the value of the numerical value MR1 is within the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, the variable display result is judged as a big hit, and if the value of the random value MR1 is within the numerical range of the small hit judgment value, the variable display result is judged as a small hit. Then, if the value of the random number value MR1 is outside the numerical range of the big hit determination value and outside the numerical range of the small hit determination value, the variable display result may be determined to be out of range.

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the 245SGS525 determines that the variable display result is a big hit (245SGS526). When it is determined that the hit is not a big hit (245SGS526; N), it is determined whether or not the variable display result is determined to be a small hit in the 245SGS525 (245SGS527). When it is determined that the small hit does not occur, that is, when it is determined that the variable display is out of alignment (245SGS527; N), the first symbol designation is a symbol designation command corresponding to the variable display result being "out of alignment". The command transmission setting is executed (245SGS527a), and it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is set, that is, whether or not the current gaming state is the time saving state (245SGS528).

When the time saving flag is not set (245SGS528; N), the deviation pattern determination table A shown in FIG. 8-14 is selected and set, and the process proceeds to 245SGS536 (245SGS529). When the time saving flag is set. (245SGS528; Y) selects and sets the deviation pattern determination table D shown in FIG. 8-14 (D), and proceeds to 245SGS536 (245SGS530).

When it is determined by the 245SGS526 that the variable display is a big hit (245SGS526; Y), the big hit type is determined based on the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type and the big hit type determination table (245SGS533). At this time, the CPU 103 responds to the fluctuation special figure (“first special figure” corresponding to “1” or “second special figure” corresponding to “2”) specified corresponding to the start port buffer value. , Select the jackpot type determination table data from the table data that composes the jackpot type determination table. Then, by referring to the selected jackpot type determination table data, it is determined which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is determined.

Further, a symbol designation command according to the determined jackpot type, that is, a second symbol designation command in the case of jackpot A, a third symbol designation command in the case of jackpot B, and a fourth symbol designation command in the case of jackpot C. The transmission setting of the symbol designation command is executed (245SGS534), and then the jackpot variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 8-13 (A) is selected and set as a table for determining the jackpot variation pattern (245SGS535). ), Proceed to 245SGS536.

Further, when the 245SGS527 determines that a small hit is obtained in the variable display (245SGS527; Y), the transmission setting of the sixth symbol designation command, which is a symbol designation command corresponding to the variable display result being a "small hit". (245SGS531), select and set the variation pattern determination table for small hits shown in FIG. 8-13 (B) (245SGS532), and proceed to 245SGS536.

In the feature unit 245SG, in the deviation pattern determination table A to the deviation variation pattern determination table D, determination values of 1 to 700 are commonly assigned to the non-reach variation pattern and the normal reach variation pattern. The fluctuation pattern of super reach is assigned to 701 to 997.

Therefore, when the variable display result is out of alignment, the variation pattern is determined using the deviation pattern determination table A or the deviation pattern determination table D, so that the determination of non-reach and super reach is the determination. Even if the number of reserved memories changes later, it will always be a non-reach or super reach fluctuation pattern. Therefore, in the determination at the time of starting winning, the deviation pattern determination table A or the deviation pattern determination table D is used to determine the variation pattern. Is to be judged.

After executing any of the processes of 245SGS529, 245SGS530, 245SGS532,245SGS535, the variation pattern determination table set in each of these steps and the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for the variation pattern determination are used to perform randomization. The variation category according to the range of determination values including the numerical value MR3 is determined (245SGS536). In this feature unit 245SG, as shown in FIG. 8-16 (B), when at least the variable display result is "off", the variable display mode is "non-reach" in common regardless of the total number of reserved storages. Variable category, variable display mode of "super reach", variable display mode other than "non-reach" and "super reach" (for example, normal reach and small hit), and "other" variable category. It suffices if it is possible to determine whether or not the variable category is determined based on the random number value MR3.

After that, after setting for transmitting the variable category designation command according to the determination result by the processing of 245SGS536 to the effect control board 12 (245SGS537), the random number value determination process at the time of winning is terminated.

The symbol designation command and the variable category designation command are transmitted when the CPU 103 executes a command control process.

Next, the processing executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the feature unit 245SG of the present embodiment will be described.

FIG. 8-17 is a flowchart showing the effect control main process in the feature unit 245SG. In the feature unit 245SG, as shown in FIG. 8-17, a portion for executing the error notification process (245SGS078) is added to the effect control main process of FIG. 6 described in the above-mentioned basic description.

In the error notification process (245SGS078), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an error designation command has been received from the main board 11, and if an error designation command has been received, the received error designation has been received. Identify the error detected by the CPU 103 from the command. Then, the effect control CPU 120 may execute control to display the error notification image 245SG005J (see FIG. 8-39) corresponding to the specified error on the image display device 5.

FIG. 8-18 is a part of a flowchart showing the effect control process processing in the feature unit 245SG. In the effect control process process in the feature unit 239SG, after the pre-reading notice determination process (step S71) is executed, the hold display update process (245SGSGS072) and the fourth symbol variable display update process (245SGSGS073) are executed, and then S170 shown in FIG. Any of the processes of ~ S177 is executed.

In the predetermined area of the RAM 122 of the feature unit 245SG, four commands such as a start winning opening designation command, a symbol designation command, a variable category designation command, and a hold storage number notification command are set as one set, and the first special figure hold storage and the first A winning command buffer having a storage area (entry) for storing the special figure hold storage separately is provided.

In the hold display update process, the effect control CPU 120 stores a command of "B100 (H)" indicating the first start winning opening as a starting opening winning designation command stored in the reception command buffer at the time of starting winning. Based on the above, the display number of the hold storage in the first hold storage display area 245SG005D is updated. Further, the effect control CPU 120 is based on the number of "B200 (H)" commands indicating the second start winning opening as the starting opening winning designation commands stored in the start winning command buffer at the time of starting winning. The number of pending storages displayed in the second reserved storage display area 245SG005U is updated.

Further, in the fourth symbol variable display update process (245SGSGS073), the effect control CPU 120 blinks the fourth symbol 245SG005F when the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display. ..

FIG. 8-19 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (S171) shown in FIG. 7. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variable display start command reception flag is set (245SGS271). When the first variable display start command reception flag is set (245SGS271; Y), it corresponds to the buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure hold storage in the start winning command buffer. The various command data and various flags that are attached and stored are shifted upward by one buffer number (S272). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

If the first variable display start command reception flag is not set in the 245SGS271 (245SGS271; N), it is determined whether or not the second variable display start command reception flag is set (245SGS273). If the second variable display start command reception flag is not set (245SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second variable display 2 start command reception flag is set (245SGS273; Y). ), Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure hold storage in the received command buffer at the time of starting winning are stored for one buffer number. It shifts to the upper side one by one (245SGS274). The contents of the buffer number "2-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

After executing the 245SGS272 or 245SGS274, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (245SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop symbol) of the decorative symbol is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command) (245SGS276). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the display result specified by the display result specification command, and stores the data indicating the determined stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. To do.

When the feature unit 245SG of the present embodiment, the received display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the jackpot A, for example, as a stop symbol, a decorative symbol in which three symbols are arranged in an even number is used. Determine the combination (big hit symbol). Further, when the received display result specification command is the third variable display result specification command corresponding to the jackpot B, for example, as a stop symbol, a decorative symbol in which 3 symbols are arranged in odd numbers other than "7" and "3" is used. Determine the combination (big hit symbol). Then, when the received display result specification command is the fourth variable display result specification command corresponding to the jackpot C, for example, a combination of decorative symbols in which three symbols are aligned with "7" or "3" as stop symbols (big hit). Design) is decided. When the received display result specification command is the fifth variable table uncle result specification command indicating a small hit, for example, three consecutive numbers such as "123" and "246", and three consecutive even numbers (or three consecutive even numbers). Determine the combination of decorative symbols (small hit symbol) such as (odd number). Then, when the received display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command indicating loss, for example, a combination of decorative symbols (missing symbols) different from the above-mentioned large hit symbol or small hit symbol is determined.

In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, a random number for determining the stop symbol, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating a combination of decorative symbols and a numerical value are associated with each other. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be determined. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value corresponding to the extracted random number.

After the execution of the 245SGS276, the effect control CPU 120 displays the reel image 245SG005G on the image display device 5 and performs a variable display in the reel image 245SG005G to perform a reel effect for executing a reel effect for stopping and displaying a predetermined symbol. The determination process (245SGS276a) is executed. Then, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is a fluctuation pattern of super reach (245SG277). Whether or not the variable display variation pattern is a super reach variation pattern may be specified from the variation pattern specification command read out in the 245SG275. When the variable display variation pattern is a super reach variation pattern (245SG277; Y), a cut for determining whether or not to execute the cut-in effect described later during the reach effect and the effect pattern of the cut-in effect. The in-effect determination process (245SGS278) is executed to proceed to 245SGS279. If the variable display variation pattern is not the super reach variation pattern (245SG277; N), the process proceeds to 245SGS279 without executing the processing of 245SGS278.

Then, in the 245SGS279, the effect control CPU 120 executes a advance notice effect determination process for determining whether or not to execute the advance notice effect described later in the variable display and the effect pattern of the advance notice effect (245SGS279). As shown in FIGS. 8-31 to 8-34, the advance notice effect is an effect that can be executed during the variable display of the non-reach variation pattern excluding the shortened non-reach, and is the effect of the normal reach and super reach variation patterns. The variable display is an effect that can be executed in the period from the start of the variable display to the timing of reaching.

After executing 245SGS279, the effect control CPU 120 selects an effect control pattern (process table) according to the variation pattern designation command (245SGS280). Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (245SGS281).

In the process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R are controlled. The sound control execution data, the operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, etc. are sequentially arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (1 to N). There is.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays the effect device (image display as an effect component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as production parts, speakers 8L, 8R as production parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (245SGS282). For example, the image display device 5 outputs a command to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the fluctuation pattern. Further, in order to control the lighting / extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. Further, in order to output the voice from the speakers 8L and 8R, the control signal (sound number data) is output to the voice control board 13.

In the feature unit 245SG in the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern designation command so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed according to the variation pattern corresponding to one-to-one. May select the variation pattern to be used from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the variation pattern specification command.

Then, a value corresponding to the fluctuation time (variable display time) specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is set in the fluctuation time timer (245SGS283). Further, a predetermined time is set in the fluctuation control timer (245SGS284). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms. Every time the predetermined time elapses, the effect control CPU 120 writes the image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols to the VRAM, and the display control unit 123 writes the image data to the VRAM. A signal corresponding to the image data is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image according to the signal, whereby variable display of the decorative pattern is realized. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect processing during variable display (S172), and the variable display start setting process is terminated (245SGS285).

FIG. 8-20 is a flowchart showing an example of a reel effect determination process (245SGSGS276a) executed by the effect control CPU 120. In the reel effect determination process shown in FIG. 8-20, the effect control CPU 120 first specifies the game state at that time (245SGSGS291). Then, it is determined whether or not the specified gaming state is a normal state (low probability low base state) (245SGSGS292).

If the specified gaming state is not the normal state (245SGSGS292; N), the reel effect determination process is terminated. Therefore, in the feature unit 245SG, the execution of the reel effect is not determined in the time saving state (low accuracy high base state) or the probability variation state (high accuracy high base state) which is the gaming state other than the normal state.

On the other hand, when the specified gaming state is the normal state (245SGSGS292; Y), the variable display result is specified based on the set value at that time and the variable display result notification command transmitted from the main board 11 (245SGSGS293). ).

Then, based on the specified set value, it is determined whether or not to display the "cherry" symbol as the effect result (the symbol to be stopped and displayed) of the reel effect (245SGSGS294). To determine these "cherry" symbols, a random value for the cherry symbol is extracted, and the extracted random value for the cherry symbol is associated with each set value in the cherry symbol determination table (not shown). Is determined by the ratio shown in FIG. 8-21 (A) depending on whether or not the above conditions are met.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-21 (A), when the set value is set to 1, the display of the "cherry" symbol is determined at a rate of 0.5%, and the set value is 2. When is set to, the display of the "cherry" symbol is determined at a rate of 1.0%, and when the set value is set to 3, the display of the "cherry" symbol is determined at a rate of 1.5%. Is determined, and when the set value is set to 4, the display of the "cherry" symbol is determined at a rate of 2.0%, and when the set value is set to 5, 2.5%. The display of the "cherry" symbol is determined by the ratio, and when the set value is set to 6, the display of the "cherry" symbol is determined by the ratio of 3.0%. That is, although the ratio of determining the display of the "cherry" symbol is small, the larger the set value is, the easier it is to determine the effect result.

When the display of the "cherry" symbol is determined as the effect result of the reel effect (245SGSGS295; Y), the determined effect result is memorized (245SGSGS300b), the reel effect determination process is terminated, and the effect result of the reel effect is completed. If the display of the "cherry" symbol is not determined (245SGSGS295; N), it is determined whether or not to display the "watermelon" symbol as the effect result of the reel effect (the symbol to be stopped and displayed) based on the set value. (245SGSGS296). Regarding the determination of whether or not to display these "watermelon" symbols, as in the case of determining whether or not to display the "cherry" symbol described above, a random value for the watermelon symbol is extracted and the extracted watermelon symbol is used. The random value is determined at the ratio shown in FIG. 8-21 (B) depending on whether or not the random value matches the winning determination value associated with each set value in the watermelon symbol determination table (not shown). It has become like.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-21 (B), when the set value is set to 1, the display of the "watermelon" symbol is determined at a rate of 6.5%, and the set value is 2. When is set to, the display of the "watermelon" symbol is determined at a rate of 1.0%, and when the set value is set to 3, the display of the "watermelon" symbol is determined at a rate of 1.5%. Is determined, and when the set value is set to 4, the display of the "watermelon" symbol is determined at a rate of 2.0%, and when the set value is set to 5, 2.5%. The display of the "watermelon" symbol is determined by the ratio, and when the set value is set to 6, the display of the "watermelon" symbol is determined by the ratio of 3.0%. In other words, the ratio of the display of the "watermelon" symbol is larger than that of the "cherry" symbol, and the larger the set value is, the easier it is to determine the display of the "cherry" symbol. There is.

When the display of the "watermelon" symbol is determined as the effect result of the reel effect (245SGSGS297; Y), the determined effect result is memorized (245SGSGS300b), and the reel effect determination process is terminated, while the effect result of the reel effect is completed. When the display of the "watermelon" symbol is not determined (245SGSGS297; N), it is determined whether or not the variable display result specified by 245SGSGS293 is a big hit (245SGSGS298).

If the variable display result is not a big hit (245SGSGS298; N), the process proceeds to 245SGSGS300d, while if the variable display result is a big hit (245SGSGS298; Y), the reel effect effect result (stop display is displayed) based on the set value. It is determined whether or not to display the "7" symbol (seven symbol) as the symbol) (245SGSGS299). Regarding the determination of whether or not to display these "7" symbols, as in the case of determining whether or not to display the "cherry" symbol described above, the random value for the seven symbol is extracted and the extracted seven symbol is used. In a seven symbol determination table (not shown), the random number value is determined at the ratio shown in FIG. 8-21 (C) depending on whether or not it matches the winning determination value associated with each set value. It has become like.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-21 (C), when the set value is set to 4, the display of the "7" symbol is determined at a rate of 1%, and the set value is set to 5. If it is set, the display of the "7" symbol is determined at a rate of 3%, and if the set value is set to 6, the display of the "7" symbol is determined at a rate of 5%, and the set value is set. When is set to any of 1 to 3, the display of the "7" symbol is not determined. Therefore, by displaying the "7" symbol, it is definitively notified that a big hit will occur, and at the same time, it will be definitively notified that the set value is 4 or more.

When the display of the "7" symbol is determined as the effect result of the reel effect (245SGSGS300a; Y), the determined effect result is memorized (245SGSGS300b), the reel effect determination process is terminated, and the effect result of the reel effect is completed. If the display of the "7" symbol is not determined (245SGSGS300a; N), the process proceeds to 245SGSGS300d, and based on the variable display result specified in 245SGSGS293, the reel effect effect result (the symbol to be stopped and displayed) is ". It is determined whether or not to display the "super hot" symbol (245SGSGS300d).

Even when deciding whether or not to display these "super hot" symbols, the random value for the super hot symbol is extracted, and the extracted random number value for the super hot symbol is variably displayed in the table for determining the super hot symbol (not shown). It is determined by the ratio shown in FIG. 8-21 (D) depending on whether or not the winning judgment values associated with the resulting "big hit" and "other than big hit (small hit / miss)" are matched. It has become so.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-21 (D), when the variable display result is a big hit, the display of the "super hot" symbol is determined at a rate of 20%, and the variable display result is other than the big hit. In the case of a small hit or a miss, the display of the "super hot" symbol is determined at a rate of 1%. Therefore, when the "super hot" symbol is displayed, it is very rare that a big hit will be made, and it will almost certainly be a big hit.

Then, when the display of the "super hot" symbol is determined as the effect result of the reel effect (245SGSGS300e; Y), the determined effect result is memorized (245SGSGS300b), and the reel effect determination process is completed, while the reel effect is completed. If the display of the "super hot" symbol is not decided as the effect result of (245SGSGS300e; N), the "chance" symbol is displayed as the effect result of the reel effect (the symbol to be stopped and displayed) based on the variable display result. Whether or not to do so is determined (245SGSGS300f).

Also in deciding whether or not to display these "chance" symbols, a random number value for the chance symbol is extracted, and the extracted random number value for the chance symbol is a variable display result in the chance symbol determination table (not shown). Depending on whether or not the winning judgment values associated with "big hit" and "other than big hit (small hit / miss)" are matched, the ratio shown in FIG. 8-21 (E) is determined. ing.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-21 (E), when the variable display result is a big hit, the display of the "chance" symbol is determined at a rate of 50%, and the variable display result is a small hit other than the big hit. If it is a hit or a miss, the display of the "chance" symbol is determined at a rate of 30%. Therefore, when the "chance" symbol is displayed, there is a high possibility that it will be a big hit.

Then, when the display of the "chance" symbol is determined as the effect result of the reel effect (245SGSGS300g; Y), the determined effect result is memorized (245SGSGS300b), and the reel effect determination process is terminated, while the reel effect is performed. If the display of the "chance" symbol is not determined as the effect result (245SGSGS300g; N), it is determined whether or not to display the "bell" symbol as the effect result (stop display symbol) of the reel effect (245SGSGS300h). ).

In deciding whether or not to display these "bell" symbols, a random value for the bell symbol is extracted, and the extracted random value for the bell symbol is selected as a winning / non-winning table in a table for determining the bell symbol (not shown). It is determined at the ratio shown in FIG. 8-21 (F) depending on whether or not it matches the associated winning determination value.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-21 (F), it is decided to display the "bell" symbol at a rate of 90%, and not to display the "bell" symbol at a rate of 10%. ..

Then, when the display of the "bell" symbol is determined as the effect result of the reel effect (245SGSGS300i; Y), the determined effect result is memorized (245SGSGS300b), and the reel effect determination process is terminated, while the reel effect is performed. If the display of the "bell" symbol is not determined as the effect result (245SGSGS300i; N), the reel effect determination process is terminated as it is, so that the reel effect is not executed.

As shown in FIGS. 8-21 (A) to 8-21 (F), each of the "cherry", "watermelon", "7", "super hot", and "chance" symbols is a pachinko gaming machine. While it is determined whether or not to display at a rate according to the set value set to 1 and the variable display result, the "bell" symbol is constant regardless of these set values and the variable display result. It is a symbol that determines whether or not to display in proportion. That is, if any of the symbols "cherry", "watermelon", "7", "super hot", and "chance" is stopped and displayed on the reel image 245SG005G as the effect of the reel effect, the pachinko game machine 1 is displayed. While the set value and the variable display result are suggested, when the "bell" symbol is stopped and displayed on the reel image 245SG005G as the effect result of the reel effect, no suggestion is made.

The feature unit 245SG exemplifies a mode in which the reel effect can be executed only during the variable display in the low accuracy and low base state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the reel effect is not limited to this. It may be possible to execute during the variable display of the probability change state or the time saving state (high accuracy high base state, low accuracy high base state).

In the reel effect in the feature unit 245SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-37, the player operates the stick controller 31A from the start of the variable display until a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) elapses. By doing so, the reel image 245SG005G is displayed on the image display device 5, and variable display is executed in the reel image 245SG005G (reel variation is executed). Then, as a production result, any one of the symbols "cherry", "watermelon", "7", "super hot", "chance", and "bell" is stopped and displayed in the reel image 245SG005G.

After any of the symbols "cherry", "watermelon", "7", "super hot", "chance", and "bell" is stopped and displayed in the reel image 245SG005G, the reel image 245SG005G is changed. If the display is a variable display of the fluctuation pattern of normal reach or super reach, it is hidden at the timing before reach, and if the variable display is a variable display of the fluctuation pattern of non-reach, it is hidden at the timing before the end of the variable display. To do.

8-22 to 8-24 are flowcharts showing the cut-in effect determination process shown in FIG. 8-19. In the cut-in effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variation pattern is a variation pattern of super reach α or super reach β (245SGS301). When the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern of super reach α or super reach β (245SGS301; Y), the cut-in effect determination process is terminated, and when the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern of super reach γ or super reach δ (245SGS301; N) further determines whether or not the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern of super reach γ (245SGS302).

When the fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ (245SGS301; Y), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern is PB1-5, that is, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ that executes the revival effect (245SGS303). .. When the fluctuation pattern is PB1-5 (245SGS303; Y), the effect control CPU 120 specifies the jackpot type (245SGS304) and determines whether or not the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (245SGS305). ..

When the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (245SGS305; Y), whether or not to execute the cut-in effect and the effect pattern are determined based on the jackpot type being jackpot A or jackpot B (245SGS306), 245SGS308. Proceed to. In the 245SGS306, as shown in FIG. 8-25 (A), the cut-in effect is not executed based on the fluctuation pattern being PB1-5 and the variable display result (big hit type) being jackpot A or jackpot B. Is determined at a rate of 10%. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 55%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 5%. , The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

As shown in FIGS. 8-32 and 8-40, the cut-in effect in the feature unit 245SG of the present embodiment is an image (operation) of the push button 31B on the image display device 5 during the reach effect of the super reach γ. The promotion image 245SG005H) is displayed, and the player is urged to operate the push button 31B. Then, when the push button 31B is operated during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B, or when the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B ends without the push button 31B being operated, each effect is displayed on the image display device 5. Display effects and cut-in images according to the pattern.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-27 and 8-40, if the effect pattern is pattern CI-1, the image display device 5 displays the cut-in image 245SG005w together with the blue effect, and the effect pattern is If the pattern CI-2, the cut-in image 245SG005x is displayed with the red effect on the image display device 5, and if the effect pattern is the pattern CI-3, the cut-in image 245SG005y is displayed with the golden effect on the image display device 5. If the effect pattern is pattern CI-4, the image display device 5 displays the cut-in image 245SG005z together with the rainbow-colored effect.

Further, when the jackpot type is jackpot C (245SGS305; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the cut-in effect and the effect pattern based on the jackpot type being jackpot C (245SGS307). Proceed to 245SGS308. In 245SGS307, as shown in FIG. 8-25 (A), the non-execution of the cut-in effect is 10% based on the fact that the fluctuation pattern is PB1-5 and the variable display result (big hit type) is big hit C. Determined by the ratio of. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 54%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 5%. The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 1%.

After executing 245SGS306 or 245SGS307, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the cut-in effect is determined (245SGS308). When the execution of the cut-in effect is decided (245SGS308; Y), the determined effect pattern is stored and a value corresponding to the period until the start of the cut-in effect is set in the cut-in effect start waiting timer (245SGS309, 245SGS310). ), The cut-in effect determination process is completed.

Further, when the fluctuation pattern in the 245SGS303 is a fluctuation pattern (PA2-4 or PB1-4) of the super reach γ that does not execute the revival effect (245SGS303; N), the effect control CPU 120 is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The set value is specified (245SGS311), and it is determined whether or not the specified set value is any of 1 to 3 (245SGS312). The set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be specified based on the set value designation command received from the CPU 103.

When the execution of the cut-in effect is determined in the cut-in effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the cut-in effect start waiting timer by -1 each time the variable display effect process (S172) is executed. When the timer for waiting for the start of the cut-in effect has timed out, the process table for the cut-in effect is set according to the determined effect pattern. After that, each time the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect process during variable display, the effect device (image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamp) is in accordance with the contents of the data (process data) in the cut-in effect process table. The cut-in effect may be executed by controlling 9 etc.).

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 3 (245SGS312; Y), it is further determined whether or not the variable display result is a big hit (308SGS313). Whether or not the variable display result is a big hit may be determined by determining whether or not the fluctuation pattern is PB1-4, which is a super reach γ big hit. When the variable display result is a big hit (245SGS313; Y), the big hit type is specified (245SGS314), and it is determined whether or not the big hit type is a big hit A or a big hit B (245SGS315).

When the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (245SGS3315; Y), the cut-in effect is executed based on the setting value being any one of 1 to 3 and the jackpot type being jackpot A or jackpot B. (245SGS3316) and the processing of 245SGS308 to 245SGS310 are executed. In 245SGS316, as shown in FIG. 8-25 (B), the cut-in is based on the fact that the set value is any of 1 to 3 and the variable display result (big hit type) is big hit A or big hit B. The non-execution of the production is determined at a rate of 10%. Further, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 50%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. , The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

When the jackpot type is jackpot C (245SGS315; N), the effect control CPU 120 performs a cut-in effect based on the fact that the set value is one of 1 to 3 and the jackpot type is jackpot C. Whether or not to execute and the effect pattern are determined (245SGS317), and the processes of 245SGS308 to 245SGS310 are executed. In 245SGS317, as shown in FIG. 8-25 (B), the cut-in effect is not produced based on the fact that the set value is any of 1 to 3 and the variable display result (big hit type) is big hit C. The execution is determined at a rate of 10%. Further, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 45%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 5%.

When the variable display result is out of alignment in 245SGS313 (245SGS313; N), the effect control CPU 120 is cut in based on the fact that the set value is one of 1 to 3 and the variable display result is out of alignment. Whether or not to execute the effect and the effect pattern are determined (245SGS318), and the processes of 245SGS308 to 245SGS310 are executed. In the 245SGS318, as shown in FIG. 8-25 (B), the non-execution of the cut-in effect is 55% based on the fact that the set value is any of 1 to 3 and the variable display result is out of order. Determined by percentage. Further, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 35%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 10%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 0%. , The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

Further, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the 245SGS312 is any of 4 to 6 (245SGS312; N), the effect control CPU 120 has a set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of 4. (245SGS221). When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4 (245SGS321; Y), it is further determined whether or not the variable display result is a big hit (245SGS322). Whether or not the variable display result is a big hit may be determined by determining whether or not the fluctuation pattern is PB1-4, which is a super reach γ big hit.

When the variable display result is a big hit (245SGS322; Y), the big hit type is specified (245SGS323), and it is determined whether or not the big hit type is a big hit A or a big hit B (245SGS324).

When the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (245SGS324; Y), the presence / absence of execution of the cut-in effect and the effect pattern based on the setting value being 4 and the jackpot type being jackpot A or jackpot B. (245SGS325) and the processing of 245SGS308 to 245SGS310 is executed. In addition, in 245SGS325, as shown in FIG. 8-25 (C), based on the setting value of 4 and the jackpot type being jackpot A or jackpot B, the non-execution of the cut-in effect is performed at a rate of 10%. decide. Further, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 50%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. , The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

When the jackpot type is jackpot C (245SGS324; N), the presence / absence of execution of the cut-in effect and the effect pattern are determined based on the setting value of 4 and the jackpot type being jackpot C (the jack-in effect is executed). 245SGS326)), the processing of 245SGS308 to 245SGS310 is executed. In 245SGS326, as shown in FIG. 8-25 (C), the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 10% based on the setting value of 4 and the jackpot type being jackpot C. Further, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 45%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 5%.

When the variable display result is out of alignment in 245SGS322 (245SGS322; N), it is further determined whether or not the gaming state is a high-accuracy high-base state (245SGS327). The game state may be specified from the game state designation command received from the CPU 103.

When the gaming state is the high accuracy high base state (245SGS327; Y), the cut is based on the fact that the set value is 4, the variable display result is out of order, and the gaming state is the high accuracy high base state. Whether or not to execute the in-effect and the effect pattern are determined (245SGS328), and the processes of 245SGS308 to 245SGS310 are executed. In addition, in 245SGS328, as shown in FIG. 8-25 (C), the cut is based on the fact that the set value is 4, the variable display result is out of alignment, and the gaming state is the high accuracy and high base state. The non-execution of the in-effect is determined at a rate of 40%. Further, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 10%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 20%. , The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

When the gaming state is the low accuracy high base state or the low accuracy low base state (245SGS327; N), the set value is 4, the variable display result is out of alignment, and the gaming state is the low accuracy high base. The presence / absence of execution of the cut-in effect and the effect pattern are determined based on the state or the low probability low base state (245SGS329), and the processes of 245SGS308 to 245SGS310 are executed. In the 245SGS329, as shown in FIG. 8-25 (C), the set value is 4, the variable display result is out of alignment, and the gaming state is the low probability high base state or the low probability low base state. Based on this, the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 59%. Further, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 10%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 1%. , The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

Further, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the 245SGS321 is not 4 (245SGS321; N), whether or not the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 5 in the effect control CPU 120. (245SGS330). When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 5 (245SGS330; Y), it is further determined whether or not the variable display result is a big hit (245SGS331). Whether or not the variable display result is a big hit may be determined by determining whether or not the fluctuation pattern is PB1-4, which is a super reach γ big hit.

When the variable display result is a big hit (245SGS331; Y), the big hit type is specified (245SGS332), and it is determined whether or not the big hit type is a big hit A or a big hit B (245SGS333).

When the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (245SGS333; Y), the presence or absence of execution of the cut-in effect and the effect pattern based on the set value being 5 and the jackpot type being jackpot A or jackpot B. (245SGS334) and the processing of 245SGS308 to 245SGS310 is executed. In 245SGS334, as shown in FIG. 8-25 (D), the non-execution of the cut-in effect is performed at a rate of 10% based on the setting value of 5 and the jackpot type being jackpot A or jackpot B. decide. Further, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 50%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. , The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

When the jackpot type is jackpot C (245SGS333; N), the presence / absence of execution of the cut-in effect and the effect pattern are determined based on the setting value of 5 and the jackpot type being jackpot C (the jack-in effect is executed). 245SGS335)), 245SGS308 to 245SGS310 are executed. In 245SGS335, as shown in FIG. 8-25 (D), the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 10% based on the setting value of 5 and the jackpot type being jackpot C. Further, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 45%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 5%.

When the variable display result is out of alignment in 245SGS331 (245SGS331; N), it is further determined whether or not the gaming state is a high-accuracy high-base state (245SGS336). The game state may be specified from the game state designation command received from the CPU 103.

When the game state is the high accuracy high base state (245SGS336; Y), the cut is based on the fact that the set value is 5, the variable display result is out of order, and the game state is the high accuracy high base state. Whether or not to execute the in-effect and the effect pattern are determined (245SGS337), and the processes of 245SGS308 to 245SGS310 are executed. In 245SGS337, as shown in FIG. 8-25 (D), the cut is based on the fact that the set value is 5, the variable display result is out of alignment, and the gaming state is the high accuracy and high base state. The non-execution of the in-effect is determined at a rate of 35%. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 10%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 25%. , The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

When the gaming state is the low accuracy high base state or the low accuracy low base state (245SGS336; N), the set value is 5, the variable display result is out of alignment, and the gaming state is the low accuracy high base. The presence / absence of execution of the cut-in effect and the effect pattern are determined based on the state or the low probability low base state (245SGS338), and the processes of 245SGS308 to 245SGS310 are executed. In 245SGS338, as shown in FIG. 8-25 (D), the set value is 5, the variable display result is out of alignment, and the gaming state is the low probability high base state or the low probability low base state. Based on this, the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 58%. Further, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 10%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 2%. , The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

Further, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the 245SGS330 is not 5 (245SGS330; N), the effect control CPU 120 is variable, assuming that the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6. It is determined whether or not the display result is a big hit (245SGS339). Whether or not the variable display result is a big hit may be determined by determining whether or not the fluctuation pattern is PB1-4, which is a super reach γ big hit.

When the variable display result is a big hit (245SGS339; Y), the big hit type is specified (245SGS340), and it is determined whether or not the big hit type is a big hit A or a big hit B (245SGS341).

When the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (245SGS341; Y), the presence / absence of execution of the cut-in effect and the effect pattern based on the set value being 6 and the jackpot type being jackpot A or jackpot B. (245SGS342) and the processing of 245SGS308 to 245SGS310 is executed. In 245SGS342, as shown in FIG. 8-25 (E), the non-execution of the cut-in effect is performed at a rate of 10% based on the setting value of 6 and the jackpot type being jackpot A or jackpot B. decide. Further, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 50%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. , The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

When the jackpot type is jackpot C (245SGS341; N), the presence / absence of execution of the cut-in effect and the effect pattern are determined based on the setting value of 6 and the jackpot type being jackpot C (the jack-in effect is executed). 245SGS343)), the processing of 245SGS308 to 245SGS310 is executed. In 245SGS343, as shown in FIG. 8-25 (E), the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 10% based on the setting value of 6 and the jackpot type of jackpot C. Further, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 45%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 5%.

When the variable display result is out of alignment in 245SGS339 (245SGS339; N), it is further determined whether or not the gaming state is a high-accuracy high-base state (245SGS344). The game state may be specified from the game state designation command received from the CPU 103.

When the gaming state is the high accuracy high base state (245SGS344; Y), the cut is based on the fact that the set value is 6, the variable display result is out of order, and the gaming state is the high accuracy high base state. Whether or not to execute the in-effect and the effect pattern are determined (245SGS345), and the processes of 245SGS308 to 245SGS310 are executed. In addition, in 245SGS345, as shown in FIG. 8-25 (E), the cut is based on the fact that the set value is 6, the variable display result is out of alignment, and the gaming state is the high accuracy and high base state. The non-execution of the in-effect is determined at a rate of 30%. Further, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 is determined at a rate of 10%, and pattern CI-3 is determined at a rate of 30%. , The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

When the gaming state is the low accuracy high base state or the low accuracy low base state (245SGS344; N), the set value is 6, the variable display result is out of alignment, and the gaming state is the low accuracy high base. The presence / absence of execution of the cut-in effect and the effect pattern are determined based on the state or the low probability low base state (245SGS346), and the processes of 245SGS308 to 245SGS310 are executed. In 245SGS346, as shown in FIG. 8-25 (E), the set value is 6, the variable display result is out of alignment, and the gaming state is the low probability high base state or the low probability low base state. Based on this, the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 57%. Further, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 10%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 3%. , The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

Further, in the case of the fluctuation pattern (PS2-5 or PB1-6) of the super reach δ in the 245SGS302 (202SGS302; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variable display result is a big hit (245SGS351). .. Whether or not the variable display result is a big hit may be determined by determining whether or not the fluctuation pattern is PB1-4, which is a super reach γ big hit.

When the variable display result is a big hit (245SGS351; Y), the big hit type is specified (245SGS352), and it is determined whether or not the big hit type is a big hit A or a big hit B (245SGS353).

When the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (245SGS353; Y), whether or not to execute the cut-in effect and the effect pattern are determined based on the jackpot type being jackpot A or jackpot B (245SGS354), 245SGS308. The process of ~ 245SGS310 is executed. In 245SGS354, as shown in FIG. 8-26, the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 10% based on the jackpot type being jackpot A or jackpot B. Further, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 50%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. , The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

When the jackpot type is jackpot C (245SGS353; N), whether or not to execute the cut-in effect and the effect pattern are determined based on the jackpot type being jackpot C (245SGS355), and the processing of 245SGS308 to 245SGS310. To execute. In 245SGS355, as shown in FIGS. 8-26, the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 10% based on the jackpot type being jackpot C. Further, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 45%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 10%. The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 5%.

When the variable display result is out of alignment in 245SGS351 (245SGS351; N), the presence / absence of execution of the cut-in effect and the effect pattern are determined based on the deviation of the variable display result (245SGS356), 245SGS308 to 245SGS310 Executes the processing of. In 245SGS356, as shown in FIGS. 8-26, the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined at a rate of 35% based on the fact that the variable display result is out of alignment. In addition, as the execution of the cut-in effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern CI-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern CI-2 at a rate of 10%, and pattern CI-3 at a rate of 25%. , The pattern CI-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

As described above, in the feature unit 245SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-25 and 8-26, when the variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ or the super reach δ, the cut-in is performed. When the variable display result is the lowest (big hit expectation) when the effect is not executed and the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-1, the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-2. In this case, when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3, the rate at which the variable display result becomes a big hit increases in the order of the case where the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-4. (Expectation of big hit in cut-in effect: non-execution <pattern CI-1 <pattern CI-2 <pattern CI-3 <pattern CI-4).

In particular, when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-4, it is determined that the variable display result is the jackpot and the jackpot type is the jackpot C regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-25, 8-26 and 8-28, when the variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ or the super reach δ, the cut-in effect is performed by the pattern CI-3. Regarding the execution rate, the lowest setting (0%) is made when the set value is any of 1 to 3 and the fluctuation pattern is out of super reach γ and out of super reach δ. Then, when the fluctuation pattern is a super reach γ jackpot that executes the revival effect, the set value is one of 1 to 3 and the fluctuation pattern does not execute the revival effect. Is 4, and the fluctuation pattern is a super reach γ jackpot that does not execute the resurrection effect, the set value is 5, and the fluctuation pattern is a super reach γ jackpot that does not execute the resurrection effect, the setting value is 6 and the fluctuation pattern. Is set so that the ratio of executing the cut-in effect in the pattern CI-3 increases in the order of the case where is a super reach γ jackpot that does not execute the revival effect.

Further, paying attention when the fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern (PA2-4 and PB1-4) of the super reach γ that does not execute the revival effect, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1-3, While it is confirmed that the variable display result is a big hit (any of big hit A to big hit C) when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 When is 4 to 6, the variable display result may be out of alignment even when the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3. That is, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6, the cut-in is higher than when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 3. The jackpot expectation when the effect is executed by the pattern CI-3 is set low. Therefore, in the feature unit 245SG of the present embodiment, when the reach effect of the super reach γ is executed, the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3 and the variable display result is out of order. It is confirmed that the set value set in is one of 4 to 6.

On the other hand, paying attention to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ jackpot (PB1-5) that executes the revival effect, the cut-in effect is the pattern CI-3 rather than the fluctuation pattern (PB1-4) of the super reach γ jackpot that executes the revival effect. And the rate of execution in pattern CI-4 is set low. For this reason, in the case where the variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ jackpot that does not execute the revival effect, the cut-in effect is executed by CI-3 and the disappointment is notified, so that the pachinko gaming machine Even though the player recognizes that the set value set to 1 is one of 4 to 6, the revival effect is executed later and it is notified that it is a big hit, so that the pachinko machine It is suppressed that the player is discouraged because it is uncertain whether or not the set value set in the game machine 1 is any of 4 to 6.

Further, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6, and the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern of super reach γ (PA2-4 and PB1-4) that does not execute the revival effect. Attention is paid to the case where the variable display result is a big hit, the ratio of the cut-in effect being executed in the pattern CI-3 is set to be the same in all the set values, but the variable display result is out of order. The higher the set value, the higher the rate at which the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 (the pattern CI-3 execution rate at the time of deviation when the set values 4 to 6 are set: the set value 4 < Set value 5 <Set value 6).

Therefore, in the feature unit 245SG of the present embodiment, the higher the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3, and the variable display result is out of order. Since the frequency of the game becomes higher, the player can be expected that the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any of 4 to 6, and the game interest can be improved. There is.

Further, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6 and the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern of super reach γ (PA2-4 and PB1-4) that does not execute the revival effect. If the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are the same and the variable display result is different, the gaming state is low accuracy and high base state or low accuracy in the place where the game state is high accuracy and high base state. The cut-in effect is set to be executed in the pattern CI-3 at a higher rate than in the low base state.

Therefore, in the feature unit 245SG of the present embodiment, the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3 in the variable display of the high accuracy and high base state, and the variable display result is out of order, so that the gaming state is low accuracy. Even after shifting to the low base state, the pachinko game machine 1 is set to any of 4 to 6 to encourage the player to continue the game, so that the game enjoyment can be improved. ing.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-25 (B) to 8-25 (E), paying attention to the case where the variable display result is out of alignment, the higher the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the higher the cut-in. The execution rate of the production is set high. That is, in this feature unit 245SG, it is suggested that the ratio itself of executing the cut-in effect when the variable display result is out of alignment is set to any of the set values of 4 to 6 in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Therefore, in addition to whether or not the cut-in effect is executed in an effect pattern with a high expectation of a big hit, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the cut-in effect is executed. It is possible to improve the game entertainment.

Further, the determination ratio of the effect pattern of the cut-in effect shown in FIGS. 8-25 and 8-26 is only an example, and the determination ratio of the effect pattern of the cut-in effect is determined according to the gaming machine to which the present invention is applied. It may be different from the feature portion 245SG as appropriate. However, when the determination ratios of the effect patterns of these cut-in effects are appropriately different, the tendency of the jackpot expectation of each effect pattern (big hit expectation in the cut-in effect: non-execution <pattern CI-1 <pattern CI-2). By maintaining <Pattern CI-3 <Pattern CI-4) itself, the player does not misunderstand the jackpot expectation according to the effect pattern of the cut-in effect when executing the cut-in effect. Is desirable.

Further, in the feature unit 245SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-21 and 8-26, when the variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ and the super reach δ, the pachinko gaming machine 1 Although the embodiment in which the cut-in effect is executed during the variable display is different depending on the set value and the variable display result set in, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. When the variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern of the reach γ or the super reach δ, the cut-in effect may be always executed during the variable display. In the case where the cut-in effect is always executed during the variable display of the super reach γ and the super reach δ, if the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6, When the variable display result is out of alignment, the ratio assigned to non-execution of the cut-in effect (see FIGS. 8-25 (C) to 8-25 (E)) is the pattern CI-1 with a low expectation of big hit or By assigning to both the pattern CI-1 and the pattern CI-2, the ratio of the cut-in effect executed in the pattern CI-3 may be maintained so as not to be different from the feature unit 245SG. By doing so, the cut-in effect is excessively executed in the pattern CI-3 while improving the interest by executing the cut-in effect during the variable display of the super reach γ and the super reach δ. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from easily recognizing that the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6.

FIG. 8-29 is a flowchart showing the advance notice effect determination process in FIG. 8-19. In the advance notice effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first identifies the variable display result and the variation pattern (245SGS361). Then, it is determined whether or not the variable display result is a small hit (245SGS362). When the variable display result is a small hit (245SGS362; Y), the advance notice effect determination process is terminated, and when the variable display result is a large hit or a miss (245SGS362; N), the execution of the cut-in effect is further determined. Whether or not, that is, whether or not any of the effect patterns of the cut-in effect is stored is determined (245SGS363).

When the execution of the cut-in effect is determined (245SGS363; Y), it is further determined whether or not the stored cut-in effect effect pattern is pattern CI-3 or pattern CI-4 (245SGS364). ). When the stored cut-in effect effect pattern is pattern CI-3 or pattern CI-4 (245SGS364; Y), the cut-in effect is executed in pattern CI-3 or pattern CI-4. , Whether or not the advance notice effect is executed and the effect pattern are determined based on the specified variable display result and the variation pattern (245SGS365).

On the other hand, when it is determined not to execute the cut-in effect (245SGS363; N) or when the stored effect pattern is the pattern CI-1 or CI-2 (245SGS364; N), the variable display result is It is determined whether or not it is a big hit (245SGS366). When the variable display result is a big hit (245SGS366; Y), the big hit type is specified (245SGS367), and whether or not the advance notice effect is executed and the effect pattern are determined based on the specified big hit type (245SGS368).

When the variable display result is out of alignment (245SGS366; N), the presence / absence of execution of the advance notice effect and the effect pattern are determined based on the specified variable display result and the variation pattern (245SGS369).

Specifically, in the processing of 245SGS365, as shown in FIG. 8-30 (A), when the variable display result is a big hit, the non-execution of the advance notice effect is determined at a rate of 15%. Further, as the execution of the advance notice effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern YE-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern YE-2 is determined at a rate of 55%, and pattern YE-3 is determined at a rate of 0%. The pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 0%. Further, when the variable display result is out of alignment and the fluctuation pattern is super reach (out of super reach), the non-execution of the advance notice effect is determined at a rate of 50%. Further, as the execution of the advance notice effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern YE-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern YE-2 is determined at a rate of 20%, and pattern YE-3 is determined at a rate of 0%. The pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

As described above, in the feature unit 245SG of the present embodiment, the case where the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3 and the variable display result is out of order is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. This is a case where the set value is any of 4 to 6 and the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ deviation (PA2-4).

As shown in FIG. 8-30 (C), the pattern YE-1 is an effect pattern for displaying the image 245SG005s of the character A together with the blue effect on the image display device 5, and the pattern YE-2 is the image display device 5 The pattern YE-3 is an effect pattern for displaying the image 245SG005t of the character B together with the red effect, and the pattern YE-3 is an effect pattern for displaying the image 245SG005u of the character C together with the golden effect on the image display device 5. Is an effect pattern for displaying the group image 245SG005v of the characters A to C together with the rainbow-colored effect on the image display device 5.

Further, in the processing of 245SGS368, as shown in FIG. 8-30 (B), when the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B, the non-execution of the advance notice effect is determined at a rate of 10%. Further, as the execution of the advance notice effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern YE-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern YE-2 is determined at a rate of 45%, and pattern YE-3 is determined at a rate of 15%. The pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 0%. If the jackpot type is jackpot C, the non-execution of the advance notice effect is determined at a rate of 10%. Further, as the execution of the advance notice effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern YE-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern YE-2 is determined at a rate of 40%, and pattern YE-3 is determined at a rate of 15%. The pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 5%.

Further, in the processing of 245SGS369, as shown in FIG. 8-30 (B), when the variable display result is out of alignment and the fluctuation pattern is super reach (out of super reach), 50% of the non-execution of the advance notice effect is performed. Determined by percentage. Further, as the execution of the advance notice effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern YE-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern YE-2 is determined at a rate of 15%, and pattern YE-3 is determined at a rate of 5%. The pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

Further, when the variable display result is out of alignment and the fluctuation pattern is normal reach (out of normal reach), the non-execution of the advance notice effect is determined at a rate of 80%. Further, as the execution of the advance notice effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern YE-1 at a rate of 15%, pattern YE-2 is determined at a rate of 5%, and pattern YE-3 is determined at a rate of 0%. The pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 0%. Further, when the variable display result is out of reach and the fluctuation pattern is non-reach (non-reach out of reach) excluding shortened non-reach, the non-execution of the advance notice effect is determined at a rate of 95%. Further, as the execution of the advance notice effect, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern YE-1 at a rate of 5%, pattern YE-2 is determined at a rate of 0%, and pattern YE-3 is determined at a rate of 0%. The pattern YE-4 is determined at a rate of 0%.

As shown in FIG. 8-38, the advance notice effect in the feature unit 245SG of the present embodiment is during variable display (if the variable display of the reach variation pattern is being performed, the period from the start of the variable display to the reach. In the middle), the image of the push button 31B (operation promotion image 245SG005H) is displayed on the image display device 5, and the player is urged to operate the push button 31B. Then, when the push button 31B is operated during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B, or when the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B ends without the push button 31B being operated, each effect is displayed on the image display device 5. Display the character image according to the pattern.

Therefore, when the fluctuation pattern is shortened non-reach, the period for executing the advance notice effect becomes extremely short (for example, the non-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-) in which the special figure fluctuation time is 3.75 seconds. If the advance notice effect is executed during the variable display in 3), the period for displaying the operation promotion image 245SG005H will be about 1 second, and the period for displaying the character image will be extremely short, about 1 to 2 seconds). In the feature unit 245SG, when the fluctuation pattern is shortened non-reach, the advance notice effect is not executed during the variable display, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the fluctuation pattern is shortened non-reach. Even in a certain case, the advance notice effect may be executed during the variable display.

As described above, in the feature unit 245SG of the present embodiment, the ratio (big hit expectation degree) at which the variable display result becomes the big hit is set to be the lowest when the notice effect is not executed during the variable display, and the notice effect is a pattern. Variable display in the order of execution in YE-1, the advance notice effect is executed in the pattern YE-2, the advance notice effect is executed in YE-3, and the advance notice effect is executed in YE-4. The rate at which the result is a big hit is set to be high (the big hit expectation of the notice effect: the notice effect is not executed <execution in pattern YE-1 <execution in pattern YE-2 <execution in pattern YE-3 <pattern Executed with YE-4).

In particular, as shown in FIG. 8-30 (B), when the non-execution of the cut-in effect is determined or the cut-in effect is lower than the pattern CI-3 or the pattern CI-4, the pattern CI- When the execution in 1 or the pattern CI-2 is decided, the advance notice effect may be executed in the pattern YE-4 only when the jackpot type is the jackpot C. Therefore, in the feature unit 245SG of the present embodiment, in addition to whether or not the advance notice effect is executed in the pattern YE-3, the game also determines whether or not the advance notice effect is executed in the pattern YE-4. It is possible to draw people's attention.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-30 (A), as the effect pattern of the cut-in effect, the pattern CI-3, which has a higher expectation of a big hit than the pattern CI-1 and the pattern CI-2, or the variable display result is a big hit. When the pattern CI-4 that confirms that the jackpot type is jackpot C is determined, YE-3 or YE-4 is used as the effect pattern of the advance notice effect regardless of the variable display result or the fluctuation pattern. It is set so that it will not be executed. Therefore, when the variable display result is a big hit, the cut-in effect can be executed only by the pattern YE-1 and the pattern YE-2, so that the variable display result is a big hit, which is the start of the cut-in effect. It is prevented that the player recognizes the timing before the timing (the start timing of the notice effect). Furthermore, when the variable display result is out of alignment, neither the advance notice effect nor the cut-in effect is executed in an effect pattern with a high expectation of a big hit, so that the player is excessively opposed to the variable display result being a big hit. It is prevented from expecting.

After executing any of the processes of 245SGS365, 245SGS368, and 245SGS369, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the advance notice effect is determined (245SGS370). When the execution of the advance notice effect is decided (245SGS370; Y), the effect pattern determined by any of the processes of 245SGS365, 245SGS368, and 245SGS369 is stored (245SGS371), and the advance notice effect start waiting timer is set to give a notice. The production determination process is completed (245SGS372). When it is determined not to execute the advance notice effect (245SGS370; N), the advance notice effect determination process is terminated without executing the processes of 245SGS371 and 245SGS372.

When the execution of the advance notice effect is determined in the advance notice effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the advance notice effect start waiting timer by -1 each time the variable display effect process (S172) is executed, and the advance notice is given. When the effect waiting timer expires, the advance notice effect process table according to the determined effect pattern is set. After that, each time the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect processing during variable display, the effect device (image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamp 9) follows the contents of the data (process data) in the advance notice effect process table. Etc.), and the advance notice effect may be executed.

By making it possible to determine the execution of the reel effect, the cut-in effect, and the advance notice effect within the variable display start setting process as described above, FIGS. 8-31 (A), 8-31 (B), and 8- As shown in 32 (A), in the fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss (excluding shortened non-reach loss), the advance notice effect can be executed only in pattern YE-1 during the variable display, and the fluctuation of normal reach loss. In the pattern, the advance notice effect can be executed by the pattern YE-1 and the pattern YE-2 in the period before the reach during the variable display, and it is variable in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α deviation and the super reach β deviation. In the period before the reach being displayed, the advance notice effect can be executed by the patterns YE-1 to YE-3. It should be noted that the cut-in effect cannot be executed in the period after the reach in the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach deviation, the super reach α deviation, and the super reach γ deviation.

In this feature unit 245SG, the reel effect can be executed during the variable display of the shortened non-reach loss, and the special figure fluctuation time of the variable display of the shortened non-reach loss is set to 3.75 seconds at the shortest. There is. Therefore, the execution period of the reel effect including the operation acceptance period of the stick controller 31A in the feature unit 245SG is set to about 3 seconds to 3.5 seconds.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-32 (B), in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ deviation and the super reach δ deviation, the advance notice effect can be executed by the patterns YE-1 to YE-3 in the period before the reach. In the period after the reach, the cut-in effect can be executed by the patterns CI-1 to pattern CI-3. However, when the cut-in effect is determined to be executed in the pattern CI-3, the advance notice effect can be executed only in the pattern YE-1 and the pattern YE-2.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-33 and 8-34, in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ jackpot that does not execute the revival effect and the super reach γ jackpot that executes the revival effect, the notice effect is patterned in the period before the reach. It can be executed by YE-1 to pattern YE-4, and the cut-in effect can be executed by pattern CI-1 to pattern CI-4 in the period after reach. However, when the cut-in effect is determined to be executed in the pattern CI-3 or the pattern CI-4, the advance notice effect can be executed only in the pattern YE-1 and the pattern YE-2.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-31 to 8-34, in any case, the player operates the stick controller 31A during the period from the start timing of the variable display to the execution start timing of the advance notice effect. As a result, the reel image 245SG005G is displayed on the image display device 5, and the reel effect is executed.

In the operation acceptance period of the stick controller 31A in the reel effect, unlike the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B of the advance notice effect and the cut-in effect, the image display device 5 causes the player to operate the stick controller 31A. The prompt operation promotion image is not displayed. That is, unlike the advance notice effect and the cut-in effect, the reel effect in the feature unit 245SG is an effect that is not executed unless the player operates the stick controller 31A during the operation acceptance period of the stick controller 31A. ..

Further, since the operation acceptance period of the stick controller 31A in the reel effect and the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B in the advance notice effect do not overlap, the player can operate the stick controller 31A to execute the reel effect and the character as the advance notice effect. It is not necessary to simultaneously execute the operation of the push button 31B for displaying the image, and it is prevented that the operation of the player for executing the effect becomes complicated.

If it is decided to execute both the advance notice effect and the reel effect at the start of the variable display, the stick controller 31A is operated during the operation acceptance period of the stick controller 31A, so that the advance notice effect and the reel effect are combined. The production period partially overlaps.

From the above, as shown in FIGS. 8-35, the feature unit 245SG is provided with a reel effect, a notice effect, and a cut-in effect as effects that can be executed during the variable display. Of these effects, the reel effect is an effect executed by the player operating the stick controller 31A, and the operation promotion image is not displayed on the image display device 5 during the operation acceptance period of the stick controller 31A. In addition, the target suggested by the reel effect is the jackpot expectation level, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or both, and the period during which the effect can be executed is from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable display ( It is from the start of the variable display to the reach (when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach).

Further, the advance notice effect is an effect executed when the player operates the push button 31B or the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B elapses, and the image is displayed during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B. The operation promotion image 245SG005H is displayed on the device 5. In addition, the target suggested by the advance notice effect is only the jackpot expectation, and the period during which the effect can be executed is from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable display (when the fluctuation pattern is out of reach) or the start of the variable display. From to reach (when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach).

Further, the cut-in effect is an effect executed when the player operates the push button 31B or the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B elapses, and the image is displayed during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B. The operation promotion image 245SG005H is displayed on the display device 5. Further, the target suggested by the cut-in effect is the jackpot expectation level, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or both, and the period during which the effect can be executed is after the reach.

Next, the display control unit 123 in the feature unit 245SG will be described. As shown in FIGS. 8-36 (A) and 8-36 (B), the display control unit 123 has the first layer 245SG301, the second layer 245SG302, and the third layer 245SG303 as layers for drawing an image. It has a fourth layer 245SG304, and images drawn on the first layer 245SG301 to the fourth layer 245SG304 can be combined and displayed on the image display device 5.

Of these plurality of layers, the first layer 245SG301 is the highest layer (top layer), and draws the error notification image 245SG005J and the fourth symbol 245SG005F as the game progress information display corresponding to the progress of the game. It is a layer for. The second layer 245SG302 is a layer lower than the first layer 245SG301, and is a layer for drawing a reel effect (reel image 245SG005G). The third layer 245SG303 is a layer lower than the second layer 245SG302, and is a notice effect (image 245SG005s of character A, image 245SG005t of character B, image 245SG005u of character C, group image 245SG005v of characters A to C, and push button. It is a layer for drawing the operation promotion image 245SG005H of 31B) and the cut-in effect (cut-in image 245SG005w, 245SG005x, 245SG005y, 245SG005 and the operation promotion image 245SG005H of the push button 31B). The fourth layer 245SG304 is a layer (lowermost layer) lower than the third layer 245SG303, and is a decorative symbol in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. This is a layer for drawing the variable display and the hold display in the first hold storage display area 245SG005D and the second hold storage display area 245SG005U.

Therefore, in the feature unit 245SG, the image drawn on the third layer 245SG303 is displayed on the image display device 5 with priority over the image drawn on the fourth layer 245SG304. The image drawn on the second layer 245SG302 is displayed on the image display device 5 with priority over the image drawn on the third layer 245SG303 and the fourth layer 245SG304, and is drawn on the first layer 245SG301. The image to be displayed is displayed on the image display device 5 with priority over the images drawn on the second layer 245SG302 to the fourth layer 245SG304.

Next, the display mode of the image display device 5 at the time of executing the variable display in the feature unit 245SG of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 8-37 to 8-41. First, as shown in FIGS. 8-37 (A) and 8-37 (B), when the execution of the reel effect and the non-execution of the cut-in effect are determined at the start of the variable display, the stick controller 31A When the player operates the stick controller 31A during the operation acceptance period, the reel image 245SG005G is displayed in the lower center of the image display device 5. Since the reel image 245SG005G is displayed with priority over the decorative symbol and the hold display, a part of the decorative symbol and the hold display is hidden by the reel image 245SG005G.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 8-37 (C) to 8-37 (H), the variable display results in the reel image 245SG005G are "cherry", "watermelon", "7", "super hot", and "super hot". By stopping and displaying the symbols such as "chance" and "bell", it is suggested that the set value and the variable display result set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 become a big hit.

After the symbols such as "cherry", "watermelon", "7", "super hot", "chance", and "bell" are stopped and displayed on the reel image 245SG005G, before the end of reach or variable display. The display of the reel image 245SG005G on the image display device 5 ends.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-38 (A) and 8-38 (B), when it is decided not to execute the reel effect and to execute the advance notice effect at the start of the variable display, after the start of the variable display. In the image display device 5, an image of the push button 31B (operation promotion image 245SG005H) for prompting the player to operate the push button 31B is displayed.

When the player operates the push button 31B during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B, or when the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B elapses, the advance notice effect is displayed on the image display device 5 in patterns YE-1 to YE-4. Executed in either. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-38 (C) to 8-38 (F), when the advance notice effect is executed in the pattern YE-1, the image 245SG005s of the character A is displayed on the image display device 5. When it is displayed together with the blue effect and the advance notice effect is executed in the pattern YE-2, the image 245SG005t of the character B is displayed together with the red effect on the image display device 5, and the advance notice effect is executed in the pattern YE-3. In this case, when the image 245SG005u of the character C is displayed together with the golden effect on the image display device 5 and the advance notice effect is executed by the pattern YE-4, the group image 245SG005v of the characters A to C is displayed as a rainbow on the image display device 5. Displayed with color effects.

At this time, the player expects a big hit depending on which character's image 245SG005s, 245SG005t, 245SG005u, 245SG005v is the image displayed on the image display device 5, and the color of the effect displayed together with the image of these characters. It is possible to recognize the degree.

As described above, when the cut-in effect is determined to be executed by the pattern CI-3 or the pattern CI-4 at the start of the variable display, the advance notice effect is executed only by the pattern YE-1 or the pattern YE-2. It is possible.

The operation promotion image 245SG005H, the character A image 245SG005s, the character B image 245SG005t, the character C image 245SG005u, and the group image 245SG005v of the characters A to C are displayed with priority over the decorative design and the hold display. Therefore, a part of the decorative design and the hold display is concealed by the operation promotion image 245SG005H, the image 245SG005s of the character A, the image 245SG005t of the character B, the image 245SG005u of the character C, and the collective image 245SG005v of the characters A to C.

On the other hand, the fourth symbol 245SG005F is displayed with priority over the operation promotion image 245SG005H, the character A image 245SG005s, the character B image 245SG005t, the character C image 245SG005u, and the group images 245SG005v of the characters A to C in the advance notice effect. Therefore, the group image 245SG005v of the characters A to C whose display area overlaps with the fourth symbol 245SG005F is partially hidden by the fourth symbol 245SG005F (see FIG. 8-38 (F)).

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-39 (A) and 8-39 (B), when the execution of the reel effect and the execution of the advance notice effect are determined at the start of the variable display, the operation of the stick controller 31A is accepted. When the player operates the stick controller 31A during the period, the reel image 245SG005G is displayed at the lower center of the image display device 5. Further, as shown in FIG. 8-39 (C), during the variable display in the reel image 245SG005G, the image of the push button 31B for prompting the player to operate the push button 31B in the image display device 5 ( The operation promotion image 245SG005H) is displayed. As described above, the reel image 245SG005G and the operation promotion image 245SG005H are displayed on the image display device 5 with priority over the decorative design and the hold display.

When the player operates the push button 31B during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B, or when the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B elapses, as shown in FIGS. 8-39 (D) and 8-39 (E). In addition, the advance notice effect is executed in any of the patterns YE-1 to YE-4 in the image display device 5 (in FIGS. 8-39 (D) and 8-39 (E), the advance notice effect is the pattern YE-4. For example, when it is executed in.

Since the reel image 245SG005G is displayed with priority over the advance notice effect (character A image 245SG005s, character B image 245SG005t, character C image 245SG005u, and character A to C group image 245SG005v), the advance notice effect (FIG. In 8-39, the group image 245SG005v) of the characters A to C is partially concealed by the reel image 245SG005G. Further, as described above, the fourth symbol 245SG005F is displayed on the image display device 5 with priority over the advance notice effect (group image 245SG005v of characters A to C).

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-39 (F), when the CPU 103 detects an error such as an abnormal winning or magnetic error during execution of the reel effect or the cut-in effect, it responds to the error generated in the image display device 5. The error notification image 245SG005J is displayed.

At this time, the error notification image 245SG005J is displayed on the image display device 5 with priority over the reel effect (reel image 245SG005G) and the notice effect (group image 245SG005v of characters A to C), so that the reel effect (reel image 245SG005G) is displayed. ) And a part of the notice effect (group image 245SG005v of characters A to C) are hidden by the error notification image 245SG005J.

When the variable display is a variable display of the super reach γ, the decorative symbols are displayed in a combination of reach as shown in FIGS. 8-40 (A) to 8-40 (C), and then the super reach is displayed. A reach effect of γ (a battle effect in which a ally character and an enemy character fight in this feature unit 245SG) is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-40 (D), when the cut-in effect execution start timing during the reach effect of the super reach γ comes, the image of the push button 31B (operation promotion image 245SG005H) is displayed on the image display device 5. Is started, and a promotion notification is performed to urge the player to operate the push button 31B. At this time, the player operates the push button 31B during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B, or the player operates the push button 31B without operating the push button 31B during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B. When the reception period elapses, the effect is displayed on the image display device 5 together with the cut-in image corresponding to the effect pattern of the cut-in effect.

Specifically, when the effect pattern of the cut-in effect is the pattern CI-1, the cut-in image 245SG005w is displayed together with the blue effect on the image display device 5, and the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-2. In this case, the cut-in image 245SG005x is displayed together with the red effect on the image display device 5, and the cut-in image 245SG005y is displayed together with the golden effect on the image display device 5 when the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3. When the advance notice effect is executed in the pattern YE-4, the cut-in image 245SG005z is displayed together with the rainbow-colored effect on the image display device 5.

At this time, the player decides which of the cut-in images 245SG005w, 245SG005x, 245SG005y, and 245SG005z is the cut-in image displayed on the image display device 5, and the color of the effect displayed together with these cut-in images. It is possible to recognize the degree of expectation of a big hit.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 8-41 (A) and 8-41 (B), when the variation pattern of the variable display is PS2-4 (fluctuation pattern out of super reach γ), the variation pattern of super reach γ As a reach effect result (battle effect result), when the ally character loses to the enemy character, it is notified that the variable display result is out of order, and the variable display ends. Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-41 (A) and 8-41 (C), when the variation pattern of the variable display is PB1-4 (fluctuation pattern of super reach γ jackpot that does not execute the revival effect). , As the reach effect result (battle effect result) of the super reach γ, when the ally character wins the enemy character, it is notified that the variable display result is a big hit, and the variable display ends.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-41 (A) and 8-41 (D) to 8-41 (F), the variation pattern of the variable display is PB1-5 (super reach γ jackpot that executes the revival effect). In the case of (variation pattern), it is notified that the variable display result is once out of order due to the defeat of the ally character by the enemy character as the reach effect result (battle effect result) of the super reach γ. Then, when the revival effect is executed, it is notified again that the variable display result is a big hit when the ally character reverses to the enemy character and wins as the reach effect result (battle effect result) of the super reach γ. The variable display ends.

Although not shown in particular, when the variable display is a variable display of super reach δ, after the decorative pattern is displayed in a combination of reach, the ally character and the enemy character are displayed in the same manner as the reach effect of super reach γ. The battle production that fights is executed. Then, when the cut-in effect is executed during the battle effect, the variable display result is always a big hit by executing the cut-in effect in the pattern CI-3. The battle production as the reach production of Super Reach δ may be the same as the battle production as the reach production of Super Reach γ, but the characters to be played against and the development of the battle are partially different. You may.

As described above, in the feature unit 245SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-25, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 3, the cut-in effect is the pattern CI. While it is confirmed that the variable display result will be a big hit by executing in -3, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6, the cut-in effect is produced. There is a case where the variable display result is out of order when the pattern CI-3 is executed. That is, when the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3 and the variable display result is out of order, it is determined that the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6. , When the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3, the player can pay attention to whether the variable display result is a big hit or a miss, and the game interest can be improved. There is.

In addition, in the feature unit 245SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-25, after notifying that the variable display result is out of order as a variable pattern in which the cut-in effect can be executed during the reach effect. Super reach γ jackpot fluctuation pattern (super reach γ jackpot fluctuation pattern that executes resurrection effect, PB1-5) and super reach that does not execute resurrection effect A fluctuation pattern of γ jackpot (PB1-4) is provided, and when variable display is executed with the fluctuation pattern of super reach γ jackpot that executes the revival effect, the fluctuation of super reach γ jackpot that does not execute the revival effect. The ratio of executing the cut-in effect in the pattern CI-3 is set lower than that in the case of executing the variable display in the pattern. Therefore, when the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3 during the reach effect of the super reach γ and it is notified that the variable display is out of order, the player sets the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Even if it recognizes that is any of 4 to 6, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4 to 6 by notifying that the revival effect is executed and the variable display is a big hit. It is possible to reduce the deterioration of the game interest due to an error in recognizing that it is one of the above.

In the feature unit 245SG of the present embodiment, the disadvantage setting values are set to 1 to 3 and the advantageous setting values are set to 4 to 6 as the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the setting values are set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The determination ratio of the effect pattern of the cut-in effect or the advance notice effect is different depending on whether the set value is the disadvantageous set value or the advantageous set value, but the present invention is not limited to this. As long as the disadvantage setting value includes 1 and the advantage setting value includes 6, they may be set in any range in which the values do not overlap with each other. Specifically, the disadvantage setting value may be 1 to 5 and the advantage setting value may be only 6, or the disadvantage setting value may be only 1 and the advantage setting value may be 2 to 6.

Further, in the feature unit 245SG of the present embodiment, an embodiment in which the suggestion effect in the present invention is described as a reach effect is illustrated, but the invention is not limited to this, and the suggestion effect in the present invention is being variably displayed. As long as it is an effect that can be executed, for example, an effect other than the reach effect may be used, such as a pseudo continuous effect in which a temporary stop of a decorative pattern and a revariable display are repeatedly executed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-25 (C) to 8-25 (E), the fluctuation of the super reach γ deviation when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6. When the variable display is executed in the pattern, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 6, the ratio of the cut-in effect being executed in the pattern CI-3 is the highest, and the pachinko game When the set value set in the machine 1 is 4, the ratio of the cut-in effect being executed in the pattern CI-3 is set to be the lowest. Therefore, the higher the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the higher the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 and the variable display result is out of order, and the higher the set value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Since the player can be expected to be set, the game interest can be improved.

In the feature unit 245SG of the embodiment, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6, the variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ. Illustrates a mode in which the higher the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the higher the rate at which the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3. It is not limited, and when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any of 4 to 6, and the variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ out of line, the pachinko game Regardless of the set value set in the machine 1, the ratio at which the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 may be the same ratio. By doing so, when the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3 in the variable display of the deviation of the super reach γ, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to be identified.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-6, which reach effect is to be executed and whether to execute the resurrection effect is determined in advance in association with each variation pattern, and is also determined in FIG. 8-13. As shown in (A), when the variable display result is a big hit, the CPU 103 determines the fluctuation pattern using the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table of 1 regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Therefore, when the variable display result is a big hit, the ratio of executing the revival effect during the variable display is the same regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For this reason, the execution rate of the resurrection effect during the variable display follows the set value that determines the rate at which the variable display result becomes a big hit, so the player should pay attention to whether or not the resurrection effect is executed during the variable display. Can be done, and the game entertainment can be improved.

In the feature unit 245SG of the present embodiment, whether or not to execute the reach effect and whether or not to execute the revival effect is illustrated by exemplifying a form that is determined in advance in association with each variation pattern. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and whether or not to execute the reach effect and whether or not to execute the revival effect is changed by the effect control CPU 120 after the CPU 103 determines the variation pattern. It may be appropriately determined from the display result and the like.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-6 and 8-26, as the fluctuation pattern in the feature portion 245SG of the present embodiment, the fluctuation pattern for executing the reach effect of the super reach δ (PA2-5 and PB1-6). Is provided, and when the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3 during the reach effect of the super reach δ, the variable display result is always a big hit, so that the variation of the super reach effect increases and the super Since the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3 during the reach effect of the reach δ and the player can pay attention to whether or not the variable display result becomes a big hit, the game interest can be improved.

In the feature portion 245SG of the present embodiment, a mode in which a variation pattern (PA2-5 and PB1-6) for executing the reach effect of the super reach δ is provided has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited thereto. Therefore, it is possible not to provide a variation pattern for executing the reach effect of the super reach δ.

Further, in the feature unit 245SG of the present embodiment, as the effects that can be executed during the variable display, a notice effect that can be executed during the period from the start of the variable display to the reach (or until the end timing of the variable display) and the reach. There is a cut-in effect that can be executed during the effect. Further, the advance notice effect can be executed by any of a plurality of effect patterns (patterns YE-1 to pattern YE-4) having different jackpot expectations. Further, as shown in FIG. 8-30, when the variable display result is a big hit and the cut-in effect is determined to be executed in the pattern CI-3 or the pattern CI-4, which is an effect pattern with a high expectation of a big hit. Determines the effect pattern from the effect patterns (pattern YE-1 and pattern YE-2) excluding the pattern YE-3 and the pattern YE-4, which are highly expected to hit the jackpot, when the advance notice effect is executed. It is possible to prevent the player from recognizing in advance that the variable display result will be a big hit by being executed by YE-3 or YE-4. Therefore, if it is decided to execute the cut-in effect in the pattern CI-4, whether or not the variable display result becomes a big hit by executing the advance notice effect in the pattern YE-1 or the pattern YE-2. It is possible to pay attention to the crab until the variable display is completed, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

Further, in the feature unit 245SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-27 and 8-28, during the variable display of 1, the advance notice effect is set before the cut-in effect (from the start of the variable display). By making it executable during the period until reach), if the variable display result becomes a big hit, the player recognizes that the variable display result becomes a big hit from the timing before the cut-in effect is executed. This can be prevented and the deterioration of the game interest can be prevented.

In addition, in the feature unit 245SG of the present embodiment, the embodiment in which the advance notice effect can be executed at the timing prior to the cut-in effect during the variable display of 1 is illustrated, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the advance notice effect may be executed as a look-ahead effect during the variable display that is executed before the variable display that executes the cut-in effect. Further, the advance notice effect is executed during the period from the start of the cut-in effect to the end of the reach effect, so that the variable display result is obtained in the period from the start of the cut-in effect to the end of the reach effect. It may be possible to prevent the player from recognizing that is a big hit and to prevent the game from being enjoyed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-25 and 8-26, when the variable display result is a big hit, the big hit type is always big hit C when the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-4. On the other hand, when the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3, the jackpot type can be any of the jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C, so that the cut-in effect is changed to the pattern CI-4 during the variable display. It is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not it is executed. Further, when the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3, there is a possibility that the big hit type is the big hit A or the big hit B. Therefore, the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3 and the variable display result. In the case of a miss, the player can be made to think that even if it is a big hit, it may have been a big hit A or a big hit B. Can be reduced.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-30, any of 4 to 6 is set as a set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (that is, the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3 and the variable display result is obtained. When the cut-in effect is decided to be executed in the pattern CI-3, which is an effect pattern with a high expectation of a big hit, when the advance notice effect is executed, the expectation of a big hit is high. Since the effect pattern is determined from the effect patterns (pattern YE-1 and pattern YE-2) excluding the pattern YE-3 and the pattern YE-4, the advance notice effect is executed by the patterns YE-3 and YE-4. It is possible to prevent the player from recognizing in advance that the variable display result will be a big hit. Therefore, even though the variable display result does not become a big hit, the player against the fact that the variable display result becomes a big hit when the pattern CI-3 and the patterns YE-3 and YE-4 are executed during the same variable display. It is possible to prevent the expectation of the above from being excessively raised.

In the feature unit 245SG of the present embodiment, any one of 4 to 6 is set as a set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the cut-in effect is the pattern CI-3, which is an effect pattern with a high expectation of a big hit. The execution ratio of the pattern YE-3 and the pattern YE-4 is set to 0% as a form of restricting the execution of the notice effect in the pattern YE-3 and the pattern YE-4 when the execution of the pattern YE-3 and the pattern YE-4 is restricted. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and any of 4 to 6 can be set as a set value for the pachinko gaming machine 1. When the cut-in effect is set and the execution is decided in the pattern CI-3, which is an effect pattern with a high expectation of a big hit, the advance notice effect is given at a lower rate than the pattern YE-1 and the pattern YE-2. It may be possible to execute with the pattern YE-3 or the pattern YE-4. That is, in the present claim, "when the advantageous setting value is set and it is not determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state, the suggestion effect is performed in an embodiment including the specific effect. When it is executed, the execution of the second predetermined effect is restricted. ”In order to prevent the advance notice effect from being executed by the pattern YE-3 or the pattern YE-4, the advance notice effect is performed by the pattern YE-1 or the pattern. A form in which the pattern YE-3 or the pattern YE-4 is executed at a lower rate than the case where the YE-2 is executed is also included.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-25, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6, and the fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation pattern (PA2-4) out of the super reach γ. In this case, if the set values are the same, the ratio of the cut-in effect being executed in the pattern CI-3 in the high-accuracy high-base state is the cut-in effect in the low-accuracy low-base state and the low-accuracy high-base state. It is set higher than the rate executed in pattern CI-3. Therefore, when the gaming state is the high-accuracy high-base state, the cut-in effect is produced in the variable display of the super reach γ out of line compared to the case where the gaming state is the low-accuracy low-base state or the low-accuracy high-base state. Since the ratio of execution in the pattern CI-3 is high, it becomes easy for the player to recognize that the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6 in the high accuracy and high base state. After the player recognizes that the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6 by executing the cut-in effect in the pattern CI-3 in the high accuracy and high base state. Is able to improve the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 because it is easy for the player to continue the game even after the gaming state shifts to the low probability and low base state.

In the feature unit 245SG of the present embodiment, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6, and the variable display is displayed by the fluctuation pattern (PA2-4) of the super reach γ deviation. When executed, when the gaming state is the high-accuracy high-base state, if the set values are the same, the cut-in rate is higher than when the gaming state is the low-accuracy low-base state or the low-accuracy high-base state. Although the embodiment in which the effect can be performed by the pattern CI-3 is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6. Moreover, when the variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern (PA2-4) out of the super reach γ, the cut-in effect can be executed in the pattern CI-3 when the gaming state is the high accuracy and high base state. When the gaming state is a low-accuracy low-base state or a low-accuracy high-base state, the cut-in effect may be disabled by the pattern CI-3.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-39, the reel effect (reel image 245SG005G) is a notice effect (character A image 245SG005s, character B image 245SG005t, character C image 245SG005u, character A to C group images 245SG005v and push. By displaying the image display device 5 with priority over the operation promotion image 245SG005H) of the button 31B, the reel effect is easier for the player to see than the notice effect, so that the player stops as the effect result of the reel effect. It becomes easy to guess the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the displayed symbol, and the game entertainment can be improved.

It should be noted that the feature unit 245SG exemplifies a form in which it is possible to suggest a set value set to 1 in the pachinko gaming machine by the symbol displayed as a stop display as the effect result of the reel effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, for example, it may be possible to suggest whether or not the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed since the previous start-up by the symbol displayed as a stop display as the effect result of the reel effect. That is, the setting suggestion in the present invention means that the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is suggested and that the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed. Includes both.

Further, the feature unit 245SG exemplifies a mode in which a part of the execution period of the reel effect (setting suggestion effect) and the execution period of the advance notice effect overlap, but the present invention is not limited to this. The execution period of these reel effects and the execution period of the advance notice effect may be completely the same.

Further, in the feature unit 245SG, the reel effect (setting suggestion effect) starts at a timing before the start timing of the notice effect and ends at a timing after the end timing of the notice effect during the variable display. Although illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and if at least a part of the feasible period of the reel effect and the feasible period of the advance notice effect overlaps, for example, the reel effect is the advance notice effect. It may start from a timing after the start timing of the above and end at a timing before the end timing of the advance notice effect. Further, the reel effect may start at a timing after the start timing of the notice effect and end at a timing after the end timing of the advance notice effect. Further, the reel effect may start at a timing before the start timing of the advance notice effect and end at a timing after the end timing of the advance notice effect. Further, the reel effect may start at a timing before the start timing of the advance notice effect and end at a timing before the end timing of the advance notice effect. The reel effect may start at a timing prior to the notice effect and end at a timing prior to the notice effect.

Further, the feature unit 245SG exemplifies a form in which a part of the execution period of the reel effect (setting suggestion effect) and the execution period of the advance notice effect overlap, but the present invention is not limited to this. , The execution period of the reel effect and the execution period of the notice effect do not have to overlap.

Further, in this feature unit 245SG, a reel effect (reel image 245SG005G) is announced (character A image 245SG005s, character B image 245SG005t, character C image 245SG005u, character A to C group images 245SG005v, and push button 31B. An example is illustrated in which the visibility of the reel effect in the image display device 5 is made higher than that of the advance notice effect by drawing on a layer higher than the operation promotion image 245SG005H), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the reel effect is displayed as an image relatively larger than the notice effect, the contrast of the reel effect is made higher than the notice effect, the display time of the reel effect is made longer than the notice effect, and the operation speed of the reel effect is increased. The visibility of the reel effect in the image display device 5 may be made higher than that of the advance notice effect by making it slower than the advance notice effect.

Further, in the feature unit 245SG, a mode in which the reel effect is executed by the operation of the stick controller 31A is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the stick controller is similar to other effects such as the reach effect. Regardless of whether or not the operation of 31A is executed, the effect may be executed according to the progress of the variable display. In this case, as in the case of the feature unit 245SG, it is sufficient to decide to stop the symbols of "cherry" and "watermelon" at a ratio corresponding to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Further, the feature unit 245SG exemplifies a mode in which whether or not to execute the reel effect and the effect result are determined when the stick controller 31A is operated in advance at the start of the variable display. However, it is also possible to determine whether or not to execute the reel effect during the variable display and the effect result based on the operation of the stick controller 31A during the variable display. By doing so, it is not necessary to determine whether or not to execute the reel effect and the effect result when the stick controller 31A is operated each time the variable display is started, so that the control load of the effect control CPU 120 is reduced. it can.

Further, the feature unit 245SG exemplifies a mode in which the reel effect can be executed in the period before the reach, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the reel effect is a variable display such as during the reach effect. In addition to being executed, it may be possible to execute during a period during which the variable display such as during a big hit game is not executed. If the reel effect can be executed during the period when the variable display is not executed, the symbol to be stopped and displayed as the effect result of the reel effect is a "cherry" that suggests the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. , And the "watermelon" symbol, and the "bell" symbol, which does not give any suggestion, can be determined.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-39, the image display device 5 can display the error notification image 245SG005J and the fourth symbol 245SG005F as the game progress information display corresponding to the progress of the game, and can display the error notification image 245SG005J and the reel effect. When (reel image 245SG005G) is displayed at the same time, the error notification image 245SG005J is displayed with priority over the reel image 245SG005G, that is, the error notification image 245SG005J has higher visibility than the reel image 245SG005G. Since it is displayed, the visibility of the error notification image 245SG005J can be ensured, and it is possible to prevent five people from making an error caused by the display of the error notification image 245SG005J being obstructed by the reel image 245SG005G.

The feature unit 245SG exemplifies a mode in which the error notification image 245SG005J and the fourth symbol 245SG005F are displayed on the image display device 5 as the game progress information display, but the present invention is not limited to this. The game progress information display may include displays other than the error notification image 245SG005J and the fourth symbol 245SG005F, such as the display of the number of reserved numbers for which the number of stored first special symbols and the number of stored stored for the second special symbols can be specified. Good.

Further, the image display device 5 can execute variable display of the decorative symbol in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right", and FIGS. 8-36 and 8-36. As shown in 37, when the reel effect (reel image 245SG005G) is duplicated in the decorative symbol display area 5C in the image display device 5, the reel image 245SG005G is displayed with priority over the decorative symbol. As a result, the reel image 245SG005G is displayed with higher visibility than the decorative symbol, so that the visibility of the reel image 245SG005G in the symbol display area 5C can be ensured, and the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, the image display device 5 can display the hold display in the first hold storage display area 245SG005D and the second hold storage display area 245SG005U as the effect-related image related to the effect different from the reel effect and the advance notice effect, and the reel. When the effect (reel image 245SG005G) is displayed overlapping with the first hold storage display area 245SG005D and the second hold storage display area 245SG005U, the reel image 245SG005G is displayed with priority over the hold display. Since the visibility of the reel image 245SG005G in the first reserved storage display area 245SG005D and the second reserved storage display area 245SG005U can be ensured, the game entertainment can be improved.

In the feature unit 245SG, the hold display is illustrated as the effect-related image, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect-related image is, for example, a decoration that is always displayed in the image display device 5. The image for use may be included.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-21, in the reel effect, the “7” symbol for notifying that the variable display result becomes a big hit as the effect result can be stopped and displayed, so that the effect result of the reel effect In addition to the stop display of symbols such as "cherry" and "watermelon" that suggest the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the game is also for the stop display of the "7" symbol. Since it is possible to draw people's attention, it is possible to raise the attention to the reel production and improve the game entertainment.

Further, in the reel effect, as the effect result, it is suggested that the "bell" symbol that does not suggest the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 and the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 are high set values. It is now possible to stop and display the "watermelon" symbol and the "cherry" symbol that suggests that the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is a high setting value at a higher rate than the "watermelon" symbol. Therefore, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the type of the symbol that is stopped and displayed as a result of the reel production, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

Further, in the variable display of the feature unit 245SG, as shown in FIGS. 8-37 and 8-38, the operation promotion image 245SG005H that urges the player to operate the push button 31B is displayed in the image display device 5. It is possible to execute a notice effect and a reel effect in which an operation promotion image that promotes the operation of the stick controller 31A to the player is not displayed. In the reel effect, a pattern of "cherry" or "watermelon" is displayed as the effect result. By displaying the stop display, it is possible to suggest the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1. Therefore, the reel effect is not executed because the stick controller 31A is not operated by the player who is not interested in suggesting the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, while the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not executed. Since the reel effect is executed by operating the stick controller 31A by the player who is interested in the suggestion of the above, it is possible to execute the effect that suits the player's taste.

Further, since the reel effect in the feature unit 245SG can be executed only once during the variable display, the reel effect can be performed multiple times by the player operating the stick controller 31A multiple times during the variable display of 1. Is executed, and it is prevented that the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is excessively recognized by the player.

The feature unit 245SG exemplifies a mode in which the reel effect can be executed only once during the variable display of 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of reel effects can be performed during the variable display of 1. It may be possible to execute the reel production. If the reel effect can be executed multiple times during the variable display of 1, the ratio of the "cherry" and "watermelon" symbols being stopped and displayed is set lower than that of the feature unit 245SG, so that the pachinko game can be played. It may be prevented that the set value set in the machine 1 is excessively recognized by the player.

Further, in the feature unit 245SG, the reel effect is executed by the operation of the stick controller 31A, and the advance notice effect is executed by the operation of the push button 31B. That is, since the reel effect and the advance notice effect are executed when the player's motion is detected by different motion detection means, the effect that the player does not want is erroneously executed among the reel effect and the advance notice effect. It is possible to surely avoid being played, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment. Further, since the reel effect can be executed by operating the stick controller 31A at a timing desired by the player within the operation acceptance period of the stick controller 31A, the game entertainment can be improved.

The feature unit 245SG exemplifies a mode in which the reel effect is executed by the operation of the stick controller 31A and the notice effect is executed by the operation of the push button 31B, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with motion detecting means other than the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B such as a touch sensor and a motion sensor, and the player's motion (to a specific location of the pachinko gaming machine 1) is provided by these touch sensors and motion sensors. The reel effect or the advance notice effect may be executed by detecting the proximity / contact of the player, the gesture of the player, etc.).

Further, the pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a ball hitting operation handle 30 operated by a player or the like to launch the game ball toward the game area by the hitting ball launching device as a game operation detecting means, and also produces an effect. As the operation detection means, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B capable of detecting the operation of the player are provided, and the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B, which are the effect operation detection means, are operated for the reel effect and the advance notice effect. Since it is an effect executed by the player, the player operates the ball striking operation handle 30 for advancing the game, and operates the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B for executing the reel effect and the advance notice effect. Can be distinguished.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-31 (A), the execution period of the reel effect including the operation acceptance period of the stick controller 31A is such that the reel effect can be executed even during the variable display of the shortened non-reach loss. It is set to 3 seconds to 3.5 seconds, which is shorter than the shortened non-reach out-of-reach special figure fluctuation time of 3.75 seconds. Therefore, the reel effect can be executed even when the player operates the stick controller 31A during the variable display of the shortened non-reach loss, so that the execution rate of the reel effect is increased every time the variable display is executed. Can be done.

In the present feature unit 245SG, a mode in which the reel effect can be executed during the variable display of the shortened non-reach loss is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the reel effect is the shortened non-reach loss. Except It may be possible to execute only during the variable display. By doing so, the reel effect can be executed for a sufficient period of time that the player can recognize, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these, and any changes or additions within the scope of the gist of the present invention are included in the present invention. ..

For example, in the feature unit 245SG of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-25, when the variable display is executed by the variable pattern (PB1-5) that executes the revival effect, the variable pattern that does not execute the revival effect is not executed. Although the embodiment in which the cut-in effect can be executed by the pattern CI-3 at a lower rate than the case where the variable display is executed by (PA2-4 or PB1-4) is illustrated, the present invention is limited to this. Instead, as a modified example 245SG-1, as shown in FIGS. 8-42 (A) to 8-42 (E), when variable display is executed in a variable pattern (PB1-5) for executing a revival effect. May make the cut-in effect infeasible with pattern CI-3. By doing so, when the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3 and it is notified that the variable display result is out of order, any of 4 to 6 is set as the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Even though the player recognizes that it is set, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the game interest due to the fact that the revival effect is executed and the variable display result is notified that the jackpot is a big hit.

Further, in the feature unit 245SG of the above-described embodiment, when the variable display is executed by the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ jackpot that executes the resurrection effect, the variable display is performed by the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ jackpot that does not execute the resurrection effect. Although the embodiment in which the ratio of executing the cut-in effect in the pattern CI-3 is set to be lower than that in the case of executing the above is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and FIG. As shown in −43 (A) to FIG. 8-43 (D), when the variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ jackpot that executes the revival effect, the super reach γ jackpot that does not execute the revival effect The ratio of executing the cut-in effect in the pattern CI-3 may be set higher than in the case of executing the variable display in the variable pattern. By doing so, for example, the player places more importance on whether or not the variable display result is a big hit than whether or not the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6. In the case of, after the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3 and it is notified that the variable display result is out of order, the revival effect is further executed and the variable display result is a big hit. Since it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not it is notified, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the feature unit 245SG of the above-described embodiment, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ jackpot (PB1-5) that executes the revival effect regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any one of 1 to 6. ), The cut-in effect can be executed by the pattern CI-3. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and is shown as a modified example 245SG-3. As shown in 8-44 (A) to 8-44 (C), when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6, the super reach γ jackpot that executes the revival effect is executed. When the variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern (PB1-5) of, the cut-in effect can be executed in the pattern CI-3, while the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are 1 to 3. In any case, the cut-in effect may be disabled in the pattern CI-3 when the variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern (PB1-5) of the super reach γ jackpot that executes the revival effect. By doing so, when the variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern (PB1-5) of the super reach γ jackpot that executes the revival effect, the variable display result becomes a jackpot and the pachinko game machine 1 is set. It is confirmed that the set value is one of 4 to 6, and the revival effect is executed after it is once notified that the variable display result will be out of order during the reach effect of the super reach γ during the variable display. It is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the variable display result is notified to be a big hit, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

That is, in the feature unit 245SG, when the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3 during the reach effect of the super reach γ, the setting is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 even if the variable display result is out of order. By determining that the value is any of 4 to 6, it is possible to promote the continuation of the game for the player, but in this feature unit 245SG-3, the reach of the super reach γ is being produced. When the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3, the variable display result becomes a big hit, and the player determines that the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6. However, it is possible to promote the continuation of the game.

Further, in the feature unit 245SG of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-30, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6, and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach γ is out of alignment. When the variable display is executed in (PA2-4), if the cut-in effect is determined to be executed in the pattern CI-1 or the pattern CI-2, which is an effect pattern with a low expectation of a big hit, the cut-in effect is executed. Illustrates a mode in which the advance notice effect can be executed by the pattern YE-3 at a higher rate than when the execution by the pattern CI-3, which is an effect pattern with a high expectation of a big hit, is determined. The present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIGS. 8-45 (A) to 8-45 (C) as a modified example 245SG-4, the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are 4 to 6. When the variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern (PA2-4) out of the super reach γ, the cut-in effect is decided to be executed in the pattern CI-3, which is an effect pattern with a high expectation of a big hit. If this is the case, the cut-in effect will be performed with pattern YE-3 at a higher rate than when execution is decided with pattern CI-1 or pattern CI-2, which is an effect pattern with low expectation of big hits. It may be feasible. By doing so, when the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-3 during the reach effect of the super reach γ, and when the cut-in effect is executed by the pattern CI-1 or the pattern CI-2. By executing the advance notice effect in the pattern YE-3 at a higher rate than that, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing in advance that the variable display result is out of alignment, so that the variable display result can be obtained. It is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not it will be a big hit, and to improve the game interest.

Further, in the feature unit 245SG of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-25 (C) to 8-25 (E), the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6. And when the variable display is executed with the fluctuation pattern (PA2-4) out of the super reach γ, if the gaming state is the high accuracy and high base state, the gaming state is low if the set values are the same. Although the embodiment in which the cut-in effect can be performed by the pattern CI-3 at a higher rate than in the case of the low accuracy base state or the low accuracy high base state is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and is a modification. As shown in FIG. 8-46 as 245SG-5, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6, and is variably displayed by the fluctuation pattern (PA2-4) of the super reach γ deviation. When is executed, if the gaming state is a low-accuracy low-base state or a low-accuracy high-base state, if the set values are the same, the gaming state is cut at a higher rate than when the gaming state is in the high-accuracy high-base state. The in-effect may be executed by the pattern CI-3.

By doing so, when the gaming state is the low-accuracy low-base state or the low-accuracy high-base state, the rate during the reach production of the super reach γ is higher than that when the gaming state is the high-accuracy high-base state. Since the cut-in effect is easily executed by the pattern CI-3, for example, the variable display result does not become a big hit over a long period of time (for example, 1000 variable displays) in the low accuracy low base state, so that the player When the motivation to continue the game is reduced, the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3, that is, the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any of 4 to 6. Is notified to the player, so that the player's willingness to continue playing the game can be improved, so that the game interest in the low-accuracy low-base state and the low-accuracy high-base state can be improved.

In the present modification 245SG-5, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6, and the variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern (PA2-4) of the super reach γ deviation. When the gaming state is the low-accuracy low-base state or the low-accuracy high-base state, if the set values are the same, the cut-in effect is produced at a higher rate than when the gaming state is the high-accuracy high-base state. Although the embodiment that can be performed by the pattern CI-3 is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 as a modification 245SG-6 as shown in FIG. 8-47. When the set value is any of 4 to 6 and the variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern (PA2-4) out of the super reach γ, the gaming state is the low probability low base state or the low probability high base state. If this is the case, the cut-in effect can be executed by the pattern CI-3, while if the gaming state is the high-accuracy and high-base state, the cut-in effect may be disabled by the pattern CI-3. By doing so, the cut-in effect can be executed by the pattern CI-3 during the reach effect of the super reach γ only when the game state is the low accuracy low base state or the low accuracy high base state, so that the accuracy is high. Since it is possible to draw the player's attention to the low-determined base state and the low-accuracy high-base state, in which the variable display result is less likely to be a big hit than the high-based state, Can be improved.

Further, in the feature unit 245SG of the above-described embodiment, a mode in which a cut-in effect can be executed during the reach effect of the super reach γ or the super reach δ is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as shown in FIGS. 8-48 (A) and 8-48 (B) as a modified example 245SG-7, during the reach production of the super reach γ and the super reach δ, the pachinko game is performed instead of the cut-in production. The set value suggestion effect suggesting the set value set in the machine 1 may be executable. In this way, when the set value suggestion effect can be executed during the reach effect of the super reach γ or the super reach δ, the period before the executable period (during the reach effect) of the set value suggestion effect (for example). , The period from the start of the variable display to the reach), the above-mentioned advance notice effect may be executed, and the execution ratio of the set value suggestion effect may be different depending on the effect pattern of the advance notice effect.

Specifically, when the advance notice effect is executed in the pattern YE-3 or the pattern YE-4, the set value is higher than that in the case where the advance notice effect is executed in the pattern YE-1 or the pattern YE-2. It suffices to make the suggestion effect feasible. By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to which effect pattern the advance notice effect is executed in, and when the advance notice effect is executed in the pattern YE-3 or the pattern YE-4, , Since the player can pay attention to whether or not the set value suggestion effect is executed during the reach effect, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the set value suggestion effect.

Further, in the feature unit 245SG of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-39, a reel effect (reel image 245SG005G) and a notice effect (character A image 245SG005s, character B image 245SG005t, character C) are displayed during variable display. When both the image 245SG005u and the group image 245SG005v of the characters A to C are executed, the reel effect is displayed on the image display device 5 in preference to the advance notice effect. The present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIGS. 8-49 (A) to 8-49 (E) as a modified example 245SG-8, for example, both the reel effect and the advance notice effect can be performed during the variable display. When executed, the reel effect (reel image 245SG005G) is displayed at the lower right of the image display device 5, and the notice effect (character A image 245SG005s, character B image 245SG005t, character C image 245SG005u, character A ~ The group image 245SG005v) of C may be displayed on the upper part of the image display device 5 so as not to overlap with the reel effect, that is, the reel effect and the advance notice effect may be displayed in different display areas in the image display device 5.

By doing so, the visibility of the images of both the reel effect and the advance notice effect is ensured, so that it is possible to prevent the effect of either the reel effect or the advance notice effect from being lowered.

In the present modification 245SG-8, displaying the reel effect and the advance notice effect in different display areas in the image display device 5 reduces the effect of either the reel effect or the advance notice effect. Although the form of prevention is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko game machine 1 is provided with an image display means different from the image display device 5, and both the reel effect and the advance notice effect are provided during the variable display. Is executed, the reel effect is displayed on one side of the image display device 5 and the image display means, and the notice effect is displayed on the other side to ensure the visibility of both the reel effect and the advance notice effect. , It may be possible to prevent the effect of either the reel effect or the advance notice effect from being lowered.

Further, in the feature unit 245SG of the above-described embodiment, the reel effect (reel image 245SG005G) and the advance notice effect (character A image 245SG005s, character B image 245SG005t, character C image 245SG005u, and characters A to C) are displayed during variable display. When both the group image 245SG005v) is executed, the reel effect has priority over the advance notice effect regardless of the effect pattern of the advance notice effect (the image displayed on the image display device 5 as the advance notice effect). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when both the reel effect and the advance notice effect are executed during the variable display, the image display device 5 is used as the advance notice effect. Depending on the image to be displayed, it may be different whether or not the reel effect is displayed on the image display device 5 in preference to the advance notice effect.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-50 (A) to 8-50 (E) as a modified example 245SG-9, an image of a character A having a low expectation of a big hit as a reel effect and a notice effect during variable display. When it is decided to display 245SG005s (pattern YE-1), the reel effect is displayed on the image display device 5 in preference to the advance notice effect, and the reel effect and the advance notice effect are displayed during the variable display. When it is decided to display the group image 245SG005v of the characters A to C having a high expectation of big hit (pattern YE-4), the image is displayed as a modified example 245SG-8 as shown in FIG. 8-49. The display areas of the reel effect and the notice effect in the device 5 are different.

By doing so, the visibility of the reel effect can be ensured, and an image having a high expectation of a big hit (for example, a group image 245SG005v of characters A to C) is displayed on the image display device 5 as a notice effect. In this case, since the visibility of the notice effect can be ensured in addition to the reel effect, the player should pay attention to the fact that the stop symbol displayed as the reel effect and the variable display result are likely to be big hits. Can be done, and the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, in the feature unit 245SG of the embodiment, when the reel effect is executed, the variable display result can be notified that the variable display result is a big hit by stopping and displaying the "7" symbol as the effect result of the reel effect. Although illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of symbols capable of notifying that the variable display result is a big hit may be provided as the effect result of the reel effect.

In such a case, for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-51 (A) to 8-51 (D) as a modified example 245SG-10, the variable display result is a big hit and the big hit type is a big hit A (non-probability variation). In the case of a jackpot), the white "7" symbol can be stopped and displayed as the effect result of the reel effect, while the variable display result is a jackpot and the jackpot type is jackpot B or jackpot C (probability variable jackpot). In this case, the black "7" symbol may be stopped and displayed as a result of the reel effect. By doing so, when the "7" symbol that notifies that the variable display result becomes a big hit as the effect result of the reel effect is stopped and displayed, the game is set to the display mode of the "7" symbol that is stopped and displayed. Since it is possible to draw people's attention, it is possible to improve the entertainment of the game.

Further, in the feature unit 245SG of the above-described embodiment, a mode in which an image of a character is displayed on the image display device 5 is illustrated as a notice effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the notice effect is not limited to this. It may be possible to perform an effect different from that of the feature unit 245SG, such as a group effect in which a plurality of characters cross the display area of the image display device 5. In particular, when the group effect can be executed as the advance notice effect, the image display device 5 is displayed as the group effect as shown in FIGS. 8-52 (A) to 8-52 (C) as the modified example 245SG-11. The reel effect (reel image 245SG005G) may be displayed by superimposing the area on the character crossing the area to the left. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the reel effect from being lowered by the character that crosses the display area of the image display device 5 toward the left.

Further, in the feature unit 245SG of the above-described embodiment, the reel effect is executed by the operation of the stick controller 31A, and the advance notice effect is executed by the operation of the push button 31B. That is, the reel effect and the advance notice effect are different motion detections. Although the embodiment in which the player's motion is detected by the means is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the reel effect and the advance notice effect are the same motion detection means for the player. It may be executed when the operation of is detected. When the reel effect and the advance notice effect are executed when the player's motion is detected by the same motion detection means, as shown in the feature unit 245SG, during the variable display of 1. As shown in FIG. 8-53 as a modified example 245SG-12, the effect executable period of the reel effect and a part of the effect executable period of the advance notice effect do not overlap (see FIGS. 8-31 to 8-34). In addition, the effect executable period of the reel effect and the effect executable period of the advance notice effect may not overlap at all during the variable display of 1. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from executing the undesired effects of the reel effect and the advance notice effect by operating the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B of the player, so that the game enjoyment can be improved.

Further, in the feature unit 245SG of the above-described embodiment, a mode in which the start timing of the reel effect and the start timing of the advance notice effect are different has been illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the reel effect is executed. By setting the operation acceptance period of the stick controller 31A for the purpose and the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B for executing the advance notice effect to be the same period, the reel effect and the advance notice effect may be executed from the same timing.

Further, in the feature unit 245SG of the above-described embodiment, the mode in which the effect control CPU 120 can determine whether or not the reel effect is executed at the start of the variable display is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. The ratio at which the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the reel effect is executed at the start of the variable display may be changed by an operation by the player. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-54 (A) and 8-54 (B) as a modified example 245SG-13, a state in which the game is not executed (variable display of a special symbol or a decorative symbol is executed). The effect mode change screen is displayed on the image display device 5 by the player operating the push button 31B in the case where the player does not have the hold memory, the hold memory does not exist, and the game state is not the big hit game state or the small hit game state). It is sufficient that the effect mode can be selected (changed) from the first effect mode and the second effect mode by the operation of the player's stick controller 31A while the effect mode change screen is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 8-54 (C), when the first effect mode is selected, the reel effect is executed at the start of the variable display at a higher rate than when the second effect mode is selected. It suffices if it is possible to determine.

In the present modification 245SG-13, a first effect mode and a second effect mode in which the execution ratios of the reel effects are different are provided, and the player can select the first effect mode and the second effect mode (effect mode). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a third effect mode in which the reel effect is not executed is further provided, and the player can perform these first effect modes to the third effect. The mode may be selectable.

Further, in the present modification 245SG-13, a mode in which the player can change the effect mode is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the operation is performed by opening the game machine frame 245SG003. By providing an effect mode change switch for changing the effect mode at a position where it is possible, employees of the amusement park can change the effect mode, while the player cannot change the effect mode. Good. Further, it may be possible to set whether or not the effect mode can be changed by the player, and the effect mode that can be changed by the player can be set by the operation of an employee of the game hall or the like.

Further, in the feature unit 245SG of the above-described embodiment, an embodiment in which any cut-in image can be displayed on the image display device 5 as a cut-in effect during execution of the reach effect of the super reach γ has been illustrated. The present invention is not limited to this, and any cut-in image (for example,) in a display area different from the reel effect (245SG005G) in the image display device 5 as in the advance notice effect shown in the above-described modification 245SG-8. , Cut-in image 245SG005y) may be displayable.

Further, in the case where any cut-in image can be displayed in a display area different from the reel effect (245SG005G) in the image display device 5, a modified example 245SG-14 is shown in FIG. 8-55 (A). As shown in FIG. 8-55 (D), a plurality of cut-in images suggesting set values as a cut-in effect (for example, a cut-in image of pattern CI-3 245SG005y and a cut-in image of a new pattern CI-5). Any of 245SG005r) may be displayed, and a set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be suggested depending on which cut-in image is displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, as shown in FIG. 8-55 (E), when any of 1 to 3 is set as the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the pattern CI-3 (cut-in image) is used as the cut-in effect. If the display of 245SG005y) is determined at a higher rate than the pattern CI-5 (display of the cut-in image 245SG005r) and any of 4 to 6 is set as the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the cut is performed. As an in-effect, the pattern CI-5 (display of the cut-in image 245SG005r) may be determined at a higher rate than the pattern CI-3 (display of the cut-in image 245SG005y).

In the feature unit 245SG, the cut-in effect can be executed only during the reach effect of the super reach γ, so that the rate at which the pattern CI-3 and the pattern CI-5 are executed as the cut-in effect (execution frequency). Can be different from the rate at which the "cherry" and "watermelon" symbols are stopped and displayed as a result of the reel effect. In this way, the rate at which the cut-in effect is executed in pattern CI-3 or pattern CI-5 differs from the rate at which the "cherry" or "watermelon" symbol is stopped and displayed as a result of the reel effect effect. Since it becomes easy for the player to guess the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 by these cut-in effect and reel effect, it is possible to improve the game interest.

In this modified example 245SG-14, the ratio at which the cut-in effect is executed in the pattern CI-3 or the pattern CI-5 and the ratio at which the “cherry” or “watermelon” symbol is stopped and displayed as the effect result of the reel effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when "6" is set as a set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the cut-in effect is the pattern CI-3 or the pattern. The ratio executed by CI-5 and the ratio at which the "cherry" or "watermelon" symbol is stopped and displayed as a result of the reel effect may be different.

By doing so, it becomes easier for the player to guess the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 between the cut-in effect and the reel effect, so that the game interest can be improved.

Further, in the feature unit 245SG of the above-described embodiment, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is used for other games such as a slot machine. It may be applied to the machine.

Further, although a plurality of feature portions and modified examples are disclosed in the present specification, the gaming machine of the present invention is implemented by combining two or more feature portions and modified examples from these plurality of feature portions and modified examples. You may.

(Explanation of Invention 245SG)
The present invention includes the invention 245SG shown below.

Conventionally, in a game machine that can set a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player, a setting suggestion effect for displaying characters such as a giraffe, an elephant, and a lion that suggest the set setting values is displayed at the time of change. (See, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902).

However, there is a problem that the effects other than the setting suggestion effect are not considered, and the improvement of the game entertainment by the setting suggestion effect may be insufficient. In order to solve such a problem, the invention 245SG is configured as follows.

The game machine of means 1
It is possible to control an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to set one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6) having different advantages for the player. A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1)
A display means capable of displaying an image (for example, an image display device 5) and
A specific image (for example, image 245SG005s of character A, image 245SG005t of character B, image 245SG005u of character C, and collective image 245SG005v of characters A to C) suggesting that the image is controlled to the advantageous state is displayed on the display means. The notice effect and the setting suggestion effect of displaying a setting suggestion image (for example, a reel image 245SG005G that stops and displays the symbols of "cherry" and "watermelon") that is different from the specific image and is related to the setting suggestion on the display means. (For example, a reel effect) and an effect execution means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes an effect process during variable display) and
With
When the advance notice effect and the setting suggestion effect are executed in parallel, the setting suggestion image is displayed so as to have higher visibility than the specific image (for example, FIG. 8-39 (E). ), When the reel image 245SG005G and the group image 245SG005v of the characters A to C are simultaneously displayed on the image display device 5, the reel image 245SG005G is displayed with priority over the group image 245SG005v of the characters A to C. Part to be done)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the setting suggestion image is easier to see than the specific image, it becomes easier for the player to make a guess about the setting suggestion, and the game interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of the means 2 is the gaming machine according to the means 1.
The display means can display a game progress information display (for example, the fourth symbol 245SG005F or the error notification image 245SG005J) corresponding to the progress of the game.
When the game progress information display and the setting suggestion image are simultaneously displayed on the display means, the game progress information display is displayed so as to have higher visibility than the setting suggestion image (for example). As shown in FIG. 8-39 (F), when the reel image 245SG005G and the error notification image 245SG005J are displayed at the same time on the image display device 5, the error notification image 245SG005J is displayed with priority over the reel image 245SG005G. Part to be done)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the visibility of the game progress information display can be ensured, it is possible to prevent misidentification of the game progress information display.

The gaming machine of the means 3 is the gaming machine according to the means 1 or the means 2.
A gaming machine capable of executing variable display in a specific display area of the display means (for example, each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R of "left", "middle", and "right").
When the setting suggestion image is displayed in the specific display area, the setting suggestion image is displayed so as to have higher visibility than the variable display image variably displayed in the specific display area (for example). , As shown in FIG. 8-39 (B), when the reel image 245SG005G is displayed overlapping in the symbol display area 5C in the image display device 5, the reel image 245SG005G has priority over the decorative symbol in the symbol display area 5C. (The part displayed as)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the visibility of the setting suggestion image can be ensured in the specific display area, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

The gaming machine of the means 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to the means 3.
The display means has an effect-related image display area (for example, a first hold storage display area 245SG005D and a second hold storage display area 245SG005D) capable of displaying at least an effect-related image (for example, a hold display) related to an effect different from the advance notice effect and the setting suggestion effect. Has a hold storage display area 245SG005U)
When the setting suggestion image is duplicated in the effect-related image display area, the setting suggestion image has higher visibility than the effect-related image displayed in the effect-related image display area. (For example, as shown in FIG. 8-37 (B), when the reel image 245SG005G is overlapped with the first hold storage display area 245SG005D, the reel image 245SG005G is displayed in the first hold storage display area 245SG005D. The part that is displayed with priority over 245SG005D)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the visibility of the setting suggestion image can be ensured in the effect-related image display area, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

The gaming machine of the means 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to the means 4.
As the specific image, the effect executing means includes a first specific image (for example, an image 245SG005s of a character A indicating that the jackpot expectation is low) and a second specific image (for example, a character A indicating that the jackpot expectation is high). The group image of ~ C 245SG005v) can be displayed on the display means.
When the first specific image and the setting suggestion image are simultaneously displayed on the display means, the setting suggestion image is displayed so as to have higher visibility than the first specific image (for example,). As shown in FIG. 8-50 (D), when the reel image 245SG005G and the image 245SG005s of the character A are displayed at the same time on the image display device 5, the reel image 245SG005G is displayed with priority over the image 245SG005s of the character A. The part to be done),
When the second specific image and the setting suggestion image are simultaneously displayed on the display means, the second specific image and the setting suggestion image are displayed in different display areas (for example, FIG. 8-). As shown in 50 (E), when the reel image 245SG005G and the group image 245SG005v of the characters A to C are simultaneously displayed on the image display device 5, the reel image 245SG005G is displayed at the lower right of the image display device 5. A part to be displayed and displaying a group image 245SG005v of characters A to C at the upper part of the image display device 5)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the visibility of the setting suggestion image can be ensured, and when the second specific image is displayed, the visibility of the second specific image can also be ensured. By directing both, the game entertainment can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 6 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 5.
In the setting suggestion effect, the effect execution means can display a special setting suggestion image corresponding to the control of the advantageous state on the display means (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-37 (E), a reel effect. The part where the "7" symbol, which indicates that the variable display result is a big hit, can be stopped and displayed)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, attention to the setting suggestion effect can be increased, and the game entertainment can be improved.

The gaming machine of the means 7 is the gaming machine according to the means 6.
As the advantageous state, a first advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state of jackpot A) and a second advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state of jackpot B or jackpot C) that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state). And have
The effect executing means can display a special setting suggestion image corresponding to the second advantageous state on the display means as the special setting suggestion image (for example, FIG. 8-51 (C) as a modification 245SG-10 and FIG. As shown in FIG. 8-51 (D), when the variable display result is a big hit and the big hit type is a big hit A, the white "7" symbol can be stopped and displayed as a reel effect, and the variable display result is a big hit. If the jackpot type is jackpot B or jackpot C, the black "7" symbol can be stopped and displayed as a reel effect)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, attention to the setting suggestion effect can be further increased, and the game entertainment can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 8 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 7.
The effect executing means includes a non-suggestion image (for example, a "bell" symbol) that does not suggest the setting, and as the setting suggestion image, a first setting suggestion image (for example, a "watermelon" symbol) and the first setting suggestion image. It is characterized in that it is possible to display a second setting suggestion image (for example, a “cherry” symbol) suggesting that a setting value more advantageous to the player is set.
According to this feature, it is possible to pay attention to the type of the image displayed in the setting suggestion effect, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

The gaming machine of the means 9 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to the means 8.
The effect executing means is
As the advance notice effect, an effect in which the specific image is in a predetermined operation state (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-52 (C) as a modification 245SG-11, a plurality of characters right the display area of the image display device 5). It is possible to perform a group production that crosses from the direction to the left),
The setting suggestion image can be superimposed and displayed on the specific image in the predetermined operating state (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-52 (C) as a modified example 245SG-11, the image display device 5 In the part where the reel image 245SG005G is displayed with priority over the group production)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the setting suggestion image from being lowered when the specific image is in a predetermined operation state.

The gaming machine of the means 10 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to the means 9.
A motion detecting means (for example, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B) capable of detecting a predetermined motion of a player is provided.
The effect executing means is
It is possible to execute an operation promotion notification effect (for example, a portion displaying the operation promotion image 245SG005H in the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 8-38 (B)) that prompts the execution of the predetermined operation.
As the advance notice effect, the specific image can be displayed based on the detection of the predetermined operation by the operation detection means, accompanied by the execution of the operation promotion notification effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-38, the advance notice effect). Is the image of the character A 245SG005s, the image of the character B 245SG005t, the image of the character C 245SG005u, and the characters A to C by operating the push button 31B after the operation promotion image 245SG005H is displayed on the image display device 5. The part where any of the group image 245SG005v is displayed),
As the setting suggestion effect, the setting suggestion image can be displayed based on the detection of the predetermined motion by the motion detection means without executing the motion promotion notification effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-37). In the reel effect, the operation promotion image 245SG005H is not displayed on the image display device 5, and the player operates the stick controller 31A to display "cherry", "watermelon", "7", and "cherry" on the reel image 245SG005G. The part where one of the "Gekiatsu", "Chance", and "Bell" symbols is stopped and displayed)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the setting suggestion effect in which the suggestion by the setting suggestion image is performed is not accompanied by the operation promotion notification effect, and the setting suggestion effect is not executed for the player who is not interested in the suggestion regarding the setting suggestion. On the other hand, since the player who is interested in the suggestion regarding the setting suggestion can execute the setting suggestion effect, the effect that suits the player's taste can be executed.

(Explanation of Invention 246SG)
In addition, the present invention includes the invention 246SG shown below.

Conventionally, in a game machine that can set a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player, a setting suggestion effect for displaying characters such as a giraffe, an elephant, and a lion that suggest the set setting values is displayed at the time of change. (See, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902).

However, there is a problem that the effects other than the setting suggestion effect are not considered, and the improvement of the game entertainment by the setting suggestion effect may be insufficient. In order to solve such a problem, the invention 246SG is configured as follows.

The game machine of means 1
It is possible to control an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to set one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6) having different advantages for the player. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1)
A display means capable of displaying an image (for example, an image display device 5) and
A specific image (for example, image 245SG005s of character A, image 245SG005t of character B, image 245SG005u of character C, and collective image 245SG005v of characters A to C) suggesting that the image is controlled to the advantageous state is displayed on the display means. A setting suggestion that displays a setting suggestion image (for example, a reel image 245SG005G that stops and displays a "cherry" or "watermelon" symbol) related to the setting suggestion, which is an image different from the notice effect and the specific image, on the display means. An effect executing means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes an effect process during variable display) that can execute the effect, and
With
When the advance notice effect and the setting suggestion effect are executed in parallel, the specific image and the setting suggestion image are displayed in different display areas (for example, FIG. 8- as a modification 245SG-8). As shown in 49, when the reel image 245SG005G and the group image 245SG005v of the characters A to C are simultaneously displayed on the image display device 5, the reel image 245SG005G is displayed at the lower right of the image display device 5, and the character A is displayed. The part that displays the group image 245SG005v of ~ C at the upper part of the image display device 5)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the visibility of both the specific image and the setting suggestion image is ensured, so that it is possible to prevent the effect of either the advance notice effect or the setting suggestion effect from being reduced. Because it can be done, the game entertainment can be improved.

The gaming machine of the means 2 is the gaming machine according to the means 1.
The display means can display a game progress information display (for example, the fourth symbol 245SG005F or the error notification image 245SG005J) corresponding to the progress of the game.
When the game progress information display and the setting suggestion image are simultaneously displayed on the display means, the game progress information display is displayed so as to have higher visibility than the setting suggestion image (for example). As shown in FIG. 8-39 (F), when the reel image 245SG005G and the error notification image 245SG005J are displayed at the same time on the image display device 5, the error notification image 245SG005J is displayed with priority over the reel image 245SG005G. Part to be done)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the visibility of the game progress information display can be ensured, it is possible to prevent misidentification of the game progress information display.

The gaming machine of the means 3 is the gaming machine according to the means 1 or the means 2.
A gaming machine capable of executing variable display in a specific display area of the display means (for example, each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R of "left", "middle", and "right").
When the setting suggestion image is displayed in the specific display area, the setting suggestion image is displayed so as to have higher visibility than the variable display image variably displayed in the specific display area (for example). , As shown in FIG. 8-39 (B), when the reel image 245SG005G is displayed overlapping in the symbol display area 5C in the image display device 5, the reel image 245SG005G has priority over the decorative symbol in the symbol display area 5C. (The part displayed as)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the visibility of the setting suggestion image can be ensured in the specific display area, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

The gaming machine of the means 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to the means 3.
The display means has an effect-related image display area (for example, a first hold storage display area 245SG005D and a second hold storage display area 245SG005D) capable of displaying at least an effect-related image (for example, a hold display) related to an effect different from the advance notice effect and the setting suggestion effect. Has a hold storage display area 245SG005U)
When the setting suggestion image is duplicated in the effect-related image display area, the setting suggestion image has higher visibility than the effect-related image displayed in the effect-related image display area. (For example, as shown in FIG. 8-37 (B), when the reel image 245SG005G is overlapped with the first hold storage display area 245SG005D, the reel image 245SG005G is displayed in the first hold storage display area 245SG005D. The part that is displayed with priority over 245SG005D)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the visibility of the setting suggestion image can be ensured in the effect-related image display area, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

The gaming machine of the means 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to the means 4.
As the specific image, the effect executing means includes a first specific image (for example, an image 245SG005s of a character A indicating that the jackpot expectation is low) and a second specific image (for example, a character A indicating that the jackpot expectation is high). The group image of ~ C 245SG005v) can be displayed on the display means.
When the first specific image and the setting suggestion image are simultaneously displayed on the display means, the setting suggestion image is displayed so as to have higher visibility than the first specific image (for example,). As shown in FIG. 8-50 (D), when the reel image 245SG005G and the image 245SG005s of the character A are displayed at the same time on the image display device 5, the reel image 245SG005G is displayed with priority over the image 245SG005s of the character A. The part to be done),
When the second specific image and the setting suggestion image are simultaneously displayed on the display means, the second specific image and the setting suggestion image are displayed in different display areas (for example, FIG. 8-). As shown in 50 (E), when the reel image 245SG005G and the group image 245SG005v of the characters A to C are simultaneously displayed on the image display device 5, the reel image 245SG005G is displayed at the lower right of the image display device 5. A part to be displayed and displaying a group image 245SG005v of characters A to C at the upper part of the image display device 5)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the visibility of the setting suggestion image can be ensured, and when the second specific image is displayed, the visibility of the second specific image can also be ensured. By directing both, the game entertainment can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 6 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 5.
In the setting suggestion effect, the effect execution means can display a special setting suggestion image corresponding to the control of the advantageous state on the display means (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-37 (E), a reel effect. The part where the "7" symbol, which indicates that the variable display result is a big hit, can be stopped and displayed)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, attention to the setting suggestion effect can be increased, and the game entertainment can be improved.

The gaming machine of the means 7 is the gaming machine according to the means 6.
The advantageous state has a first advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state of jackpot A) and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state.
The effect executing means can display a special setting suggestion image corresponding to the second advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state of a jackpot B or a jackpot C) as the special setting suggestion image on the display means (for example, a modification). As shown in FIGS. 8-51 (C) and 8-51 (D) as Example 245SG-10, when the variable display result is a big hit and the big hit type is a big hit A, a white “7” is used as a reel effect. If the symbol can be stopped and displayed, the variable display result is a jackpot, and the jackpot type is jackpot B or jackpot C, the black "7" symbol can be stopped and displayed as a reel effect)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, attention to the setting suggestion effect can be further increased, and the game entertainment can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 8 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 7.
The effect executing means includes a non-suggestion image (for example, a "bell" symbol) that does not suggest the setting, and as the setting suggestion image, a first setting suggestion image (for example, a "watermelon" symbol) and the first setting suggestion image. It is characterized in that it is possible to display a second setting suggestion image (for example, a “cherry” symbol) suggesting that a setting value more advantageous to the player is set.
According to this feature, it is possible to pay attention to the type of the image displayed in the setting suggestion effect, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

The gaming machine of the means 9 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to the means 8.
The effect executing means is
As the advance notice effect, an effect in which the specific image is in a predetermined operation state (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-52 (C) as a modification 245SG-11, a plurality of characters right the display area of the image display device 5). It is possible to perform a group production that crosses from the direction to the left),
The setting suggestion image can be superimposed and displayed on the specific image in the predetermined operating state (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-52 (C) as a modified example 245SG-11, the image display device 5 In the part where the reel image 245SG005G is displayed with priority over the group production)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the setting suggestion image from being lowered when the specific image is in a predetermined operation state.

The gaming machine of the means 10 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to the means 9.
A motion detecting means (for example, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B) capable of detecting a predetermined motion of a player is provided.
The effect executing means is
It is possible to execute an operation promotion notification effect (for example, a portion displaying the operation promotion image 245SG005H in the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 8-38 (B)) that prompts the execution of the predetermined operation.
As the advance notice effect, the specific image can be displayed based on the detection of the predetermined operation by the operation detection means, accompanied by the execution of the operation promotion notification effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-38, the advance notice effect). Is the image of the character A 245SG005s, the image of the character B 245SG005t, the image of the character C 245SG005u, and the characters A to C by operating the push button 31B after the operation promotion image 245SG005H is displayed on the image display device 5. The part where any of the group image 245SG005v is displayed),
As the setting suggestion effect, the setting suggestion image can be displayed based on the detection of the predetermined motion by the motion detection means without executing the motion promotion notification effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-37). In the reel effect, the operation promotion image 245SG005H is not displayed on the image display device 5, and the player operates the stick controller 31A to display "cherry", "watermelon", "7", and "cherry" on the reel image 245SG005G. The part where one of the "Gekiatsu", "Chance", and "Bell" symbols is stopped and displayed)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the setting suggestion effect in which the setting suggestion image is suggested is not accompanied by the operation promotion notification effect, so that the player who is not interested in the setting suggestion does not execute the setting suggestion effect. Since the player who is interested in the setting suggestion can execute the setting suggestion effect, it is possible to execute the effect that suits the player's taste.

(Explanation of Invention 257SG)
In addition, the present invention includes the invention 257SG shown below.

Conventionally, in a game machine that can set a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player, a setting suggestion effect for displaying characters such as a giraffe, an elephant, and a lion that suggest the set setting values is displayed at the time of change. (See, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902).

However, there is a problem that the effects other than the setting suggestion effect are not considered, and the improvement of the game entertainment by the setting suggestion effect may be insufficient. In order to solve such a problem, the invention 257SG is configured as follows.

The game machine of means 1
It is possible to control an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to set one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6) having different advantages for the player. A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1)
A display means capable of displaying an image (for example, an image display device 5) and
Motion detection means (for example, stick controller 31A and push button 31B, ball striking operation handle 30) capable of detecting a predetermined motion of the player, and
An operation promotion notification effect for encouraging the execution of the predetermined operation (for example, a portion displaying the operation promotion image 245SG005H in the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 8-38 (B)) and the predetermined operation by the operation detecting means. A specific effect for displaying a specific image on the display means based on the detection of the above, and an effect executing means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect processing during variable display).
With
The specific effect includes a first specific effect (for example, a notice effect) accompanied by execution of the operation promotion notification effect and a second specific effect (for example, a reel effect) without execution of the operation promotion notification.
The specific image displayed in the second specific effect includes a setting suggestion image that makes a suggestion related to the setting suggestion (for example, in the reel effect, the reel image 245SG005G is provided with a "cherry" or "watermelon" symbol. The part that suggests the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 by displaying the stop)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the second specific effect in which the setting suggestion image is suggested is not accompanied by the operation promotion notification effect, so that the second specific effect is not executed for the player who is not interested in the setting suggestion. On the other hand, since the second specific effect can be executed for the player who is interested in the setting suggestion, the effect that suits the player's taste can be executed.

The gaming machine of the means 2 is the gaming machine according to the means 1.
When the specific image displayed in the first specific effect and the specific image displayed in the second specific effect are displayed at the same time, the specific image displayed in the second specific effect is better. The reel image 245SG005G and the character A are displayed in the image display device 5 so as to have higher visibility than the specific image displayed in the first specific effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-39 (E)). When the group image 245SG005v of ~ C is displayed at the same time, the part where the reel is displayed with the image 245SG005G prioritized over the group image 245SG005v of the characters A to C)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the specific image displayed in the second specific effect is easier to see than the specific image displayed in the first specific effect, so that it becomes easier for the player to make a guess about the setting suggestion, and the game is enjoyed. Can be improved.

The gaming machine of the means 3 is the gaming machine according to the means 1.
When the specific image displayed in the first specific effect and the specific image displayed in the second specific effect are displayed at the same time, the specific image displayed in the first specific effect and the first specific effect are displayed at the same time. 2 The specific images displayed in the specific effect are displayed in different display areas (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-49 as a modified example 245SG-8, the reel image 245SG005G and the characters A to the image display device 5 When the group image 245SG005v of C is displayed at the same time, the reel image 245SG005G is displayed at the lower right of the image display device 5, and the group image 245SG005v of the characters A to C is displayed at the upper part of the image display device 5. )
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the visibility of both the specific image displayed in the first specific effect and the specific image displayed in the second specific effect is ensured, so that the first specific effect and the second specific effect can be assured. Since it is possible to prevent the production effect of one of the productions from being lowered, it is possible to improve the entertainment of the game.

The gaming machine of the means 4 is the gaming machine according to the means 1.
The effect executing means executes the second specific effect in an execution period different from the execution period of the first specific effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-53 as a modified example 245SG-12, a reel effect and a notice. The part where the production is performed in a different period)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously executing the specific effect that the player does not want among the first specific effect and the second specific effect by the predetermined action of the player, and to improve the game entertainment.

The gaming machine of the means 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to the means 4.
The motion detecting means has a first motion detecting means (for example, a push button 31B) capable of detecting the predetermined motion and a second motion detecting means capable of detecting the predetermined motion but different from the first motion detecting means. Means (eg, stick controller 31A) and include.
The effect executing means can execute the first specific effect based on the detection of the predetermined motion by the first motion detecting means, and the second motion detecting means detects the predetermined motion. The specific effect can be executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-31 to 8-34, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the advance notice effect based on the operation of the push button 31B, and the stick controller 31A can execute the advance notice effect. The part where the reel effect can be executed based on the operation)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the motion detection means for detecting the predetermined motion of the player is different between the first specific effect and the second specific effect, the player does not want the first specific effect and the second specific effect. It is possible to surely avoid the accidental execution of a specific effect and improve the game entertainment.

The gaming machine of means 6 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 5.
The motion detecting means includes a game operation detecting means (for example, a hitting ball operation handle 30) capable of detecting an operation based on the progress of the game, and an effect operation detecting means (for example, a stick controller 31A and a push) capable of detecting an operation based on the effect. Button 31B), including
The first specific effect and the second specific effect are effects executed based on the detection of the predetermined action of the player by the effect operation detecting means (for example, the reel effect and the advance notice effect). , The part that is executed based on the operation of the stick controller and roller 31A and the push button 31B by the player)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it can be distinguished from the movement related to the progress of the game.

The gaming machine of the means 7 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to the means 6.
Normal variable display (for example, non-reach, normal reach, and super reach variable display) in which variable display can be executed and the variable display period is a predetermined period, and shortened variable display in which the variable display period is shorter than the predetermined period (for example, variable display) For example, a variable display means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a special symbol variation process) capable of executing a shortened non-reach out-of-reach variable display) and
Each time the variable display is executed, a determination means capable of determining whether or not to execute the second specific effect when the predetermined operation is detected by the operation detection means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is shown in FIG. 8-. The part that executes the reel effect determination process shown in 20) and
With
The effect period of the second specific effect is a period corresponding to the variable display period of the shortened variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-31, execution of the reel effect including the operation acceptance period of the stick controller 31A. The period is shorter than the non-reach out-of-reach special map fluctuation time)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the second specific effect can be executed even when the motion detecting means detects a predetermined motion of the player during the shortened variable display, so that the second specific effect is executed for each execution of the variable display. It is possible to increase the execution rate of the production.

The gaming machine of means 8 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 7.
An execution frequency changing means capable of changing the execution frequency of the second specific effect by the effect executing means is provided (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-54 as a modified example 245SG-13, the effect is produced by the player's operation. The part in which the mode can be selected between the first effect mode and the second effect mode in which the execution decision ratio of the reel effect is different)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the player can adjust the execution frequency of the second specific effect to a desired frequency, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

The gaming machine of the means 9 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to the means 8.
The effect executing means can execute a suggestion effect different from the second specific effect in a display area different from the display area where the setting suggestion image is displayed in the display means. (For example, as shown in FIG. 8-55 as a modification 245SG-14, a cut-in effect can be performed by the pattern CI-3 or the pattern CI-5 in the upper part of the image display device 5).
At least one of the reliability and the execution frequency of the suggested effect is different from that of the second specific effect (for example, the rate at which the pattern CI-3 or the pattern CI-5 is executed as the cut-in effect is used as the effect result of the reel effect. The part where the "cherry" and "watermelon" symbols are different from the stop display ratio)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the suggestion effect and the second specific effect make it easier for the player to make a guess about the setting suggestion, so that the game interest can be improved.

Further, all or a part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modification, and the configurations shown in the following embodiment and each modification may be arbitrarily combined.

It should be noted that the above-described embodiment and the following-described embodiment disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and are not considered to be restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention can also be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and a plurality of set values (for example, 1 to 6) having different advantages for the player. ), Which is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be set to any of the set values.
A display means capable of displaying an image (for example, an image display device 5) and
A preview image suggesting that the image is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, image 245SG005s of character A, image 245SG005t of character B, image 245SG005u of character C, group image 245SG005v of characters A to C, in the examples. A notice effect for displaying a notice image (sometimes referred to as a specific image) on the display means, and a setting suggestion image (for example, "cherry" or "watermelon") that is different from the notice image and is related to the setting suggestion. An effect executing means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes an effect process during variable display) capable of executing a setting suggestion effect for displaying a reel image 245SG005G for stopping and displaying a symbol on the display means.
With
When the notice effect and the setting suggestion effect are executed in parallel, the notice image and the setting suggestion image are displayed in different display areas (for example, FIG. 8-49 as a modification 245SG-8). As shown in the above, when the reel image 245SG005G and the group image 245SG005v of the characters A to C are simultaneously displayed on the image display device 5, the reel image 245SG005G is displayed at the lower right of the image display device 5, and the characters A to C are displayed. The part that displays the group image 245SG005v of C at the upper part of the image display device 5),
further,
A process including super reach A to C in step 097IWS104 in the effect control CPU 120, which can execute a specific effect (for example, super reach A to C) suggesting whether or not it is controlled in an advantageous state. A part in which a table is selected and steps 097IWS106 and S305 are executed), a specific image (for example, a chance-up image) and a predetermined image (for example, character image 097IW11, character image 097IW21) different from the specific image during execution of the specific effect. ) Is provided (for example, a portion in which the process table including the super reach A to C and the chance-up effect is selected in step 097IWS104 in the effect control CPU 120 and steps 097IWS106 and S305 are executed). The specific effect executing means can execute a plurality of types of specific effects (for example, super reach A to C) including at least a first specific effect (for example, super reach A) and a second specific effect (for example, super reach B). Yes, the image display means can display at least the first specific image (for example, image A1, image A2, image A3, image A4) as the specific image during the execution of the first specific effect, and the second specific effect. The second specific image (for example, image B1, image B2, image B3) can be displayed during the execution of the above, and the specific image in the normal mode (for example, white) and the expectation that the specific image is controlled in a more advantageous state than the normal mode. It is possible to display a specific image in a special mode (for example, blue, green, red, iridescent) suggesting a high degree, and the predetermined image is a display mode not related to the expectation degree controlled in an advantageous state. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 10-9 to 10-16, the display mode of the character image 097IW11 and the character image 097IW21 does not change), the image display means is the first special when displaying a specific image according to the special mode. It is possible to display a specific image by adding an effect element (for example, an effect image of display colors of blue, green, red, and rainbow colors), which is different from the first special effect element when displaying a specific image in a normal mode. A gaming machine capable of displaying a specific image by adding a second special effect element (for example, an effect image having a white display color) (see FIGS. 10-9 to 10-16) can be mentioned.
According to this feature, the visibility of both the specific image and the setting suggestion image is ensured, so that it is possible to prevent the effect of either the advance notice effect or the setting suggestion effect from being reduced. Because it can be done, the game entertainment can be improved. Further, it is possible to make the player recognize that the specific image is a preview image, and it is possible to draw the player's attention to the specific image.

Further, the set value and the suggestion image may be associated with each other. For example, a plurality of special effect elements in the suggestion image may be provided, and the corresponding special effect element may be displayed when a specific setting value is set (for example, when the setting value is 6, a rainbow color is displayed. , Gold can be displayed when the set value is 4 or more). By doing so, the set value can be inferred from the special production element, and the interest is improved.

Further, the set value and the suggestion effect may be associated with each other. By making it possible to estimate the set value according to the display mode (color and size) of the suggestion effect, the player can not only control the suggestion effect to an advantageous state but also estimate the set value, which makes it possible to estimate the set value. By paying attention, the interest will improve.

In addition to the setting suggestion effect by the setting suggestion image, the setting value may be suggested depending on the type of the display mode of the specific image. For example, the set value is advantageous for the player by selecting the display mode of the specific image from a plurality of types by lottery or the like and making the selection ratio of each display mode different depending on the set value. The more it is, the easier it is to display a specific image in a specific type of display mode (for example, a special mode suggesting that the degree of expectation of being controlled in an advantageous state is high). By doing so, when a specific image (specific image according to a special aspect) in a specific type of display mode is displayed, the degree of expectation of being controlled in an advantageous state is increased, and the set value is set to the player. Since the expectation that it is advantageous for the game is also increased, it is possible to improve the game entertainment. Further, as a specific type of display mode, when the specific image according to the special mode is easily displayed, it is a case where the specific image according to the special mode is displayed but not controlled in an advantageous state. However, since the expectation that the set value is advantageous to the player is maintained, it is possible to reduce the decline in the interest in the game.

Further, if the suggestion of the set value is performed by a plurality of elements (for example, two elements of the type of the setting suggestion effect and the type of the display mode of the specific image), the plurality of elements are advantageous for the player. When a value is suggested, the player can be more confident that the setting value is favorable to the player, even if one factor does not suggest a setting value favorable to the player. If an advantageous setting value is suggested by the element of, the player can maintain a sense of expectation that the setting value is advantageous to the player, so that the game interest can be improved.

Further, as another example of a game machine capable of improving the interest, a game machine capable of playing a game and being controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player, and is controlled to the advantageous state. A process table including super reach A to C is selected in step 097IWS104 in the effect control CPU 120 to execute a specific effect executing means (for example, super reach A to C) that suggests whether or not to be performed. Step 097IWS106, S305 is executed), a specific image (for example, a chance-up image) and a predetermined image different from the specific image (for example, character image 097IW11, character image 097IW21) are displayed during execution of the specific effect. A specific effect executing means including a possible image display means (for example, a portion in which the process table including the super reach A to C and the chance-up effect is selected in step 097IWS104 in the effect control CPU 120 and steps 097IWS106 and S305 are executed). Can execute a plurality of types of specific effects (for example, Super Reach A to C) including at least a first specific effect (for example, Super Reach A) and a second specific effect (for example, Super Reach B), and display an image. The means can display at least the first specific image (for example, image A1, image A2, image A3, image A4) as the specific image during the execution of the first specific effect, and during the execution of the second specific effect. The second specific image (for example, image B1, image B2, image B3) can be displayed, and the specific image in the normal mode (for example, white) and the expectation that the specific image is controlled in a more advantageous state than the normal mode are high. It is possible to display a specific image in a special mode (eg, blue, green, red, iridescent) suggesting that the predetermined image is a display mode that is not related to the degree of expectation controlled in an advantageous state (eg, FIG. As shown in 10-9 to 10-16, the display mode of the character image 097IW11 and the character image 097IW21 does not change), and the image display means has a first special effect element (for example, when displaying a specific image according to the special mode). , Blue, green, red, rainbow color display color effect image) can be added to display a specific image, and when displaying a specific image in a normal mode, a second special effect different from the first special effect element A game machine capable of displaying a specific image by adding an element (for example, an effect image of a white display color) (see FIGS. 10-9 to 10-16) can be mentioned. Is done. A form example of this game machine will be described below as another form example.

(Explanation of Feature 103SG of This Embodiment)
Next, the feature unit 103SG of this embodiment will be described. In the description of each step of the flowchart in this embodiment, for example, the part described as "step S1" may be abbreviated as "S1" or "103SGS1", or "normal reach" may be abbreviated as "N reach". "Super reach" may be abbreviated as "S reach" or "SP reach". Further, for a configuration similar to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description or having a different form, arrangement position, etc. but having the same function, detailed description will be omitted by adding the same reference numerals. In the following, the front side of FIG. 1 is the front (front, front) side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the back side is the back (rear) side, and the vertical and horizontal directions when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the front side. It will be explained as a standard. The front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment is a facing surface facing the player playing the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Next, the gaming machine according to the first embodiment in the feature unit 103SG of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-1 to 9-19.

First, FIG. 9-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 103SG of this embodiment, showing the layout of the main members. As shown in FIGS. 9-1 and 9-3, the pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into an outer frame 103SG001a formed in a vertically long square frame shape and a gaming board (gauge) constituting the game board surface. It is composed of a board) 2 and a game machine frame (underframe) 103SG003 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area. Further, in the game machine frame 103SG003, between the door opening position where the glass door frame 103SG003a having a glass window opens the front surface of the game machine frame 103SG003 centering on the left side and the door closing position which closes the front surface. It is rotatably provided, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 103SG003a, and when the glass door frame 103SG003a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

Further, the game machine frame 103SG003 can be opened by inserting the door key owned by the game machine clerk or the like into a lock (not shown) and unlocking it, and the game machine frame 103SG003 and the glass can be opened by players other than the clerk. The door frame 103SG003a cannot be opened.

The left game area 103SG002L is a game area in which the (left-handed) game ball launched relatively weakly by the operation of the hitting operation handle 30 flows down, and the right game area 103SG002R is the left game area 103SG002L by the operation of the hitting operation handle 30. This is a game area in which a (right-handed) game ball launched more strongly than the game ball flowing down passes through the upper path 103SG002C of the image display device 5 and flows down.

Further, a general winning opening 10 is arranged in the left game area 103SG002L, and in the right game area 103SG002R, a passing gate 41, a variable winning ball device 6B, and a general winning ball device 6B are arranged from the upstream side to the downstream side of the right game area 103SG002R. A winning opening 10 and a special variable winning ball device 7 are arranged. That is, the game ball flowing down the left game area 103SG002L can win a prize in the first starting winning opening formed by the general winning opening 10 and the winning ball device 6A, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 103SG002R is variable. It is possible to win a prize in the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, the general winning opening 10 and the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7, and it is possible to pass through the passing gate 41.

As shown in FIG. 9-1, a plurality of obstacle nails 103SGK1 are arranged between the winning ball device 6A, the variable winning ball device 6B, and the special variable winning ball device 7. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the left game area 103SG002L cannot win the second start winning opening or the large winning opening, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 103SG002R cannot win the first starting winning opening. It has become.

As shown in FIGS. 9-2 and 9-3, the main substrate 11 in the feature portion 103SG of this embodiment is housed in the substrate case 103SG201 which is configured to be openable by the first member and the second member. It is mounted on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the state. Further, on the main board 11, a lock switch 103SG051 for switching the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to a changeable set value change state, a jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) described later in the set value change state, and the like are used. A setting changeover switch 103SG052 that functions as a setting switch for changing a set value, and an open sensor 103SG090 that detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 103SG003 are provided. Although the details will be described later, the set value change state in the feature unit 103SG of this embodiment is a state in which a clerk of the game hall or the like can confirm the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (set value confirmation state). ).

The setting switching main body unit provided with an operation unit that can be operated by the player, such as the lock switch 103SG051 and the setting changeover switch 103SG052, is housed in the board case 103SG201 together with the main board 11, and the lock switch 103SG051 and the setting changeover switch 103SG052. Is exposed to the back side through an opening formed in the back surface of the board case 103SG201 so that it can be operated without opening the board case 103SG201.

Since the board case 103SG201 having the lock switch 103SG051 and the setting changeover switch 103SG052 is provided on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is extremely difficult to operate the gaming machine frame 103SG003 when the gaming machine frame 103SG003 is closed. It can be operated by opening the gaming machine frame 103SG003. Further, since the lock switch 103SG051 requires the operation of the setting key owned by the clerk of the amusement park or the like, only the clerk who possesses the setting key can operate the lock switch 103SG051. Further, the lock switch 103SG051 is also a switch capable of executing an ON / OFF switching operation described later by a setting key. Although the feature unit 103SG of this embodiment illustrates a mode in which the door key and the setting key are separate keys, one key may be used in combination.

Further, in the board case 103SG201, a display monitor 103SG029 capable of displaying a set value and a base value described later is arranged. The display monitor 103SG029 is connected to the main board 11 and is arranged on the upper part of the board case 103SG201. That is, the display monitor 103SG029 is arranged in front of the main board 11 in the board case 103SG201 when the main board 11 is visually recognized. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the gaming machine frame 103SG003 is not opened, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized is the back surface side of the gaming board 2 when the gaming machine frame 103SG003 is opened. This is the front when visually recognizing, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-1 and 9-2, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a predetermined position (for example, a lower left position of the gaming area) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 103SG of this embodiment. 1 First special symbol display device 103SG004A capable of executing variable display of 1 special symbol, 2nd special symbol display device 103SG004B capable of executing variable display of 2nd special symbol, 1st reserved display capable of displaying 1st reserved storage number Device 103SG025A, 2nd hold display 103SG025B capable of displaying the second hold storage number, normal symbol display 103SG020 capable of executing variable display of normal symbol, normal figure hold display 103SG025C capable of displaying the normal symbol hold storage number, In the game state where the round display 103SG131 that can display the number of rounds (big hit type) of the big hit game during the big hit game, and the game ball such as the high base state (time saving state) or the big hit game state is launched toward the right game area 103SG002R. A game information display unit 103SG200 is provided in which a right-handed lamp 103SG132 that lights up, a probability variation lamp 103SG133 that lights up in the probability variation state, and a time reduction lamp 103SG134 that lights up in the high base state (time reduction state) are collectively arranged.

The first special symbol display device 103SG004A and the second special symbol display device 103SG004B are each composed of 8-segment LEDs. Further, in the first special symbol display device 103SG004A and the second special symbol display device 103SG004B, when the variable display result of the special symbol is out of place or a small hit, the variable display result can be derived and displayed by a common combination. ing.

In the case where the variable display result is a big hit in the variable display of the first special symbol, the first special symbol display device 103SG004A has a variable display result with two types of big hit symbols (combination of lit LEDs) for each big hit type. Derived display is possible. Further, in the case where the variable display result is a big hit in the variable display of the second special symbol, the second special symbol display device 103SG004B is variably displayed by two kinds of big hit symbols (combination of lit LEDs) for each big hit type. The result and derivation can be displayed.

In the feature unit 103SG of this embodiment, the jackpot symbols that can be derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 103SG004A and the second special symbol display device 103SG004B are all different, but the first special symbol display device 103SG004A At least a part of the jackpot symbol that can be derived and displayed in the above and the jackpot symbol that can be derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 103SG004B may overlap.

In the first hold indicator 103SG025A and the second hold indicator 103SG025B, LEDs of four segments are arranged in parallel in the left-right direction. In these first hold display 103SG025A and second hold display 103SG025B, if the number of hold storage is one, only the LED at the left end is lit, and each time the number of hold storage increases, it is the second from the left. The third LED from the left and the fourth LED from the left light up in sequence. Then, each time the variable display is executed, the LED on the hold display corresponding to the variable display is set in a predetermined shift direction (characteristic of this embodiment) in response to the decrease (consumption) of the hold memory. In the unit 103SG, the lights are turned off toward the left).

In the feature unit 103SG of this embodiment, when both the first special figure holding memory and the second special figure holding storage exist, the variable display based on the second special figure holding storage is preferentially executed. It has become like. Therefore, for example, when one first special figure hold memory exists and two second special figure hold memories exist (only the LED at the left end of the first hold indicator 103SG025A is lit and the second hold is held. (When the two LEDs on the left of the display 103SG25B are lit), the first special figure hold is held after the second special figure hold memory becomes 0 by executing the variable display based on the second special figure hold memory. Variable display based on memory is executed.

Further, the round display 103SG131 is composed of five segments (LEDs). As the jackpot types in the feature unit 103SG of this embodiment, a total of three jackpot types are provided: a jackpot A which is a 5-round jackpot, a jackpot B which is a 10-round jackpot, and a jackpot C which is a 15-round jackpot. Therefore, which segment of the segments constituting the round display 103SG131 is lit differs depending on the jackpot type.

The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control an image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used to control audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. And LED control commands used to control the lighting operation of decorative LEDs and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 in the feature unit 103SG of this embodiment includes a first movable body 103SG321 and a second movable body 103SG322 that can operate between the origin position and the effect position during variable display and the like. The origin detection sensor 103SG331 capable of detecting that the 1 movable body 103SG321 is located at the origin position of the first movable body 103SG321 and the second movable body 103SG322 are located at the origin position of the second movable body 103SG322. The origin detection sensor 103SG332 capable of detecting this is connected to the origin detection sensor 103SG332.

FIG. 9-4 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the feature unit 103SG in this embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 9-4 (A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 9-4 (A), the command 8001H is a first variable display start command for designating the start of variable display in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 103SG004A. .. The command 8002H is a second variable display start command for designating the start of the variable display in the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 103SG004B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is a fluctuation pattern specification command that specifies a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) such as a symbol. Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the content of instruction by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be specified.

The command 8CXXXH is a variable display result notification command, and is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (B), the determination result (predetermined result) of whether the variable display result is "missing", "big hit", or "small hit". ) Or, different EXT data are set according to the determination result (big hit type determination result) of which of a plurality of types the jackpot type is set when the variable display result is "big hit".

In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 9-4 (B), the command 8C00H is the first variable display result designation command indicating a predetermined result indicating that the variable display result is “missing”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit A" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit B" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit C" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying a preliminary determination result that the variable display result is a "small hit".

The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating the change stop (confirmation) of the decorative symbol in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a game state designation command for designating the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to, for example, the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state specification command corresponding to the game state (low base state, normal state) in which the time reduction control is not performed, and the command 9501H is the game state (high base state) in which the time reduction control is performed. , Time saving state) is used as the second game state specification command.

The command 96XXH is an error (abnormal) designation command that specifies the occurrence of an error (abnormality) and the type of the error (abnormality) that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the error (abnormality) designation command, for example, by setting the EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormality), it is specified which error (abnormality) has been determined on the effect control board 12 side. The occurrence of the specified error (abnormality) can be notified by the error notification process described later.

The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state. The command A1XXH is a notification command during the opening of the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening is in the open state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state.

In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determination result and the jackpot type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command. .. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command or the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result notification command. .. In the notification command while the big winning opening is open and the notification command after opening the big winning opening, different EXT data is set according to the number of rounds executed (for example, "1" to "15") in the big hit game state or the small hit game state. Will be done.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) is generated. This is a first start opening winning designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 103SG004A has been satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) is generated. , The second start opening winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 103SG004B has been satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first hold storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure hold storage number in order to display the special figure hold storage number identifiable on the image display device 5 or the like. The command C2XXH is a second hold storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure hold storage number in order to display the special figure hold storage number identifiable on the image display device 5 or the like. The first hold memory number notification command is, for example, when the first start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The second hold memory number notification command is, for example, when the second start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Further, the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command are used in the special figure game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the hold storage number decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command, the total hold storage number notification command for notifying the total hold storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total hold storage number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) of the total hold storage number.

The command D0XXH is a setting value designation command for designating the newly set setting value from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120). The command E101H is a hot start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started without clearing the contents of the RAM 102 (recovery of power failure, also referred to as hot start). The command E102H is a cold start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has cleared the contents of the RAM 102 and started (cold start).

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which is a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing game control programs, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. The RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides the area, the CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes the game control program to perform the control operation, and the numerical data indicating the random value are updated independently of the CPU 103. It is configured to include a random number circuit 104 to perform, an I / O (Input / Output port) 105, and a real-time clock (RTC) 106 capable of outputting time information.

As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed by executing the program read from the ROM 101 by the CPU 103. At this time, a fixed data read operation in which the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, a variable data writing operation in which the CPU 103 writes various variable data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores them, and various variable data temporarily stored in the RAM 102 by the CPU 103. The variable data read operation, the CPU 103 receives input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and the CPU 103 goes to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. A transmission operation that outputs various signals is also performed.

FIG. 9-5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the side of the main board 11. As shown in FIG. 9-5, in the feature unit 103SG of this embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the fluctuation pattern. Numerical data indicating each of the random value MR3 for determination, the random value MR4 for determining the display result of the general map, and the random value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 are controlled so as to be countable. In addition, a random number value other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random number values MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

In this embodiment, each random value MR1 to MR5 is used as a value in the range shown in FIG. 9-5, but the present invention is not limited to this, and each random value is not limited to this. The range of MR1 to MR5 may be different depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

FIG. 9-6 shows the variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is "off", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" and "reach", respectively, and is variable. A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance in response to a case where the display result is a "big hit". In addition, one variation pattern is prepared in advance in response to a case where the variable display result is a "small hit". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern"). The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "out of reach" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "out of reach variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the missed fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “off”. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" is called a big hit fluctuation pattern. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "small hit" is called a small hit fluctuation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach effect such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. In this embodiment, only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and like the super reach, the normal reach α, the normal reach β, ... A plurality of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided. Further, as for the super reach fluctuation pattern, three or more super reach fluctuation patterns such as super reach γ may be provided in addition to the super reach α and the super reach β.

As shown in FIG. 9-6, regarding the special figure fluctuation time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed in the feature unit 103SG of this embodiment, the super reach fluctuation patterns Super Reach α and Super Reach β Is set shorter than. Further, regarding the special figure variation time of the super reach fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect such as super reach α and super reach β is executed in this embodiment, the variation pattern in which the super reach effect of super reach β is executed is In this case, the special figure fluctuation time is set longer than the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect of the super reach α is executed.

In this embodiment, as described above, the variable display result is set to be "big hit" in the order of super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach. Therefore, the normal reach fluctuation pattern and the normal reach fluctuation pattern and the big hit expectation are set to be high. In the super reach fluctuation pattern, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

In addition, in the feature unit 103SG of this embodiment, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns are classified into, for example, a non-reach type, a normal reach type, a super reach type, and the like. Rather than determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation patterns belonging to the variation pattern belonging to the determined type after determining first, only the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is determined without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern type is provided to determine these fluctuations. The type of the variation pattern may be determined first from the random value for determining the pattern type, and then the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the variation pattern belonging to the determined type.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-6, the feature unit 103SG of this embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the fluctuation content (effect content) is predetermined for each fluctuation pattern, and the present invention illustrates this. The variation content (effect content) may be different depending on the set value, even if the variation pattern is the same. For example, in the case of the fluctuation pattern PA2-1 that is out of normal reach, if the set value is 1, the fluctuation pattern is out of normal reach, and if the set value is 2, a pseudo-continuous effect is performed. As a fluctuation pattern that is executed twice and becomes non-reach out of reach, when the set value is 3, the pseudo-continuous effect may be executed three times to make a fluctuation pattern that is out of super reach.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes the program read from the ROM 101, and by using the RAM 102 as the work area, various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are executed. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of the various random numbers used on the side of the main board 11 by executing the random number generation program.

The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data and the like used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data that constitutes a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. 9-7 to 9-11, which are prepared by the CPU 103 for performing various determinations and determinations. Further, the ROM 101 contains table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and a variation mode of each symbol in a variable display such as a special symbol or a normal symbol. A fluctuation pattern table or the like that stores a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is stored.

The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 9-7 (A), the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 9-7 (B), and FIG. In addition to the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in -8 (A) and the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 9-8 (B), the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table and the small hit A fluctuation pattern determination table, an outlier variation pattern determination table, a general map display result determination table (not shown), a general map variation pattern determination table (not shown), and the like are included.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature unit 103SG of this embodiment is configured such that the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing described later, the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) is changed by using the display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the set value. .. The set value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest payout rate, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the lower the advantage is. In other words, as for the set value, 6 which is the largest value is the most disadvantageous value for the amusement park side, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is the more advantageous value for the amusement park side. Become.

9-7 (A) and 9-7 (B) are explanatory views showing a display result determination table. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set for each set value. In the feature unit 103SG of this embodiment, as the display result determination table, individual display result determination tables are used for the first special figure and the second special figure, but the present invention is not limited to this. , The display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure may be used.

As shown in FIG. 9-7 (A), when the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 9-7 (B), when the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33421 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 9-7 (A), when the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1253 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33094 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020-1383 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 9-7 (B), when the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1253 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33421 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020-1383 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 9-7 (A), when the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020-1272 is assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33094 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1429 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 9-7 (B), when the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020-1272 is assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33421 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1429 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 9-7 (A), when the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1292 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33094 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1487 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 9-7 (B), when the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1292 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33421 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1487 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 9-7 (A), when the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020-1317 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1556 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 9-7 (B), when the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020-1317 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33421 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1556 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 9-7 (A), when the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hits", and 32767 to 33094 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1674 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As shown in FIG. 9-7 (B), when the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", and 32767 to 33421 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". When the game state is a probabilistic state, of the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1674 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and others. The numerical range of is assigned to "outside".

As described above, in each display result judgment table, when the game state is the probability change state (high probability state), more judgment values are set than when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). It is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit". As a result, in the probability change state (high probability state) in which the probability change control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is controlled as a "big hit" in the big hit game state in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). Probability to be determined (in the feature unit 103SG of this embodiment, 1/300 when the set value is 1, 1/280 when the set value is 2, 1/260 when the set value is 3, and set. Compared to 1/240 when the value is 4, 1/220 when the set value is 5, and 1/200 when the set value is 6, the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and controlled to the big hit gaming state. Then, the probability of being determined becomes high (in the feature unit 103SG of this embodiment, 1/200 when the set value is 1, 1/180 when the set value is 2, and 1 / when the set value is 3). 160, 1/140 when the set value is 4, 1/120 when the set value is 5, 1/100 when the set value is 6). That is, in each display result determination table, the probability that when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the probabilistic state (high probability state), it is determined to be controlled to the jackpot gaming state as compared with the normal state or the time saving state. Is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state so that the determination value becomes high.

In the feature unit 103SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-7, the multiplying factor of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time saving state is different (for example, setting). If the value is 1, the multiplication factor of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state is 1.5 times, and if the setting value is 2, the jackpot probability in the probability variation state to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state is The magnification is about 1.56 times, and if the set value is 3, the magnification of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state is 1.625 times). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the multiplication factor of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time saving state at each set value is set to be constant (for example, 5 times). May be good.

Further, in each of the first special figure display result determination tables, the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state is the same regardless of the game state or the set value. Judgment values are assigned as follows. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (A), in the display result determination table for the first special figure, the special figure display result is set as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or the set value. The probability of being determined to control the gaming state is set to 1/200.

On the other hand, in each display result determination table for the second special figure, the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state is the first special regardless of the game state or the set value. Judgment values are assigned so that the values are the same as those in the display result judgment table for figures. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-7 (B), in the display result determination table for the second special figure, the special figure display result is set as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or the set value. The probability of being determined to control the game state is set to 1/100.

It should be noted that the feature unit 103SG of this embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the probability of being determined to control the small hit game state with the special figure display result as "small hit" is the same regardless of the set value. The present invention is not limited to this, and the probability of being determined to control the small hit game state with the special figure display result as a "small hit" may be different depending on the set value. Further, the feature unit 103SG of this embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" and the small hit gaming state is different according to the variable special map. The invention is not limited to this, and the probability of being determined to control the small hit gaming state with the special figure display result as a "small hit" may be the same probability regardless of the variable special figure.

Here, focusing on the numerical range of the hit judgment values assigned to the "big hit" and "small hit" in each display result judgment table, the display result for the first special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. In the determination table, the range from 102 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of ~ set value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is a range of 1238 to 1253 for the set value 2, a range of 1238 to 1272 for the set value 3, a range of 1238 to 1292 for the set value 4, and a range of 1238 to 1317 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the feature unit 103SG of this embodiment, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the value is in the range of 0 to 65535 when the set value is 1. Of the hit judgment values that can be taken, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical value among the big hit judgment values is common. Numerical values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the numerical range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1238 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). I will go.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is to determine the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value of. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, the hit judgment values from 102 to 1346 are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, while they are small. The hit judgment value is 32767 to 33094 with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit judgment value in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1346) in the case of the set value 6. Since it is set in the range, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the big hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

Next, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the probability change state, the range from 102 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of ~ set value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the set value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the set value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for the set value 4, and the range of 1347 to 1556 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the feature unit 103SG of this embodiment, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the probabilistic state, the value can be taken in the range of 0 to 65535 when the set value is 1. Of the hit judgment values, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical range of the big hit judgment values is set. Numerical values within the range including the non-common numerical range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1347 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). I will go.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit determination value is the same as the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of these, the range from 32767 to 33094 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, 1020 to 1674 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, while they are small. The hit judgment value is in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1674) in the case of the set value 6, and 32767 is set as the reference value of the small hit judgment value (small hit reference value) of 32767 to 33094. Since it is set in the range, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the big hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result judgment table for the second special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit judgment values is the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of ~ set value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is a range of 1238 to 1253 for the set value 2, a range of 1238 to 1272 for the set value 3, a range of 1238 to 1292 for the set value 4, and a range of 1238 to 1317 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the feature unit 103SG of this embodiment, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the value is in the range of 0 to 65535 when the set value is 1. Of the hit judgment values that can be taken, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical value among the big hit judgment values is common. Numerical values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the numerical range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1238 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). I will go.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is to determine the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value of. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, the hit judgment values from 102 to 1346 are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, while they are small. The hit judgment value is 32767 to 33421 with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit judgment value in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1346) in the case of the set value 6. Since it is set in the range, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the big hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

Next, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the probability change state, the range from 102 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of ~ set value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the set value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the set value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for the set value 4, and the range of 1347 to 1556 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the feature unit 103SG of this embodiment, in the display result determination table for FIG. 2 when the gaming state is the probabilistic state, when the set value is 1, the value can be taken in the range of 0 to 65535. Of the judgment values, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the big hit judgment values are not included in the common numerical range. Numerical values within the range including the common numerical range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1347 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). I will go.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit determination value is the same as the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of these, the range from 32767 to 33421 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, 1020 to 1674 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, while they are small. The hit judgment value is 32767 to 33421 with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit judgment value in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1674) in the case of the set value 6. Since it is set in the range, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the big hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

As described above, in the feature unit 103SG of this embodiment, in each display result determination table, regardless of the game state and the set value, the common numerical range or the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set based on the hit determination value 1020. The judgment value included in the continuous numerical range of 1 is set as the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and the continuous numerical range of 1 is based on the hit judgment value of 32767 regardless of the game state and the set value (common). The variable display result is judged by using the judgment value included in the numerical range) as the numerical range of the small hit judgment value.

Further, in each of these display result judgment tables, when the fluctuation special figures are the same, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is the same regardless of the game state (the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is Same). Further, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value differs depending on whether the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure (small in the display result judgment table for the first special figure). While the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the hit judgment value is 328, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value in the display result judgment table for the second special figure is about 655. On the other hand, the numerical range of the small hit determination value itself is set to 32767 as a reference value (small hit reference value).

Further, as described above, in each gaming state, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, there is a probability that it is determined that the special figure display result is controlled to the jackpot gaming state as the "big hit". Judgment values are assigned so that the lower the value of the set value and the larger the value of the set value, the higher the probability that the special figure display result will be determined to be controlled to the jackpot gaming state as "big hit" (big hit probability: set value 6> set value). 5> Set value 4> Set value 3> Set value 2> Set value 1).

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and when the value of MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the jackpot, the CPU 103 hits the jackpot (big hit) with respect to the special symbol. It is decided to be A to jackpot C). Further, when MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hit, it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit. That is, the winning of the big hit and the small hit is decided with the probability according to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIG. 9-7 indicates the probability of a big hit (ratio) and the probability of a small hit (ratio). Further, determining whether or not to make a jackpot means determining whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display device 103SG004A or the second special symbol display device 103SG004B is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a big hit design. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control the small hit gaming state, but the stop in the first special symbol display device 103SG004A or the second special symbol display device 103SG004B. It also means deciding whether or not to make the symbol a small hit symbol.

In this embodiment, a total of 6 setting values, 1 to 6, are provided as setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine is not limited to this. The set value that can be set to 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more.

9-8 (A) and 9-8 (B) are explanatory views showing a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) and a jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101. Is. Of these, FIG. 9-8 (A) determines the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). It is a table when you do. Further, FIG. 9-8 (B) determines the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the second start winning opening (that is, when the second special symbol is variably displayed). It is a table of cases.

In the jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, the jackpot type is selected from jackpot A to jackpot C based on the random number (MR2) for determining the jackpot type. The table referenced to determine.

Here, the jackpot type in the feature unit 103SG of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-9. In the feature unit 103SG of this embodiment, as the jackpot type, the jackpot A (also referred to as non-probability variable jackpot) in which only the time saving control is executed after the end of the jackpot game state and the state shifts to the low probability high base state, and the jackpot game After the end, the high-accuracy control and the time-saving control are executed, and the jackpot B and the jackpot C (also referred to as the probabilistic jackpot) that shift to the high-accuracy high-base state are set.

The jackpot game state by "big hit A" is a normally open jackpot that is repeatedly executed five times (so-called 5 rounds) in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state that is advantageous to the player. The jackpot game state by "B" is a normal open jackpot in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state which is advantageous for the player. Further, the big hit game state by the "big hit C" is a normal open big hit in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed 15 times (so-called 15 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state which is advantageous for the player.

The time saving control executed after the end of the big hit game state by the "big hit A" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the feature unit 103SG of this embodiment), or the special figure game of the predetermined number of times is executed. Figure Ends when the game is in a jackpot game state before the game is executed.

On the other hand, the high-accuracy control and the time saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the jackpot B or the jackpot C are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Therefore, when the big hit that occurs again is the big hit B or the big hit C, the high accuracy control and the time saving control are executed again after the end of the big hit game state, so that the big hit game state is continuous without going through the normal state. It becomes a so-called consecutive villa state that occurs in.

In addition, in the feature part 103SG of this embodiment, the embodiment in which three types of jackpot A to jackpot C are provided as jackpot types is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is 2. There may be less than one type, or four or more types.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-8 (A), in the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol), when the set value is "1", the MR2 determination value ranges from 0 to 299. , 0 to 99 are assigned to jackpot A, 100 to 249 are assigned to jackpot B, and 250 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "2", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 229 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 200-299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "3", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 209 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 150-299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "4", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 189 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 190-299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "5", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 169 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 170-299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "6", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 149 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 150-299 are assigned to jackpot C.

In this way, when a big hit occurs in the special figure game of the first special symbol, the ratio of determining the big hit A in which only the time saving control is executed after the big hit game ends is the same, while the time saving control after the big hit game ends. Of the jackpot B and jackpot C for which both the probability variation control and the probability variation control are executed, the ratio of determining the jackpot C decreases in the order of the set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. That is, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, the ball output rate is highest when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, and the set values are 5, 4, 3, 2, and so on. The smaller the number in the order of 1, the lower the ball output rate.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9-8 (B), in the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol), when the set value is "1", the range of the determination value of MR2 is 0 to 299. Of these, 0 to 99 are assigned to jackpot A, 100 to 199 are assigned to jackpot B, and 200 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "2", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 179 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 180-299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "3", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 159 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 160-299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "4", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 139 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 140 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "5", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 119 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 120-299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is "6", out of the range 0 to 299 of the judgment value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. (A judgment value is not assigned to the jackpot B).

In this way, when a big hit occurs in the special figure game of the second special symbol, the ratio of determining the big hit A in which only the time saving control is executed after the big hit game ends is the same, while the time saving control after the big hit game ends. Of the jackpot B and jackpot C for which both the probability variation control and the probability variation control are executed, the ratio of determining the jackpot C decreases in the order of the set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. That is, when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, the ball output rate is highest when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, and the set values are 5, 4, 3, 2, and so on. The smaller the number in the order of 1, the lower the ball output rate.

In the feature unit 103SG of this embodiment, when the variable special figure is the second special figure and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the big hit type is determined to be big hit B. In other words, if the determination rate of the jackpot type differs depending on the set value, it means that one of the jackpot types is not determined (the determination rate is 0%). Although it is included, there may be a case where the jackpot type is determined to be jackpot B even when the variable special chart is the second special chart and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6. ..

As described above, in the feature unit 103SG of this embodiment, the determination ratio of the jackpot type when the variable display result is a jackpot differs according to the set value, so that the game entertainment can be improved. It has become.

In the feature unit 103SG of this embodiment, the jackpot type is determined by using MR2 which is a random value for determining the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is not limited to this. It may be determined using MR1 which is a random value for determining the special figure display result.

Further, in the feature unit 103SG of this embodiment, the larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player (the jackpot probability increases and the jackpot C as the jackpot type is easily determined). The present invention is not limited to this, and the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be.

Further, the feature unit 103SG of this embodiment illustrates a mode in which the jackpot probability changes according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the game playability itself does not change. The game playability is not limited to this, and the game playability may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variation state is 65%, which is the game property (so-called probability variation loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the gaming ball is set in the special variable winning ball device 7 during the jackpot game. While controlling the game state after the end of the big hit game to a probabilistic state based on passing through, the game property (so-called V) in which the ratio of the game ball passing through the predetermined switch during the big hit game is different according to the fluctuation special figure. Probability variation type), and when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50, and the game is played during high base (during time reduction control). It may be a game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) in which the ball is controlled to a big hit gaming state based on passing through a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7. Further, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 3, the game playability is the same, but the jackpot probability and the jackpot probability are higher than when these set values are any of 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the big hit game is small while the small hit probability is high (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6). ..

Further, when the game playability is changed according to the set value in this way, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, in the above example, when the set value is 1 to 3, the predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is switched to the effect switch (every time the game ball passes through the predetermined area). It is used as a switch for executing a predetermined effect, and when the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is used as a game switch (a game state is changed based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch). It may be used as a switch for controlling the jackpot game state).

Further, the ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining the variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the variation pattern can be selected from the plurality of types described above according to the predetermined determination result. Determine to one of the fluctuation patterns of.

Specifically, as the fluctuation pattern judgment table, the fluctuation pattern judgment table for big hits used when it is predetermined to set the variable display result to "big hit" and the variable display result to be "small hit". A fluctuation pattern judgment table for big hits used when it is pre-determined, and a fluctuation pattern judgment table for misses used when it is pre-determined to make the variable display result "off" are prepared in advance. ing.

In the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, the fluctuation patterns of the normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3) are used. On the other hand, a predetermined random number value is assigned as the determination value in the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take.

As shown in FIGS. 9-10 (A) and 9-10 (B), the jackpot variation pattern determination table is a jackpot variation pattern determination table (big hit A) used when the jackpot type is jackpot A. (For big hit) and the big hit fluctuation pattern judgment table (for big hit B and big hit C) used when the big hit type is for big hit B and big hit C are prepared in advance, and these big hit fluctuation pattern judgment tables (for big hit C) are prepared in advance. The fluctuation pattern judgment table for (for A) and jackpot (for jackpot B and jackpot C) shows the fluctuation pattern of normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), the fluctuation pattern of super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and the fluctuation pattern of super reach β jackpot. For each fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3), a predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take is assigned as a determination value.

As shown in FIG. 9-10 (A), in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table (for jackpot A), when the set value is "1", 1 of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3. ~ 400 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1), 401 to 850 are assigned to the super reach α jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-2), and 851 to 997 are assigned to the super reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-2). It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "2", out of the range of MR3 judgment values 1 to 997, 1 to 380 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1), and 381 to 835. Is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 836 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "3", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 360 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and up to 361 to 820. Is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 821 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "4", out of the range of MR3 judgment values 1 to 997, 1 to 340 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1), and up to 341 to 805. Is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 806 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "5", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 320 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and up to 321 to 790. Is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 791 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "6", 1 to 300 of the MR3 judgment value ranges 1 to 997 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1), and the range is 301 to 775. Is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 776 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3).

As shown in FIG. 9-10 (B), in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table (for jackpot B and jackpot C), when the set value is "1", the range of the determination values of MR3 is 1 to 997. , 1 to 200 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), and 2001 to 550 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 551 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2). It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β jackpot. When the set value is "2", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 180 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 181 to 510 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 511 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "3", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 160 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1), and 161 to 470 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 471 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "4", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 140 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, and 141 to 430 are assigned. It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 431 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "5", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 120 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1), and 121 to 290 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1). It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 391 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is "6", 1 to 100 of the MR3 determination value ranges 1 to 997 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1), and 101 to 350 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-1). It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and 351 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3).

In this way, when the jackpot A is won in the special figure game, the ratio of determining the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2) determines the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). It is higher than the set value, and is lower in the order of the set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. Further, when the jackpot B or the jackpot C is won in the special figure game, the ratio of determining the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3) determines the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2). It is higher than the ratio and lowers in the order of the set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1.

That is, in this embodiment, when these determination values are that the type of jackpot is "big hit B" or "big hit C", the super reach β is easily determined, and the type of jackpot is "big hit A". In this case, the player is assigned so that the super reach α can be easily determined, so that when the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β is executed, the player may be “big hit B” or “big hit C”. Can raise the expectation of.

Further, in the small hit variation pattern determination table, a predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is the determination value for the variation pattern of the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1). Is assigned as. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-10 (C), in the small hit variation pattern determination table, the range of the determination value of MR3 is 0 to 997 regardless of the set value of 1 to 6. Of these, 0 to 997 are assigned to the small hit fluctuation pattern (PC1-1). Although only PC1-1 is provided as the variation pattern of the small hit in the present invention, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more variation patterns are provided as the variation pattern of the small hit. The fluctuation pattern of the small hit may be determined from a plurality of fluctuation patterns at different ratios with the set values 1 to 6.

Further, the deviation pattern determination table includes the deviation pattern determination table A used when the number of reserved storages is 1 or less in the low base state in which the game state is not subjected to the time reduction control, and the low base. The deviation pattern determination table B used when the total number of reserved storages is 2 to 4 in the state, and the deviation variation used when the total number of reserved storages is 5 to 8 in the low base state. A pattern determination table C and a variation pattern determination table D for deviation used when the game state is a high base state in which time reduction control is performed are prepared in advance.

In the deviation pattern determination table A, the non-reach deviation variation pattern without shortening (PA1-1), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), the super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), and the super A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take with respect to the variation pattern (PA2-3) out of reach β.

As shown in FIG. 9-11 (A), in the deviation pattern determination table A (for low-base medium total hold storage number of 1 or less), when the set value is "1", the determination value of MR3 is determined. Of the ranges 1 to 997, 1 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and 451 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1). 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) out of super reach α, and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) out of super reach β. When the set value is "2", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 430 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and up to 431 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). Further, when the set value is "3", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 410 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and up to 411 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "4", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 390 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and up to 391 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "5", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 370 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and the range is 371 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "6", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 350 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), and up to 351 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3).

Further, in the deviation pattern determination table B, the shortened non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-2), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super A predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can be assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-2) out of reach α and the variation pattern (PA2-3) out of reach β is assigned as the determination value. Has been done.

As shown in FIG. 9-11 (B), in the deviation pattern determination table B (for 2 to 4 total pending storage numbers in low base), when the set value is "1", the determination value of MR3. Of the range 1 to 997, 1 to 500 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and 501 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1). , 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) out of super reach α, and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) out of super reach β. When the set value is "2", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 480 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and the range is 481 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "3", out of the range 0 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 460 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and up to 461 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "4", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 440 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and up to 441 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "5", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 420 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and up to 421 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "6", out of the range of MR3 judgment values 1 to 997, 1 to 400 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), and up to 401 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3).

Further, in the deviation pattern determination table C, the shortened non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-3), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super A predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can be assigned to the variation pattern (PA2-2) out of reach α and the variation pattern (PA2-3) out of reach β is assigned as the determination value. Has been done.

As shown in FIG. 9-11 (C), in the deviation pattern determination table C (for low-base medium total hold storage number of 5 or more), when the set value is "1", the determination value of MR3 is determined. Of the ranges 1 to 997, 1 to 550 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern (PA1-3), and 551 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach out-of-reach variation pattern (PA2-1). 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) out of super reach α, and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) out of super reach β. When the set value is "2", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 530 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and up to 531 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). Further, when the set value is "3", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 510 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and up to 511 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). Further, when the set value is "4", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 490 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and up to 491 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "5", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 470 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and up to 471 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "6", out of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997, 1 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-3), and up to 451 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3).

Further, in the deviation pattern determination table D, the shortening non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-4), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super reach α deviation variation pattern corresponding to the time reduction control are performed. (PA2-2), a predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take is assigned as the determination value to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) out of the super reach β.

As shown in FIG. 9-11 (D), in the deviation pattern determination table D (for high base and medium), when the set value is "1", the range of the determination values of MR3 is 1 to 997. 1 to 550 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), 551 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach. α is assigned to the deviation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of super reach β deviation (PA2-3). When the set value is "2", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 530 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), and up to 531 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "3", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 510 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), and up to 511 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "4", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 490 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), and up to 491 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). Further, when the set value is "5", out of the range 1 to 997 of the judgment value of MR3, 1 to 470 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), and up to 471 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3). When the set value is "6", out of the range of MR3 judgment values 1 to 997, 1 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-4), and up to 451 to 700. Is assigned to the normal reach out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to the super reach α out-of-range fluctuation pattern (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β out-of-range fluctuation pattern. It is assigned to (PA2-3).

As described above, when the deviation pattern determination tables A to D are used, the ratio of determining the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the normal reach fluctuation pattern is higher than the ratio of determining the super reach fluctuation pattern, and the ratio of determining the normal reach fluctuation pattern is determined. Is set to decrease in the order of the set values 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. When the deviation pattern determination tables A to D are used, 701 to 900 of the determination values are the fluctuation patterns of the super reach α deviation, and 901 to 997 are the deviation patterns of the super reach β, regardless of the fluctuation pattern determination table. When each variation pattern is assigned, that is, when the variable display result is out of alignment, the super reach variation pattern is determined at a common determination ratio regardless of the set setting value, so that the super reach variation pattern is determined. It is possible to prevent the effect from being lowered due to the fact that the variable display is not executed.

In the feature unit 103SG of this embodiment, the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α deviation and the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the deviation of the super reach β are completely the same between the set values as the deviation pattern. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α outlier and the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the outlier of super reach β are between each set value. May differ by a small margin (for example, about 1%).

In addition, in the feature unit 103SG of this embodiment, when the variable display result is out of alignment, the embodiment in which the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is the same regardless of the set value is illustrated. , The present invention is not limited to this, and when the variable display result is out of alignment, the determination ratio of all the fluctuation patterns of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach is the same regardless of the set value. It may be present, or only the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of either the non-reach or the normal reach may be the same.

Further, in the feature unit 103SG of this embodiment, when the variable display result is out of alignment, the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of the outlier of Super Reach α and the fluctuation pattern of the outlier of Super Reach β are determined regardless of the set value. Although the embodiment in which both of the determination ratios are the same regardless of the set value is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the variable display result is out of order, the super reach α is illustrated. The determination rate of only one of the deviation pattern determination rate and the super reach β deviation variation pattern may be the same regardless of the set value.

Further, in the feature unit 103SG of this embodiment, when the variable display result is out of alignment, the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of the outlier of Super Reach α and the fluctuation pattern of the outlier of Super Reach β are determined regardless of the set value. Although the embodiment in which both of the determination ratios are the same regardless of the set value is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and is set even when the variable display result is a big hit. Regardless of the set value, the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach jackpot may be the same regardless of the set value.

In the feature unit 103SG of this embodiment, when the variable display result is out of alignment, a mode in which the determination ratio of the non-reach or normal reach fluctuation pattern differs depending on the set value is illustrated. , Depending on the set value, there may be one or a plurality of undetermined fluctuation patterns among the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the normal reach fluctuation pattern. In other words, if the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern differs depending on the set value, one of the variation patterns should not be determined (the determination rate is 0%), or the specific variation pattern is 100%. It is also included to decide by the ratio of.

The non-reach non-reach variation pattern (PA1-2) has a shorter variation time than the non-reach non-reach variation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening, and the non-reach variation pattern (PA1-2) is shorter than the non-reach variation pattern (PA1-2). The deviation pattern (PA1-3) has a shorter fluctuation time (see FIG. 9-6). Therefore, when the number of reserved memories increases, the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time is determined, so that the reserved memories are easily digested, and the number of reserved memories reaches the upper limit of 4. By winning a start prize while the player is in the game, it becomes difficult for a useless start prize that is not stored on hold to occur, and when the number of stored memories decreases, the fluctuation time is long and the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation is not shortened. By determining the pattern (PA1-1), the variable display time becomes longer, so that it is possible to prevent the game from being less interesting due to the variable display not being executed.

Further, in the feature unit 103SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-11 (A) to 9-11 (C), variations are made using a variation pattern determination table for deviation, which differs depending on the total number of reserved storages. Although the form of determining the pattern is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of reserved memories in the special symbol to be changed (for example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the first is the first. The variation pattern may be determined using a variation pattern determination table for deviation, which differs depending on the number of reserved memory of the special symbol and the number of reserved memory of the second special symbol when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed.

Further, in each of the deviation pattern determination tables of the feature unit 103SG of this embodiment, even if the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 6, the fluctuation of the super reach deviation The range of random numbers assigned to the patterns (PA2-2 and PA2-3) is the same. However, since the jackpot probability and the loss probability differ depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the rate at which the variable display is actually executed in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach loss (super reach loss). The appearance rate of the fluctuation pattern) differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It should be noted that the feature unit 103SG of this embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the rate at which the variable display is executed in the fluctuation pattern out of the super reach differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. , The present invention is not limited to this, and in consideration of the jackpot probability and the loss probability for each set value, the variable display is out of super reach at the same rate regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It may be executed according to the fluctuation pattern of.

Further, in the feature unit 103SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-10 and 9-11, the variation pattern is determined at a different ratio for each set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Although illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the fluctuation pattern may be determined at the same ratio regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Further, the feature unit 103SG of this embodiment exemplifies a mode in which there is a one-to-one correspondence between whether or not to execute the reach effect and which reach effect is to be executed for each determined fluctuation pattern. The present invention is not limited to this, and whether or not the effect control CPU 120 executes the reach effect based on the special figure variation time of the variation pattern, the variable display result, etc., and which reach effect is executed. You may decide whether to do it by lottery.

The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 9-1 may be a backup RAM in which a part or all of the RAM 102 is backed up by a backup power source created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 are stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied with power). To. In particular, at least the data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as the special figure process flag) and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data according to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for recovering the control state before the occurrence of the power failure or the like based on the data when the data is restored after the power failure or the like occurs. Further, the data corresponding to the control state and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as the data indicating the progress state of the game.

Next, the display of the display monitor 103SG029 in the feature unit 103SG of this embodiment will be described.

As shown in FIG. 9-12 (A), the display monitor 103SG029 includes a first display unit 103SG029A, a second display unit 103SG029B, a third display unit 103SG029C, and a fourth display unit 103SG029D. The first display unit 103SG029A to the fifth display unit 103SG29E are each composed of seven segments composed of seven segments drawing the character "8" and dots arranged on the lower right side of the seven segments. The first display unit 103SG029A to the fifth display unit 103SG29E can be lit and blinked in various colors such as red, blue, green, yellow, and white, respectively. It is also possible to display these colors in different colors or so-called rainbows while changing them in a very short cycle.

It should be noted that the display control of the display monitor 103SG029 in the feature unit 103SG of this embodiment is executed by using the non-test target area in the entire area of the ROM 101 and the RAM 102 at the time of the test of the pachinko gaming machine 1. ..

As shown in FIGS. 9-12 (B) and 9-12 (C), the display monitor 103SG029 has a base value calculated in a normal state (low accuracy and low base state) for each out 6000 balls in all game states. Base L (real-time value during measurement), base 1 which is a base value calculated in the normal state (low probability low base state) for each out 6000 balls in the first out 6000 ball in all game states, and base 1 in all game states. Base 2 which is the base value calculated in the normal state (low probability low base state) for each of the second out 6000 balls, and the normal state (low probability low base state) for each of the third out 6000 balls in the all-game state. It is possible to display the base 3 which is the base value calculated in. The base L, the base 1, the base 2, and the base 3 are displayed on the display monitor 103SG029 as a percentage.

When the base L is actually displayed on the display monitor 103SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display unit 103SG029A and "L." is displayed on the second display unit 103SG029B in order to display the abbreviation "bL." Is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values of "00" to "99") are displayed on the third display unit 103SG029C and the fourth display unit 103SG029D. When the base 1 is displayed on the display monitor 103SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display unit 103SG029A and "1." is displayed on the second display unit 103SG029B in order to display the abbreviation "b1." Is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values of "00" to "99") are displayed on the third display unit 103SG029C and the fourth display unit 103SG029D. When the base 2 is displayed on the display monitor 103SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display unit 103SG029A and "2." is displayed on the second display unit 103SG029B in order to display the abbreviation "b2." Is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values of "00" to "99") are displayed on the third display unit 103SG029C and the fourth display unit 103SG029D. When the base 3 is displayed on the display monitor 103SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display unit 103SG029A and "3." is displayed on the second display unit 103SG029B in order to display the abbreviation "b3." Is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values of "00" to "99") are displayed on the third display unit 103SG029C and the fourth display unit 103SG029D.

In the display monitor 103SG029 of this embodiment, the control of sequentially displaying the base L, the base 1, the base 2, and the base 3 is executed by controlling the main board 11 (CPU 103). For example, the main board 11 executes control to switch the display of the display monitor 103SG029 in the order of base L → base 1 → base 2 → base 3 at 5-second intervals. The display color of each base value on the display monitor 103SG029 is different depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Specifically, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "1", each base value on the display monitor 103SG029 is displayed in white, and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set. When it is "2", each base value on the display monitor 103SG029 is displayed in blue, and when the set value set on the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "3", each base value on the display monitor 103SG029 is displayed in yellow. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "4", each base value on the display monitor 103SG029 is displayed in green, and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "4". If it is "5", each base value on the display monitor 103SG029 is displayed in red, and if the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "6", each base value on the display monitor 103SG029 is displayed in purple. indicate. Therefore, the clerk of the game hall can identify the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 only by checking the display color of the display monitor 103SG029 without the CPU 103 executing the setting value changing process described later. ing.

Next, the game control main processing in the feature unit 103SG of this embodiment will be described. FIG. 9-13 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103. In the game control main process, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (103SGSa001). Subsequently, the necessary initial settings are performed (103SGSa002). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output ports, etc.), settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (107SGSa003) and whether or not the RAM 102 (backup RAM) is normal (107SGSa004). If the backup data is not stored (103SGSa003; N) or the RAM 102 is not normal (103SGSa004; N), the process proceeds to 103SGSa017, and if the backup data is stored and the RAM 102 is normal (103SGSa003; Y, 103SGSa004; Y) further determines whether the set value stored in the RAM 102 is any of 1 to 6, that is, whether the set value of a normal value is stored in the RAM 102 (103SGSa005).

If the set value stored in the RAM 102 is not any of 1 to 6 (103SGSa005; N), the process proceeds to 103SGsa017, and if the set value stored in the RAM 102 is any of 1 to 6 (103SGsa005; N). Y) indicates whether or not the setting value changing flag indicating that the setting value changing process described later was being executed before the power failure (the power failure occurred during the execution of the setting value changing process) is set. (103SGSa006). If the setting value changing flag is set (103SGSa006; Y), the process proceeds to 103SGSa017, and if the setting value changing flag is not set, the RAM clear flag indicating that the RAM clear processing described later has been executed is set. If it is set, the RAM clear flag is cleared (103SGSa007), and it is determined whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated while the clear switch is being operated. (103SGSa008).

When the clear switch is ON (103SGSa008; Y), the RAM clear flag is set to proceed to 103SGSa011 (103SGSa010), and when the clear switch is OFF (103SGSa008; N), 103SGSa010 is not executed and 103SGSa010 is set. move on.

In 103SGsa011, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 103SG051 is ON (103SGSa011). When the lock switch 103SG051 is ON (103SGSa011; Y), it is further determined whether or not the release sensor 103SG090 is ON (103SGSa012). When the release sensor 103SG090 is ON, that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with the lock switch 103SG051 ON and the gaming machine frame 103SG003 open (103SGSa012; Y), the RAM clear flag is set. It is determined whether or not it is (103SGSa013a).

When the RAM clear flag is set (103SGSa013a; Y), the set value change process (103SGsa013b) for changing the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed to proceed to 103SGSa013d, and the RAM clear flag is set. If is not set (103SGSa013a; N), the set value confirmation process (103SGsa013c) for confirming the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed, and the process proceeds to 103SGSa013d.

In the set value change process (103SGSa013b), the CPU 103 first displays the set value currently set on the display monitor 103SG029. Next, every time the setting changeover switch 103SG052 is operated, the setting value is updated and displayed on the display monitor 103SG029. Then, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 103SG029 is updated and stored in the RAM 102 based on the fact that the lock switch 103SG051 is turned off, and the setting value newly updated and stored in the RAM 102 can be specified. The command is output to the effect control CPU 120.

Further, in the set value confirmation process (103SGsa013c), the CPU 103 displays the set value currently set on the display monitor 103SG029. Then, the display of the set value on the display monitor 103SG029 may be terminated based on the fact that the lock switch 103SG051 is turned off.

If the lock switch 103SG051 is OFF (103SGSa011; N) or the release sensor is OFF (103SGSa012; N) in 103SGSa011, the process proceeds to 103SGSa013d without executing the process of 103SGSa013a-103SGSa013c.

In 103SGSa013d, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is set, that is, whether or not to clear the RAM 102 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started this time (whether or not to execute the RAM clear process (103SGSa009)) ( 103SGSa013d). When the RAM clear flag is set (103SGSa013d; Y), the RAM clear process (103SGsa013e) is executed and then the process proceeds to 103SGsa014. When the RAM clear flag is not set (103SGsa013d; N), the RAM clear process (103SGsa013e) is performed. Proceed to 103SGsa014 without executing.

In the RAM clear process (103SGSa013e), the CPU 103 executes a process of setting "00H" to all addresses except the address where the set value is stored and the address where the RAM clear flag is stored (set). .. That is, in the feature unit 103SG of this embodiment, as shown in 103SGSa001 to 103SGSa013e and 103SGSa017-103SGSa021 described later, if there is no abnormality in the RAM 102, the address in which the set value is stored and the RAM clear flag are stored. It is designed to clear the contents of all addresses except the dress you are wearing.

In 103SGSa014, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is set again (103SGSa014). When the RAM clear flag is set (103SGSa014; Y), the process proceeds to 103SGSa022, and when the RAM clear flag is not set (103SGSa014; N), the internal state of the main board 11 is stopped (power cut). Performs recovery processing to return to the state of (103SGSa015).

In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the change of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be. Then, assuming that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has recovered (started by hot start) in the state before the power failure, the CPU 103 transmits a recovery command including a hot start notification command to the effect control board 12, and proceeds to 103SGSa028. (103SGSa016).

Further, in 103SGSa017, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated while the clear switch is being operated (103SGSa017). When the clear switch is ON (103SGSa017; Y), it is further determined whether or not the lock switch 103SG051 is ON (103SGSa018) and whether or not the release sensor 103SG090 is ON (103SGSa019).

When the lock switch 103SG051 is ON (103SGSa018; Y) and the release sensor 103SG090 is ON, that is, there is no backup data in the RAM 102, the RAM 102 is not normal, or a normal setting value is not set. However, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a formal procedure by the operation of an employee of the game hall (the game machine frame 103SG003 is opened and the lock switch 103SG051 is turned on, the pachinko game is operated while operating the clear switch. When the machine 1 is started), the set value stored in the RAM 102 is cleared (103SGSa020), and if the set value changing flag is set, the set value changing flag is cleared (103SGSa021). Then, the process of 103SGSa009-103SGSa016 described above is executed.

If the clear switch is OFF (103SGSa017; N), the lock switch 103SG051 is OFF (103SGSa018; N), and the release sensor 103SG090 is OFF (103SGSa019; N), the process proceeds to 103SGSa031.

Further, in 2078SGSa022, the CPU 103 transmits a recovery command including a cold start notification command to the effect control board 12 on the assumption that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start (103SGSa022). Then, a cold start notification timer is set according to the period for notifying the cold start of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (103SGsa023), and the cold start notification is started by starting blinking of all the segments constituting the display monitor 103SG029. (103SGSa024).

After executing 103SGsa024, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the cold start notification timer by -1 (103SGsa025), and determines whether or not the cold start notification timer has timed out (103SGSa026). When the cold start notification timer is not timer-out (103SGsa026; N), the processes of 103SGsa025 and 103SGsa026 are repeatedly executed, and when the cold start notification timer is timer-out (103SGsa026; Y), all segments on the display monitor 103SG029. Ends blinking (103SGsa027) and proceeds to 103SGsa028.

In the feature unit 103SG of this embodiment, all the segments constituting the display monitor 103SG029 are blinked over the period of the cold start notification timer (for example, 5 seconds) at the time of calling and starting the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and only a part of all the segments constituting the display monitor 103SG029 may be blinked at the time of calling and starting the pachinko gaming machine 1. Alternatively, at least a part of all the segments constituting the display monitor 103SG029 may be turned on.

Then, in 103SGsa028, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process (103SGSa028) that initially sets the random number circuit 104, and causes the game control microcomputer 100 to periodically interrupt the timer at predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). Set the built-in CTC register (103SGSa029) and allow interrupts (103SGSa030). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

Further, in 103SGSa031, the CPU 103 refers to the effect control board 12 based on the fact that an abnormal setting value is stored in the RAM 102 (setting value abnormality error) and that the CPU 103 recovers from the power failure during the setting change described later. And sends an error specification command according to the abnormality of the set value (103SGSa031). Further, an error notification execution waiting timer is set (103SGSa032). Then, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the error notification execution waiting timer by -1 (103SGSa033), and determines whether or not the error notification execution waiting timer has timed out (103SGSa034). When the error notification execution waiting timer is not timered out (103SGSa034; N), the processes of 103SGsa033 and 103SGsa034 are repeatedly executed, and when the error notification execution waiting timer is timered out (103SGSa034; Y), a set value error error occurs. 1st display unit 103SG029A, 2nd display unit 103SG029B, 3rd display unit 103SG029C, 4th display unit 103SG029D "E." is displayed in each of the above (103SGSa035).

Further, the CPU 103 blinks all the LEDs constituting the first special symbol display device 103SG004A and the second special symbol display device 103SG004B (103SGsa036), and plays a game via a terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. A security signal is output to a management device such as a field management computer, and the process proceeds to 103SGSa032 (103SGSa037). After that, the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the processes of 103SGsa032-103SGSa037 until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off (until the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off by the operation of a clerk at the game hall), and the display monitor 103SG029 , The first special symbol display device 103SG004A and the second special symbol display device 103SG004B execute notification of the occurrence of an error.

As described above, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 103SG of this embodiment recovers from an abnormal set value being set or a power failure during the change of the set value, the display monitor 103SG029, the first Since the special symbol display device 103SG004A and the second special symbol display device 103SG004B are used to notify the occurrence of an error, the clerk of the amusement park or the like can generate an error or set a value from both the front side and the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is possible to recognize that the power failure during the change has been restored. In addition, the occurrence of an error in the pachinko game machine 1 and the recovery from the power failure while changing the set value can be recognized by the management device of the game hall, so that the security of the pachinko game machine 1 can be improved. It has become.

In the game control main process of the feature unit 103SG of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-13, when it is determined that the clear switch is ON in 103SGSa008 (103SGSa008; Y) or the set value is being changed in 103SGSa021. Although the embodiment in which the RAM clear process (103SGSa009) is executed after clearing the flag is illustrated, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the present invention is not limited thereto, and the RAM clear process is not limited thereto. Is not when it is determined that the clear switch is ON in 103SGSa008 (103SGSa008; Y) or after clearing the setting value changing flag in 103SGSa021, but when it is determined that the RAM clear flag is set in 103SGSa014 (103SGSa014). It may be executed in Y).

9-14 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (S171) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variable start command reception flag is set (103SGS271). When the first variable start command reception flag is set (103SGS271; Y), it corresponds to the buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure hold storage in the start winning command buffer 103SG194A. The various command data and various flags that are attached and stored are shifted upward by one buffer number (103SGS272). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

Specifically, the shift is made so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-1" of the first special figure hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "1-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-1". 1 Special figure The first special figure is shifted so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-3" of the hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "1-2". The various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-4" of the hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-3".

If the first fluctuation start command reception flag is not set in 103SGS271 (103SGS271; N), it is determined whether or not the second fluctuation start command reception flag is set (103SGS273). If the second fluctuation start command reception flag is not set (103SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second fluctuation start command reception flag is set (103SGS273; Y), the start is started. Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure hold storage in the receiving command buffer (not shown) at the time of winning are stored in one buffer number. It shifts upward by the minute (103SGS274). The contents of the buffer number "2-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

Specifically, the shift is made so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-1" of the second special figure hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "2-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-2" of the second special figure hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-1". 2 Special figure The second special figure is shifted so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-3" of the hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "2-2". The various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" of the hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-3".

After executing 103SGS272 or 103SGS274, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (103SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop symbol) of the decorative symbol is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command) (103SGS276). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the display result specified by the display result specification command, and stores the data indicating the determined stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. To do.

In the feature unit 103SG, when the received variable display result specification command is the second variable display result specification command corresponding to the non-probability change jackpot A, the effect control CPU 120 has, for example, an even number of three symbols as stop symbols. Determine the combination of decorative symbols (big hit symbols) that are aligned with the symbols. Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the third variable display result specification command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot B, a plurality of combinations of odd numbers other than "7" (for example, "111") are used as stop symbols. It is determined from the combination of decorative patterns such as "333", "555", and "999"). In addition, when the received variable display result specification command is the 4th variable display result specification command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot C, a combination of decorative symbols (big hit symbols) in which 3 symbols are aligned with "7" is used as the stop symbol. decide. Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the fifth variable display result specification command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot C, the stop symbols are "334" and "778", which are the same chances as the small hit. Decide from the inside. Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the fifth variable display result specification command corresponding to a small hit, the stop symbol is "334" or "778", which is the same chance as the probability variation big hit C. Decide from the inside. Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the first variable display result specification command corresponding to the deviation, it is a decorative symbol in which the three symbols are not uniform as the stop symbol, and a combination other than the above-mentioned chance eyes. (Out of design) is decided.

In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, a random number for determining the stop symbol, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating a combination of decorative symbols and a numerical value are associated with each other. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be determined. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value corresponding to the extracted random number.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect determination process shown in FIGS. 9-15 to determine whether or not to execute the variable display effect in the variable display (103SGS277).

(Variable display)
As the effect during the variable display, the effect suggests the advantageous state suggestion result that suggests that the game is controlled to the big hit game state, and the setting suggestion result that suggests the setting value that the CPU 103 performs in the set value change process. It is a production (predetermined production) that can be any of the above. In the feature unit 103SG, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a reach notice (notice effect) suggesting that the variable display mode may become a reach and become a big hit as an effect in which the effect result is an advantageous state suggestion result. is there. Further, as an effect in which the effect result is a setting suggestion result, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion that suggests which of the set values 1 to 6 the set value is. Further, the effect control CPU 120 executes a variable display effect when the effect result can be both an advantageous state suggestion result and a setting suggestion result, that is, both reach notice and setting suggestion can be executed. When it is possible, the reach notice in which the effect result is the advantageous state suggestion result can be executed in preference to the setting suggestion in which the effect result is the setting suggestion result.

As shown in FIG. 9-16, the variable display effect has a plurality of types of effect patterns (effect modes) of patterns PT-1 to PT-9, and the effect control CPU 120 is a variable display effect. When the execution is decided, which of the patterns PT-1 to PT-9 is used to execute the variable display effect, that is, which of the patterns PT-1 to PT-9 is used. It is decided by lottery whether to execute the effect during variable display based on.

As shown in FIGS. 9-18 (A) to 9-18, the variable display effect starts at the timing when a predetermined period elapses after the variable display of the symbol is started (the timing before the variable display mode reaches the reach). Then, a plurality of (for example, eight) images Z1 showing the paraglider on which the passenger rides fade in from the left side of the display area of the image display device 5 and move toward the right side of the display area. By fading out to the right side of the display area, the variable display effect ends. In addition, an image Z2 indicating that a predetermined number of gliders are destroyed and dropped while the plurality of images Z1 are moving toward the right side may be displayed, and a set value is set depending on the number of the dropped paragliders. Or reach is suggested.

Specifically, in the case of pattern PT-1, one body is destroyed and falls, in the case of pattern PT-2, two bodies are destroyed and fall, and in the case of pattern PT-3, three bodies are destroyed and fall. In the case of pattern PT-4, 4 bodies are destroyed and fall, in the case of pattern PT-5, 5 bodies are destroyed and fall, and in the case of pattern PT-6, 6 bodies are destroyed and fall. In the case of pattern PT-7, 7 bodies are destroyed and fall, and in the case of pattern PT-8 and pattern PT-9, 8 bodies are destroyed and fall.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-18 (B) and 9-19 (A), in the patterns PT-1 to PT-8, the timing at which the paraglider is destroyed is the same, and each pattern PT-1 to PT-1 to 1 to 8 is destroyed. The number of paragliders corresponding to PT-8 is destroyed all at once (or a predetermined number may be used). On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9-19 (B), the pattern PT-9 is a pattern in which a total of eight paragliders fall like the pattern PT-8, but the mode in which the paragliders are destroyed is the pattern PT-. It is different from 8. Specifically, seven paragliders are destroyed at the same timing as pattern PT-7, but the remaining one is destroyed at the second timing after the first timing when the other seven are destroyed. ..

Which of the patterns PT-1 to PT-9 is used to execute the effect period of such a variable display effect, that is, the reach notice or the effect result in which the effect result is an advantageous state suggestion result is the setting suggestion result. Regardless of which of the setting suggestions, the effect of the common mode (for example, the effect of the aspect in which the image Z1 fades in from the left side of the display area of the image display device 5 and moves toward the right side of the display area). Is executed, and a non-common mode of effect (for example, a number of images Z2 corresponding to the effect pattern is an image display device) that can specify whether the effect result is an advantageous state suggestion result or a setting suggestion result. It is composed of a non-common effect period in which the effect of moving downward in the display area of 5) is executed.

In the background where the images Z1 and Z2 are displayed as the effect during the variable display, the decorative symbols are variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, but the decorative symbols are displayed in a smaller size than usual. The small symbol may be variably displayed at a predetermined place. Further, during the execution period of the variable display effect, another notice effect or the like different from the variable display effect may be executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9-16, among the patterns PT-1 to PT-9, the set value is 1 for the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 in which the number of paragliders destroyed is 1 to 7. Regarding the patterns PT-8 and PT-9, which are set as a specific pattern (specific mode) corresponding to the setting suggestion suggesting which of the 6 to 6 is set, and the number of paragliders destroyed is eight. It is said to be a special pattern (special mode) corresponding to the reach notice suggesting the possibility of reaching. That is, the effect during variable display has the same effect mode in the common effect period, but the suggestion target differs depending on the difference in the effect mode in the non-common effect period (the number of paragliders destroyed), and 1 to 7 paragliders. If it is destroyed, it will be a setting suggestion, and if 8 bodies are destroyed, it will be a reach notice.

Specifically, the patterns PT-1 and PT-3 suggest that the set values may be odd (for example, 1, 3, 5), and the patterns PT-2 and PT-4 have even set values. (For example, 2, 4, 6), the pattern PT-5 suggests that the set value may be equal to or higher than the intermediate setting (for example, 3 or 5), and the pattern PT-5. 6 suggests that the set value may be greater than or equal to the even-numbered intermediate setting (eg, 4 or 6), and pattern PT-7 suggests that the set value may be the highest setting (eg, 6). ..

The patterns PT-1 to PT-4 are determined at a high rate when the set value is any of 1 to 4 (low setting), so that any of the set values 5 and 6 (high setting) can be obtained. It is regarded as the first specific pattern {setting suggestion (low), first specific mode} with low expectation that it is, and for patterns PT-5 to PT-6, the set value is any of 5 and 6. In some cases, it is determined at a high rate, so that it is a second specific pattern {setting suggestion (high), second specific mode} with a high degree of expectation that the set values are 5 and 6.

In the feature unit 103SG, the set values 1 to 4 are set as low settings and the set values 5 and 6 are set as high settings, but the set values 1 to 3 may be set as low settings and the set values 4 to 6 may be set as high settings. Then, the execution ratio of the effect pattern may be set by setting the setting values 1 and 2 to the low setting, the setting values 3 and 4 to the intermediate setting, and the setting values 5 and 6 to the high setting.

On the other hand, the pattern PT-8 suggests that the variable display of the symbol may be more than reach (for example, normal reach or super reach), and the pattern PT-9 suggests that the variable display of the symbol may be super reach. Suggest.

Regarding the pattern PT-8, the variable display mode of the symbol is determined at a high rate when it becomes the normal reach, so that the expectation of becoming the super reach is low. The first special pattern {reach notice (low), the first Regarding the pattern PT-9, the second special pattern {reach, which is highly expected to become super reach, is determined at a high rate when the variable display mode of the symbol becomes super reach. Notice (high), second special mode}.

As described above, the effect control CPU 120 has a special mode (for example, patterns PT-8 and PT-9) that suggests that the jackpot game state is controlled, and a specific mode (for example, pattern PT-) that suggests the setting. It is possible to execute a variable display effect based on any one of a plurality of types of effect modes including 1 to PT-7), and a reach notice based on pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 (predetermined effect of a special mode). When any of the setting suggestion (predetermined effect of a specific embodiment) based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 can be executed, the reach notice can be executed in preference to the setting suggestion.

In the first embodiment, the pattern PT-8 and the pattern PT-9 are determined when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach regardless of whether or not the variable display result is a big hit. Since the fluctuation pattern is determined at a higher rate when the variable display result is out of order than when it is a big hit, the pattern PT-8 becomes a super reach, that is, the jackpot expectation is a pattern. While the pattern is lower than PT-9, the pattern PT-9 is determined because the super reach fluctuation pattern is determined at a higher rate when the variable display result is a big hit than when it is out of order. , Super reach, that is, a pattern in which the jackpot expectation is higher than the pattern PT-8.

Further, in the first embodiment, in the variable display effect, a mode suggesting the possibility of a big hit or which set value is set depending on the number of paragliders destroyed has been illustrated. It is not limited, and the appearance of a predetermined number (for example, 8) or more paragliders without destroying the paragliders may suggest a big hit or a high setting. Further, if it is possible to suggest the possibility of a big hit and which setting value is set, the effect mode can be changed in various ways, for example, the number of characters appearing, the type of character appearing, and the like. It may be something that can suggest a big hit or a set value.

In addition, in the setting suggestion (high) based on any of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 and the reach notice (high) based on pattern PT-9, the last paraglider among the number corresponding to each pattern is destroyed. By outputting a specific sound or emitting a game effect lamp 9 or the like when falling, it may be possible to notify that the pattern has a high expectation of a big hit or a high setting.

As shown in FIG. 9-15, in the effect determination process during variable display, the effect control CPU 120 first identifies the variable display result and the variation pattern (103SGS291). The variable display result is a variable display result specification command for specifying the variable display result (off, non-probability change big hit A, probability change big hit B, probability change big hit C, small hit) transmitted from the main board 11 at the start of variable display. Variable display result specification command for storing the variable display result specification command stored in the storage area. Further, as described above, the fluctuation pattern can be specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command stored in the fluctuation pattern designation command storage area.

Then, the random numbers for determining the reach notice type are extracted, and the effect (reach notice) type determination table A shown in FIG. 9-17 (A) is used to determine whether or not the reach notice is executed in the variable display effect. A lottery is conducted to determine the type of reach notice in the case of (103SGS292).

In the effect (reach notice) type determination table A shown in FIG. 9-17 (A), when the fluctuation pattern is super reach, 20 judgment values are assigned to non-execution, and 20 is assigned to pattern PT-8. A number of determination values are assigned, and 60 determination values are assigned to the pattern PT-9. That is, when the fluctuation pattern is super reach, the PT-9 is won at a higher rate than when the fluctuation pattern is other than super reach.

When the fluctuation pattern is normal reach, 20 judgment values are assigned to non-execution, 60 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-8, and 20 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-9. There is. That is, when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach, the PT-8 is won at a higher rate than when the fluctuation pattern is other than normal reach.

When the fluctuation pattern is a non-reach or small hit fluctuation pattern, 100 determination values are assigned to the non-execution, and the determination values are not assigned to the patterns PT-8 and PT-9. That is, if the fluctuation pattern is a non-reach or small hit fluctuation pattern, the reach notice is not won.

By setting the judgment value in this way, when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach, it is easier to win the pattern PT-8 at a higher rate than when the fluctuation pattern is other than the normal reach fluctuation pattern, and when the fluctuation pattern is super reach, it is easy to win. Pattern PT-9 is easier to win at a higher rate than in cases other than the super reach fluctuation pattern.

Therefore, when an effect based on pattern PT-8 appears, it is more likely to be a normal reach variation pattern than a super reach variation pattern, and when an effect based on pattern PT-9 appears, it is super than a normal reach variation pattern. It is likely to be a reach variation pattern. In other words, pattern PT-8 is determined to be a reach fluctuation pattern, but there is a high possibility that it will be a normal reach, so it is considered as a reach notice (low) with a low jackpot expectation, and pattern PT-9 is a super reach fluctuation pattern. Since there is a high possibility that it will be, it is considered to be a reach notice (high) pattern with a high expectation of big hits.

Returning to FIG. 9-15, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} has been won as a result of whether or not the reach notice has been executed and the type of lottery has been performed in 103SGS292. (103SGS293). When it is determined that the pattern PT-9 has been won, the execution of the reach notice based on the pattern PT-9 is determined in preference to the setting suggestion based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 (103SGS294). Proceed to 103SGS304.

If it is determined in 103SGS292 that the pattern PT-9 has not been won, that is, if the reach notice is not executed or the pattern PT-8 is won, the reach notice is not executed or the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low). } Is won, the set value stored in the RAM 102 is read out, and the current set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is specified (103SGS295). Next, the random numbers for determining the setting suggestion type are extracted, and the effect (setting suggestion) type determination table B corresponding to the set value specified in 103SGS295 is used to determine whether or not the setting suggestion is executed in the variable display effect. A lottery is performed to determine the type of setting suggestion to be executed (103SGS296).

In the effect (setting suggestion) type determination table B shown in FIG. 9-17 (B), when the set value is 1, 30 judgment values are assigned to non-execution, and 25 judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-1. Is assigned, 10 judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-2, 25 judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-3, 5 judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-4, and the pattern is assigned. Four determination values are assigned to the PT-5, one determination value is assigned to the pattern PT-6, and one determination value is not assigned to the pattern PT-7. When the set value is 2, 30 judgment values are assigned to non-execution, 10 judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-1, and 25 judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-2. Five judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-3, 25 judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-4, one judgment value is assigned to the pattern PT-5, and four judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-6. A judgment value is assigned, and one judgment value is not assigned to the pattern PT-7. When the set value is 3, 30 judgment values are assigned to non-execution, 20 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-1, and 5 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-2. 20 judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-3, 5 judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-4, 15 judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-5, and 5 judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-6. A judgment value is assigned, and one judgment value is not assigned to the pattern PT-7. When the set value is 4, 30 judgment values are assigned to non-execution, 5 judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-1, and 20 judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-2. Pattern PT-3 is assigned 5 judgment values, pattern PT-4 is assigned 20 judgment values, pattern PT-5 is assigned 5 judgment values, and pattern PT-6 is assigned 15 judgment values. A judgment value is assigned, and one judgment value is not assigned to the pattern PT-7. When the set value is 5, 30 judgment values are assigned to non-execution, 5 judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-1, and 10 judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-2. Pattern PT-3 is assigned 5 judgment values, pattern PT-4 is assigned 10 judgment values, pattern PT-5 is assigned 25 judgment values, and pattern PT-6 is assigned 15 judgment values. A judgment value is assigned, and one judgment value is not assigned to the pattern PT-7. When the set value is 6, 30 judgment values are assigned to non-execution, 10 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-1, and 5 judgment values are assigned to pattern PT-2. Pattern PT-3 is assigned 10 judgment values, pattern PT-4 is assigned 5 judgment values, pattern PT-5 is assigned 10 judgment values, and pattern PT-6 is assigned 25 judgment values. Judgment values are assigned, and five judgment values are assigned to the pattern PT-7.

By setting the judgment value in this way, when the set value is an odd number 1 or 3, the patterns PT-1 and PT-3 are won at a higher rate than when the set value is other than 1 or 3. When the set value is 2 or 4, it is easy to win, and the patterns PT-2 and PT-4 are easily won at a higher rate than when the set value is other than 2 or 4, and the set value is 5. Is easier to win the pattern PT-5 at a higher rate than when the set value is other than 5, and when the set value is 6, the pattern PT-6 is won at a higher rate than when the set value is other than 6. It's easier to do. Further, since the pattern PT-7 may be won only when the set value is 6, it is confirmed that the set value is 6 when a setting suggestion based on the pattern PT-7 appears.

Therefore, if an effect based on patterns PT-1 to PT-4 in which the number of paragliders destroyed is 4 or less is likely to appear, it is highly possible that the set value is one of 1 to 4, and the paraglider is destroyed. If the effect based on the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 with 5 or more bodies is likely to appear, it is highly possible that the set value is any of 5 and 6. That is, patterns PT-1 to PT-4 are considered to be setting suggestions (low) that are unlikely to be set high (set value 5 or 6), and patterns PT-5 to PT-7 are set high (set value 5 or 6). It is said that the setting suggestion (high) is likely to be 6).

In the first embodiment, the reach advance notice type determination random number and the setting suggestion type determination random number are random numbers in the range of 1 to 100, and any value in the range of 1 to 100 is extracted. That is, the number of judgment values of each determination random number is set to 100 in the range of 1 to 100, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the range of each determination random number and the like should be appropriately determined. Just do it. Further, each determination random number counter for generating each of these determination random numbers is set in the RAM 122, and each determination random number counter is updated for each timer interrupt in the random number update process.

Returning to FIG. 9-15, the effect control CPU 120 performed a lottery for the presence / absence of execution of the setting suggestion and the type in 103SGS296, and as a result, any one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} was obtained. It is determined whether or not the player has won (103SGS297). If it is determined that any of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 has been won, and if the non-execution of the reach notice is won in 103SGS293, one of the winning patterns PT-5 to PT-7 is selected. When the execution of the setting suggestion (high) based on the setting is uniquely determined and the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is won in 103SGS293, any one of the winning patterns PT-5 to PT-7 is won. The execution of the setting suggestion (high) based on the above is determined in preference to the reach notice (low) based on the pattern PT-8 (103SGS298), and the process proceeds to 103SGS304.

In 103SGS297, if any of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} was not won, that is, if the setting suggestion was not executed or any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 was won. , 103SGS297 determines whether or not pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is won in 103SGS293 based on non-execution of setting suggestion or winning of any of patterns PT-1 to PT-4. (103SGS300).

If it is determined that the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} has been won in 103SGS300, and if the non-execution of the setting suggestion is won in 103SGS297, the reach notice (low) based on the pattern PT-8 is executed. If any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} is won in 103SGS297, the reach notice (low) based on the winning pattern PT-8 is Execution is determined in preference to the setting suggestion (low) based on patterns PT-1 to PT-4 (103SGS301), and the process proceeds to 103SGS304.

If it is determined in the 103SGS300 that the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} has not been won, it is determined whether or not any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} has been won. If any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 is won, the execution of the setting suggestion (low) based on the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 is determined, and the process proceeds to 103SGS304. Further, when none of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 is won, that is, when the non-execution of both the reach notice and the setting suggestion is won, the variable display is being performed without deciding the execution of the effect. The production determination process ends.

In 103SGS304, the effect type (any of patterns PT-1 to PT-9) determined in any of 103SGS294, 103SGS298, 103SGS301, and 103SGS303 is stored in a predetermined area of RAM 122 (103SGS304), and the effect during variable display is executed. The variable display effect execution decision flag indicating that has been determined is set (103SGS305), and the variable display effect determination process is terminated.

Returning to FIG. 9-14, after the variable display effect determination process of 103SGS277, the effect control CPU 120 in 103SGS278 determines whether or not the variable display effect execution decision flag is set, that is, the variable display effect determination of 103SGS277. It is determined whether or not the execution of the variable display effect of any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-9 is determined in the process.

If the variable display effect execution decision flag is set, the process proceeds to 103SGS279, and the period until the start of the variable display effect is set in the variable display effect start waiting timer (103SGS279), and the variable display effect execution is executed. Clear the decision flag (103SGS280) and proceed to 103SGS281. On the other hand, if the effect execution decision flag during variable display is not set, the process proceeds to 103SGS281 without going through 103SGS279 and 103SGS280.

As for the period until the start of the variable display effect, in this feature unit 103SG, the timing at which the paraglider appears is set as the start timing of the variable display effect, and the process table of the variable display effect executed from the start of the variable display effect. Since the variable display effect is started based on the above, an example is shown in which the period until the start timing of the variable display effect is set in the variable display effect start waiting timer. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, an effect (not shown) showing a precursor is performed before the timing at which the variable display effect is started, and the timing at which the precursor is started is set as the variable display effect. When the start timing is set, a period shorter than the period until the variable display effect is started may be set in the variable display effect start wait timer.

In 103SGS281, the effect control CPU 120 selects an effect control pattern (process table) according to the variation pattern designation command. Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (103SGS282).

In the process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R are controlled. The sound control execution data, the operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, etc. are sequentially arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (1 to N). There is.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays the effect device (image display as an effect component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as production parts, speakers 8L, 8R as production parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (103SGS283). For example, the image display device 5 outputs a command to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the fluctuation pattern. Further, in order to control the lighting / extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. Further, in order to output the voice from the speakers 8L and 8R, the control signal (sound number data) is output to the voice control board 13.

In the first embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern designation command so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed according to the variation pattern corresponding to one-to-one. However, the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern. The fluctuation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns corresponding to the specified command.

Then, a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variable pattern designation command is set in the variable display time timer (103SGS284). Further, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (103SGS285). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms. Every time the predetermined time elapses, the effect control CPU 120 writes the image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols to the VRAM, and the display control unit 123 writes the image data to the VRAM. The variable display (variation) of the decorative pattern is realized by outputting the signal corresponding to the image data to the image display device 5 and displaying the image according to the signal by the image display device 5. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the effect processing (S172) during variable display (103SGS286).

As described above, in the first embodiment, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display of the symbol based on the reach variation pattern, the predetermined variable display mode is determined after the variable display is started and before the variable display mode becomes the reach mode. At the effect timing, either reach notice or setting suggestion can be executed as the variable display effect, and when deciding whether or not to execute the variable display effect, the effect result becomes an advantageous state suggestion result. It is possible to execute (the effect of the special aspect) with priority over the setting suggestion (the effect of the specific aspect) in which the effect result is the setting suggestion result.

Specifically, as shown in the effect determination process during variable display of FIG. 9-15, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the reach notice is executed and the type of lottery, and whether or not the setting suggestion is executed and the type of lottery. Give priority to.

That is, in the reach notice lottery, when the fluctuation pattern is super reach, the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution of the reach notice (high) based on the pattern PT-9 at a rate of 60% (103SGS294). The notice (high) will be executed at a higher rate (priority) than the setting suggestion. On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach, the execution of the reach notice (high) based on the pattern PT-9 is determined only at a rate of 20%, but the reach notice (low) based on the pattern PT-8 is determined at a rate of 60%. Even if the lottery of setting suggestion is executed in 103SGS296 based on the winning of the reach notice (low), the setting suggestion based on the pattern PT-5 to PT-7 is executed in 103SGS297 (high). ) Is not won, 103SGS301 will decide to execute the reach notice (low) based on the pattern PT-8, so the reach notice will be executed at a higher rate (priority) than the setting suggestion. Become.

Further, the reach notice includes a reach notice (low) and a reach notice (high) suggesting that the rate of being controlled by a jackpot is higher than that of the reach notice (low). When both the reach notice (high) based on −9 and the setting suggestion based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7 are feasible, the reach notice (high) based on pattern PT-9 is set to pattern PT-. It is executed with priority over the setting suggestion based on any of 1 to PT-7 (103SGS294). On the other hand, when both the reach notice (low) based on the pattern PT-8 and the setting suggestion based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 are feasible, the pattern PT-5 to PT-7 is selected. It is possible to execute the setting suggestion (high) based on the setting suggestion (high) in preference to the reach notice (low) based on the pattern PT-8 (103SGS298). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the entertainment of the effect during the variable display from being lowered due to the excessive priority given to the reach notice and the restriction on the execution of the setting suggestion.

Further, the setting suggestion includes a setting suggestion (low) and a setting suggestion (high) suggesting that the setting is more likely to be higher than the setting suggestion (low). When both the setting suggestion (high) based on any of -5 to PT-7 and the reach notice based on any of patterns PT-8 to PT-9 are feasible, the pattern PT-5 to PT-7 is used. The setting suggestion (high) based on is executed in preference to the reach notice (low) based on the pattern PT-8 (103SGS298). On the other hand, when both the setting suggestion (low) based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-4 and the reach notice based on any of patterns PT-8 to PT-9 are feasible, the pattern PT-8 is set. Based reach notice (low) can be executed in preference to setting suggestion (low) based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-4 (103SGS301). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the setting suggestion from being excessively prioritized and the execution of the reach notice being restricted, so that the interest of the effect during the variable display is lowered.

In this way, the effect control CPU 120 executes the reach notice with priority over the setting suggestion. For details, the reach notice (high) is executed with priority over the setting suggestion (high), the setting suggestion (high) is executed with priority over the reach notice (low), and the reach notice (low) is set and suggested (low). Priority is given to execution over low). That is, the priority of execution of each effect pattern is set to have a relationship of "reach notice (high)> setting suggestion (high)> reach notice (low)> setting suggestion (low)".

In the feature unit 103SG, the execution ratio of the reach notice may be set to be higher than the execution ratio of the setting suggestion. That is, the variable display effect is an effect executed during the variable display period of the symbol, and the reach notice suggests that the variable display result may be a big hit, whereas the setting suggestion is at least. It suggests which setting value is not changed during the business period. Further, it is not preferable for the amusement park that the setting suggestion frequently occurs and the player can easily guess which of the set values is. Therefore, in the case of executing the variable display during effect when the super reach fluctuation pattern and the set value are set high, it is preferable for the player to suggest any of them, but the set value is also suggested at another timing. On the other hand, since the jackpot suggestion can be made only during the variable display, it is preferable for the player that the reach notice appears at a higher rate than the setting suggestion.

In addition, since the variable display effect is an effect that is executed only during the variable display period of the super reach fluctuation pattern or the symbol based on the normal reach fluctuation pattern, which has a higher expectation of big hit than the non-reach fluctuation pattern, the variable display mode is the reach. In this case, the player's expectation for a big hit is higher than in the case of not reaching. Therefore, if the setting suggestion is executed with priority over the reach notice, especially in the case of the jackpot reach fluctuation pattern, the player's expectation for the jackpot is lowered and the production becomes inappropriate, so that the reach is inappropriate. By giving priority to the setting suggestion to be executed, it is possible to prevent the production from becoming inappropriate.

Further, in the first embodiment, if the reach notice is executed with priority over the setting suggestion as a tendency of the effect during variable display, for example, it is a non-reach or normal reach fluctuation pattern and is high. In some situations, such as when the setting is made, the execution ratio may be set so that the setting suggestion is executed in preference to the reach notice.

Further, in the first embodiment, the lottery for the reach notice and the lottery for the setting suggestion are executed separately, and the lottery for the reach notice is executed prior to the lottery for the setting suggestion (priority). Although illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the execution rate of the reach notice is higher than the execution rate of the setting suggestion, the lottery of the setting suggestion may be performed before the lottery of the reach notice. , The order is arbitrary. Further, the number of judgment values in the effect type determination tables A and B is shown in FIGS. 9-17 (A) and 9-17 (B) if the execution ratio of the reach notice is set to be higher than the execution ratio of the setting suggestion. It is not limited to what is described.

In the first embodiment, as an effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display, a mode in which a setting suggestion suggesting a set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be executed has been illustrated. Is not limited to this, and as a setting suggestion, it may be suggested whether or not the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has changed since the pachinko gaming machine 1 was started last time.

(First invention)
As described above, this embodiment includes the first invention shown below. That is, conventionally, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, the variable display result becomes a big hit by changing the set value, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. There were some that could change the probability of becoming (the probability of being controlled in an advantageous state). In the gaming machine described in the above patent gazette, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a set value depending on the type of animal displayed. When either of the setting suggestion effects can be executed, no consideration is given to which effect is prioritized, and the setting suggestion effect to be set as the set value when controlled in an advantageous state is executed. Then, there was a problem that the production became inappropriate. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a game machine that can prevent the production from becoming inappropriate,
The gaming machine of means 1 of the first invention is
It can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and is set to one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 6) having different advantages for the player. A possible gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1)
A predetermined effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can perform a predetermined effect according to any one of a plurality of types of effect modes) as an effect during variable display, in any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7. It has a setting suggestion based on it, or a part where reach notice based on patterns PT-8 and PT-9 can be executed).
The effect mode of the predetermined effect is a special mode (for example, a reach notice based on the special pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9) that suggests that the predetermined effect is controlled, and a suggestion regarding the setting. Includes specific aspects (eg, setting suggestions based on any of the specific patterns PT-1 to PT-7).
When both the predetermined effect of the special aspect and the predetermined effect of the specific aspect can be executed by the predetermined effect executing means (for example, the timing at which a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the variable display of the symbol (variable display mode). (Timing before reaching)), the predetermined effect of the special aspect can be executed in preference to the predetermined effect of the specific aspect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 may be used in FIG. 9- of the first embodiment). In the variable display effect determination process shown in 15, when the pattern PT-9 is won in the reach notice lottery, the execution of the reach notice (high) based on the pattern PT-9 is determined in 103SGS294 with priority over the setting suggestion. Even if the lottery of the setting suggestion is executed in the part or 103SGS296, if the setting suggestion (high) based on the pattern PT-5 to PT-7 is not won, the reach notice (low) based on the pattern PT-8 in 103SGS301 is not won. ) Is determined with priority over the setting suggestion (low) based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4. / The effect control CPU 120 determines the reach notice (high)> the setting suggestion (high). > Reach notice (low)> Setting suggestion (low) A part that determines the execution of an effect based on any of patterns PT1 to PT-9 at a ratio (see FIG. 9-20 of variant 1))
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when the control is performed in an advantageous state, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect of a specific mode from being executed and the effect from becoming inappropriate.
Specifically, even when the variable display that makes the variable display result a big hit is executed, the setting suggestion that can be suggested at the timing other than the variable display is executed with priority over the reach notice. , It becomes impossible to raise the player's expectation for the big hit, and it is possible to prevent the production from becoming inappropriate.

The gaming machine of the means 2 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to the means 1.
The special aspect is a first special aspect (for example, reach notice (low)) and a second special aspect (for example, reach notice) that suggests that the rate of control to the advantageous state is higher than that of the first special aspect. (High)), including
The predetermined effect executing means is
When both the predetermined effect of the second special aspect and the predetermined effect of the specific aspect can be executed, the predetermined effect of the second special aspect is executed with priority over the predetermined effect of the specific aspect (for example). When the effect control CPU 120 wins the pattern PT-9 in the reach advance notice lottery in the variable display effect determination process shown in FIG. 9-15 of the first embodiment, the reach advance notice based on the pattern PT-9 in the 103SGS294 ( High) execution is determined in preference to setting suggestions based on any of patterns PT-1 to pattern PT-7),
When both the predetermined effect of the first special aspect and the predetermined effect of the specific aspect can be executed, the predetermined effect of the specific aspect can be executed with priority over the predetermined effect of the first special aspect. (For example, when the effect control CPU 120 wins any of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 in the setting suggestion lottery in the variable display effect determination process shown in FIG. 9-15 of the first embodiment, the 103SGS298. The part that prioritizes the execution of the setting suggestion (high) based on any of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 over the reach notice (low) based on pattern PT-8)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the enjoyment of the predetermined effect from being lowered by excessively restricting the execution of the predetermined effect of the specific mode.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to means 1 or 2.
The specific aspect is a first specific aspect (for example, setting suggestion (low)) and a second specific aspect (for example, setting suggestion (high)) that suggests setting of a setting value having a higher advantage than the first specific aspect. )) Including
The predetermined effect executing means is
When both the predetermined effect of the second specific aspect and the predetermined effect of the special aspect can be executed, the predetermined effect of the second specific aspect is executed with priority over the predetermined effect of the special aspect (for example). When any one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 is won in the setting suggestion lottery in the variable display effect determination process shown in FIG. 9-15 of the first embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 wins the pattern PT in the 103SGS298. The part that determines the execution of the setting suggestion (high) based on any of -5 to PT-7 in preference to the reach notice (low) based on the pattern PT-8),
When both the predetermined effect of the first specific aspect and the predetermined effect of the special aspect can be executed, the predetermined effect of the special aspect can be executed with priority over the predetermined effect of the first specific aspect. (For example, when the effect control CPU 120 wins the pattern PT-8 in the reach notice lottery in the variable display effect determination process shown in FIG. 9-15 of the first embodiment, the pattern PT-8 is changed to the pattern PT-8 in the 103SGS301. The part that prioritizes the execution of the reach notice (low) based on the setting suggestion (low) based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-4)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the enjoyment of the predetermined effect from being lowered by excessively restricting the execution of the predetermined effect of the special aspect.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3.
An operation promotion notification means capable of executing an operation promotion notification for prompting the player to execute an operation (for example, the effect control CPU 120 performs an operation promotion effect for prompting the player to operate the push button 31B during the operation valid period of the push button 31B. Executable part.) And
An operation detecting means (for example, a push sensor 35B) capable of detecting a specific operation (for example, an operation for operating the push button 31B) by the player regardless of whether or not the operation promotion notification by the operation prompting means is executed. When,
With
The predetermined effect executing means can execute a predetermined effect based on the detection of the specific operation by the motion detecting means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 presses the push button 31B during the operation valid period of the push button 31B. When a specific operation to be operated is detected by the push sensor 35B, the image Z1 is displayed in response to the operation of the push button 31B regardless of whether or not the operation promotion image prompting the player to operate the push button 31B is displayed. A part that can perform the effect of changing to image Z2 (destroying the paraglider and dropping it). Modification example)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, a player who knows a specific motion can execute a predetermined effect at a desired timing by performing the specific motion, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4.
The predetermined effect is a common effect period (for example, a reach notice or a setting suggestion) in which a common effect is executed regardless of whether the predetermined effect of the special aspect or the predetermined effect of the specific aspect is executed. Regardless of the presence or absence, the effect of the mode in which the image Z1 fades in from the left side of the display area of the image display device 5 and moves toward the right side of the display area is executed) and the predetermined aspect of the special aspect. A non-common production period (for example, whether it is a reach notice or a setting suggestion) that can specify whether the effect is the effect or the predetermined effect of the specific mode can be specified, that is, the number of images Z2 corresponding to the effect pattern Is a non-common effect period in which the effect of moving downward from the display area of the image display device 5 is executed) (see FIG. 9-18).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, by having a common effect period, it is possible to effectively increase the player's expectation as to which of the predetermined effect of the special aspect and the predetermined effect of the specific aspect is executed. You can improve your interest.

The gaming machine of means 6 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 5.
The predetermined effect executing means can execute a predetermined effect of a special aspect which is a suggestion of being controlled to the advantageous state and also a suggestion regarding a setting (for example, both a reach notice and a setting suggestion can be executed). Occasionally, a specific image suggesting both a jackpot and a maximum setting (setting value 6) (for example, an image in which a paraglider in which a character appears moves while displaying the image Z1 of the paraglider) is displayed. Part etc.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to effectively increase the player's expectation that the predetermined effect of the special mode or the special mode different from the specific mode is executed, so that the game interest can be improved.

In the first embodiment, the case where both the reach notice (predetermined effect of the special mode) and the setting suggestion (predetermined effect of the specific mode) can be executed is, for example, a suggestion about the display result of one variable display. As long as it is possible to suggest the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, various timings may be used. Specifically, if the reach notice suggests the display result of the variable display, the reach notice can be executed at any timing during the execution period of the variable display, and the variable display corresponding to the hold memory can be executed. If it is suggested about the display result of, the reach notice can be executed at any timing in the period spanning a plurality of variable displays until the variable display corresponding to the hold storage is executed and the execution period of the variable display. .. Further, since the setting suggestion is not changed during the business period, the setting suggestion can be executed at any timing during one business period.

Further, when both the reach notice (predetermined effect of the special mode) and the setting suggestion (predetermined effect of the specific mode) can be executed, the reach notice can be executed with priority over the setting suggestion. Priority is given to the lottery of the setting suggestion, and the reach notice based on the patterns PT-8 and PT-9 is executed before the setting suggestion based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7. Includes determining, and performing reach notices based on patterns PT-8 and PT-9 at a higher rate than setting suggestions based on any of patterns PT-1 to PT-7. Note that executing the reach notice at a rate higher than the setting suggestion includes a case where the reach notice is executed at a rate of 100% and the setting suggestion is not executed, that is, the reach notice is executed at a rate of 100%.

Further, in the first embodiment, the possibility of a big hit or a set value is suggested by the number of destroyed paragliders, that is, the variable display effect that is executed when both the reach notice and the setting suggestion are feasible. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and is executed when both the reach notice and the setting suggestion are feasible. As the effect during variable display, both the advantageous state suggestion result and the setting suggestion result may be included as the effect result.

That is, in the first embodiment, the variable display effect has a common effect period for the reach notice and the setting suggestion, but the effect mode is different between the reach notice and the setting suggestion (in the common effect period). It may be a separate production (which does not have a corresponding period) (specifically, the reach notice is a suggestion using a character, the setting suggestion is a suggestion by a paraglider, etc.). Then, even when the reach notice and the setting suggestion having different production modes are executed together in the same period (same timing), the reach notice may be executed with priority over the setting suggestion.

(Modification example 1)
Next, a modification 1 of the first embodiment of the feature unit 103SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-20. 9-20 is a flowchart showing the effect determination process during variable display as a modification 1, and FIG. 9-20 is a diagram showing the execution ratio of the reach notice and the setting suggestion.

In the first embodiment, the reach notice is executed with priority over the setting suggestion by prioritizing the execution of the reach notice and the lottery of the type over the lottery of the execution of the setting suggestion and the type. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a lottery for reach notice and setting suggestion may be performed using one effect type determination table C (not shown).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-20 (A), in the effect determination process during variable display, the effect control CPU 120 first identifies the variable display result and the variation pattern (103SGS311). Next, while extracting the random number for determining the effect type, using the effect (reach notice / setting suggestion) type determination table C (not shown), whether or not the variable display effect (reach notice / setting suggestion) is executed is determined. A lottery is performed to determine the type of reach notice or setting suggestion when the execution is performed (103SGS312).

The effect (reach notice / setting suggestion) type determination table C (not shown) is not particularly shown, but the determination ratio of the effect patterns PT-1 to PT-9 is set according to the type of the variation pattern and the number of set values. ing. That is, the determination ratios of the effect patterns PT-1 to PT-9 differ depending on the type of the fluctuation pattern and the set values 1 to 6, but the execution ratios of the reach notice and the setting suggestion shown in FIG. 9-20 (B). As shown in the trend chart, as a whole, the reach notice is determined (priority) at a higher rate than the setting suggestion, that is, the decision rate is set to be higher in the order of reach notice, setting suggestion, and non-execution. (For example, reach notice is determined by 50%, setting suggestion is determined by 40%, and non-execution is determined by 10%).

Further, for example, when the fluctuation pattern is super reach, the reach notice (high) is higher than the reach notice (low) (for example, the reach notice (high) is 40% and the reach notice (low) is 10%). It is preferable to determine with. When the set values are high setting values 5 and 6, the ratio of setting suggestion (high) is higher than that of setting suggestion (low) (for example, setting suggestion (high) is 35% and setting suggestion (low) is 5). %) Is preferable. That is, the effect control CPU 120 is produced based on any of the patterns PT1 to PT-9 at a ratio of reach notice (high)> setting suggestion (high)> reach notice (low)> setting suggestion (low). You just have to decide what to do.

Further, in the first embodiment and the first modification, the embodiment in which the execution ratio of the reach notice and the setting suggestion is determined based on the fluctuation pattern and the set value is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited thereto. The execution ratio of the reach notice and the setting suggestion may be different depending on the fluctuation pattern, the set value, and the variable display result. Specifically, regardless of whether the fluctuation pattern is a super reach or a normal reach fluctuation pattern, when a big hit occurs, the reach notice should be executed at a higher rate than when it is missed, prioritizing the setting suggestion. Is preferable.

Further, in the first embodiment and the first modification, when both the advantageous state suggestion result and the setting suggestion result can be executed as the effect result, either the reach notice or the setting suggestion is executed as the variable display effect. Although the possible forms have been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and when both the advantageous state suggestion result and the setting suggestion result are feasible as the effect result, the effect result of the variable display effect is displayed. It may be possible to execute a specific effect that is a specific result that is both an advantageous state suggestion result and a setting suggestion result.

As a specific effect, for example, when a specific image suggesting both a jackpot and a maximum setting (setting value 6) (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-18, a paraglider image Z1 is displayed, a character is displayed. Display an image of the paraglider in which the item appears (for example, display an image of the paraglider moving), or display an image in which the display mode of the paraglider (for example, color, size, movement speed, trajectory, etc.) is different from the normal mode. It may be displayed, the background color may be different, or an effect image may be displayed. Alternatively, a special sound effect may be output according to the image display of the paraglider, or the illuminant may be made to emit light in a special light emitting mode.

Further, in the first embodiment and the first modification, when either the advantageous state suggestion result or the setting suggestion result is obtained as the effect result, that is, either the reach notice or the setting suggestion can be executed as the variable display effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is possible to execute either the reach notice or the setting suggestion in the variable display effect, while the reach notice and the setting suggestion are variable. It may be possible to execute each independently at an effect timing different from the effect being displayed.

Specifically, for example, it is possible to execute a reach notice (for example, a character notice in which a character appears) in a mode different from the reach notice shown in FIGS. 9-18 at a different effect timing from the variable display effect. On the other hand, the setting suggestion in a mode different from the setting suggestion shown in FIGS. 9-18 (for example, the ending image of the jackpot) is presented at a timing different from the effect during variable display (for example, after the jackpot ends). It may be feasible.

In Example 1 of the feature unit 103SG of the above-described embodiment, an embodiment in which the effect during variable display can be executed only once during one variable display is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and one The effect during variable display may be executed a plurality of times during the variable display of.

For example, as shown in FIG. 9-21 (A) as the second embodiment, a first period between the start timing of the variable display and the start timing of the reach effect of the normal reach for the fluctuation patterns of the normal reach and the super reach. And in the second period after the first period, the variable display effect can be executed.

Since the variable display time is short for the non-reach and small hit fluctuation patterns to execute the variable display effect twice or more, in the second embodiment, the variable display effect is executed as the normal reach and super reach variation patterns. Although it is limited to, non-reach and small hit fluctuation patterns may be included as execution targets of the effect during variable display.

Further, in the second embodiment, in the above-described variable display effect determination process, the presence or absence of the variable display effect execution determination table is used according to the variation pattern using the variable display effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 9-21 (B). Determined at different rates. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-21 (B), when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach, 40 out of 100 random numbers for determining the effect during variable display are displayed in the variable display effect execution decision table. Is assigned to the execution of the variable display effect, and 60 are assigned to the non-execution of the variable display effect. When the fluctuation pattern is super reach, 60 out of 100 random numbers for determining the execution of the variable display effect are assigned to the execution of the variable display effect in the variable display effect execution decision table. Individuals are assigned to non-execution of the effect during variable display.

When the execution of the variable display effect is determined in the second embodiment, the variable display effect is executed in both the first period and the second period shown in FIG. 9-21 (A).

If it is decided to execute the variable display effect when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach, it is executed in the first period as shown in FIGS. 9-22 (A) and 9-22 (B). The execution of the setting suggestion and the reach notice is determined at different ratios between the variable display effect to be performed and the variable display effect to be executed in the second period. In the same period, the execution ratios of the setting suggestion and the reach notice are set to be the same regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 9-23, when the execution of the variable display effect is determined when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach, the effect type (effect) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period. The pattern) is determined to be either pattern PT-1 to PT-7 (setting suggestion (low) or setting suggestion (high)) at a rate of 60% regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. , 40% to determine pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 (expected (low) or expected (high)). Further, as shown in FIG. 9-24, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is patterned at a rate of 40% regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Determined to be either PT-1 to PT-7 (setting suggestion (low) or setting suggestion (high)), and at a rate of 60%, pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 (expectation (low) or expectation). (High)) is decided.

Here, as shown in FIGS. 9-23 and 9-24, paying attention to the case where the fluctuation pattern is normal reach, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the first period The effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 59%, and the pattern PT- at a rate of 1%. Any of 5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} was decided at a rate of 35%, and pattern PT-9 {reach was decided at a rate of 5%. Notice (high)} will be decided. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 38%, and is 2%. The ratio was determined to be one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)}, the ratio was determined to be the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, and the ratio was 5%. The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to 58.8% of the patterns PT-1 to PT. Determined to be any {setting suggestion (low)} of -4, and determined to be any {setting suggestion (high)} of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 at a rate of 1.2%, and at a rate of 35%. The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 37.8%. At a rate of 2.2%, one of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 was decided as {setting suggestion (high)}, and at a rate of 55%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} was decided, and 5 The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to 58.5% of the patterns PT-1 to PT. Determined to be any {setting suggestion (low)} of -4, and determined to be any {setting suggestion (high)} of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 at a rate of 1.5%, and at a rate of 35%. The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 37.5%. At a rate of 2.5%, one of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 was decided as {setting suggestion (high)}, and at a rate of 55%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} was decided, and 5 The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to the pattern PT-1 to PT-4 at a rate of 58%. It was decided to be one of {setting suggestion (low)}, and it was decided to be any of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 2%, and pattern PT-8 at a rate of 35%. The {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 37%, and is 3%. The ratio was determined to be one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)}, the ratio was determined to be the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, and the ratio was 5%. The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 5, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to 56.5% of the patterns PT-1 to PT. Determined to be any {setting suggestion (low)} of -4, and determined to be any {setting suggestion (high)} of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 at a rate of 3.5%, and at a rate of 35%. The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 35.5%. One of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of 4.5%, and pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} was decided at a rate of 55%, and 5 The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to the pattern PT-1 to PT-4 at a rate of 55%. It was decided to be one of {setting suggestion (low)}, and it was decided to be any of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 5%, and pattern PT-8 at a rate of 35%. The {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 34%, and is 6%. The ratio was determined to be one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)}, the ratio was determined to be the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, and the ratio was 5%. The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-25 and 9-26, paying attention to the case where the fluctuation pattern is super reach, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, it is executed in the first period. The effect type (effect pattern) of the effect during variable display is determined to be one of patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 59%, and pattern PT-5 at a rate of 1%. ~ PT-7 is decided as {setting suggestion (high)}, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided at a rate of 15%, and pattern PT-9 {reach notice is decided at a rate of 25%. (High)} is decided. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 38%, and 2%. The ratio was determined to be one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)}, the ratio was determined to be the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, and the ratio was 55%. The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to 58.8% of the patterns PT-1 to PT. Determined to be one of -4 {setting suggestion (low)}, and determined to be any of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 1.2%, and at a rate of 15% The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 25%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 37.8%. At a rate of 2.2%, one of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 was decided as {setting suggestion (high)}, and at a rate of 5%, it was decided on pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, 55. The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to 58.5% of the patterns PT-1 to PT. Determined to be any {setting suggestion (low)} of -4, and determined to be any {setting suggestion (high)} of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 at a rate of 1.5%, and at a rate of 15%. The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 25%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 37.5%. One of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of 2.5%, and pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} was decided at a rate of 5%, 55 The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to the pattern PT-1 to PT-4 at a rate of 58%. It was decided to be one of {setting suggestion (low)}, and it was decided to be any of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 2%, and pattern PT-8 at a rate of 15%. The {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 25%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 37%, and is 3%. The ratio was determined to be one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)}, the ratio was determined to be the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, and the ratio was 55%. The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 5, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to the pattern PT-1 to PT at a rate of 56.5%. Determined to be any {setting suggestion (low)} of -4, and determined to be any {setting suggestion (high)} of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 at a rate of 3.5%, and at a rate of 15%. The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 25%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 35.5%. One of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of 4.5%, and pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} was decided at a rate of 5%, 55 The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to the pattern PT-1 to PT-4 at a rate of 55%. It was decided to be one of {setting suggestion (low)}, and it was decided to be any of patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 5%, and pattern PT-8 at a rate of 15%. The {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 25%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 34%, and is 6%. The ratio was determined to be one of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (high)}, the ratio was determined to be the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, and the ratio was 55%. The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided.

As described above, in the second embodiment, when the execution of the variable display effect is decided, the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 {reach is used as the effect type of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period. The rate (60%) at which the execution of the notice (low) or reach notice (high)} is determined is the pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 {reach as the effect type of the variable display during the first period. It is set higher than the rate (40%) at which the execution of the notice (low) or reach notice (high)} is decided.

Therefore, as the effect during variable display is repeatedly executed, the reach notice that becomes the advantageous state suggestion result becomes easier to be executed, so that one game result, that is, a timing close to the timing at which the variable display result of the variable display is derived. Expectations for big hits can be increased.

In particular, as shown in FIGS. 9-23 to 9-26, regarding the effect type of the effect during variable display executed in the first period, any one of patterns PT-1 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (low)). Alternatively, the rate at which the setting suggestion (high)} is determined is set higher than the rate at which the execution of the pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 {reach notice (low) or reach notice (high)} is determined. As for the effect type of the variable display effect that is executed in the second period, the rate at which the execution of pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 {reach notice (low) or reach notice (high)} is determined is the pattern. Any of PT-1 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (low) or setting suggestion (high)} is set higher than the determined ratio.

That is, the patterns PT-8 and the pattern PT-9 corresponding to the reach notice are determined at a higher rate in the second period than in the first period, and the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 corresponding to the setting suggestion are the second. By determining the period at a lower rate than the first period, the setting suggestion is executed at a higher rate than the reach notice in the first period, and the reach notice is executed at a higher rate than the reach notice in the second period. ..

Therefore, for example, after the reach notice (high) is executed as the variable display effect in the first period, the reach notice (low) is executed as the variable display effect in the second period, that is, the variable display is in progress. The variable display is caused by the fact that the reach notice is executed so that the expectation of the reach notice decreases as the effect is repeatedly executed (so-called downfall), or the reach notice (high) is executed in the first time. By allowing the player to predict that is likely to be super reach before the reach notice is executed twice, the player's expectation that the variable display is super reach is reduced. It is possible to prevent it from being stored.

Further, in the second embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-23 to 9-26, the variable display effect performed in the second period is more effective than the variable display effect executed in the first period. However, the rate at which any of patterns PT-5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined as the effect type is set high. That is, as the variable display effect is executed, the variable display effect is more likely to be executed in the pattern PT-9, so that the game against the variable display effect being executed in the patterns PT-5 to PT-8. The expectation of the person can be maintained.

In the second embodiment, when it is decided to execute the variable display effect, the variable display effect is executed twice in the first period and the second period, but the present invention illustrates this. When it is decided to execute the variable display effect, the variable display effect may be executed three or more times. When the variable display effect is executed three or more times in this way, the effect type determination ratio is set so that the pattern PT-9 can be easily determined each time the variable display effect is executed. It may be possible to maintain the expectation of the engineer for a longer period of time.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-23 to 9-26, the variable display effect performed in the first period and the variable display effect executed in the second period have the pattern PT- as an effect type. Since the ratios of 1 to PT-7 {setting suggestion (low) or setting suggestion (high)} are different, the variable display effect executed in the first period and the setting suggestion (high) are executed in the second period. It is difficult to continuously execute the setting suggestion with the effect during variable display. That is, in both of these two variable display effects, it is possible to prevent the game enjoyment from being lowered due to the variable display effect becoming monotonous due to the execution of the setting suggestion.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-23 to 9-26, the variable display effect performed in the first period and the variable display effect executed in the second period have the pattern PT- as an effect type. Since the ratio of 8 and PT-9 {reach notice (low) or reach notice (high)} is different, it is executed in the variable display during the first period and in the second period. It is difficult for the reach notice to be executed continuously due to the effect during variable display. That is, in both of these two variable display effects, it is possible to prevent the game enjoyment from being lowered due to the variable display effect becoming monotonous due to the execution of the reach notice.

Further, in the second embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-23 to 9-26, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the first period and the variable display effect in the second period. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect control CPU 120 is used in the first period. The rate at which the reach notice is executed as the variable display effect may be the same between the case where the variable display effect is executed and the case where the variable display effect is executed in the second period. By doing so, when the variable display effect is executed in the first period and the second period, the reach notice is executed as the variable display effect, and the first period and the second period are used. You can expect the player in the same way.

In the second embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-23 to 9-26, if the variable display advance notice effect is executed during the same period, regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Although the embodiment in which the execution of the reach notice is determined is the same as the variable display notice effect, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display notice effect executed in the same period is not limited to this. , The rate at which the execution of the reach notice is determined as the effect during variable display may differ depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. By doing so, the rate at which the reach notice is executed as the variable display effect in the first period or the second period changes according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, so that the variable display It is possible to prevent the medium production from becoming monotonous.

Further, in the second embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-22 to 9-26, focusing on the effect during variable display executed in the first period, the ratio (pattern PT-1 to 1) that determines the execution of the setting suggestion. The ratio for determining the execution of any of the patterns PT-7) is set to 60%, which is the same ratio regardless of the set value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the ratio for determining the reach notice (pattern). The ratio for determining the execution of the PT-8 or the pattern PT9) is set to 40%, which is the same ratio regardless of the set value set for the pachinko gaming machine. Similarly, focusing on the variable display effect to be executed in the second period, the ratio of determining the execution of the setting suggestion (the ratio of determining the execution of any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7) is the pachinko gaming machine 1. Regardless of the set value, it is set to 40%, which is the same ratio, and the ratio for determining the reach notice (the ratio for determining the execution of pattern PT-8 or pattern PT9) is set for the pachinko gaming machine. It is set to 60%, which is the same ratio regardless of the set value.

Therefore, even if the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 6, the variable display effect (the first variable display effect) executed in the first period is always performed. The setting suggestion is executed at a rate of 60%, the reach notice is executed at a rate of 40%, and the variable display during the second period (the second variable display during the effect) is always set at a rate of 40%. Since the suggestion is executed and the reach notice is executed at a rate of 60%, the player can be expected to execute the setting suggestion in the same way.

Further, in the second embodiment, since the effect during variable display can be executed a plurality of times in one variable display, the chances of providing reach notice and setting suggestion in one variable display increase, so that the interest is improved. ..

More specifically, when only the reach notice can be executed independently in relation to the display result of one variable display, the setting suggestion is performed at a timing other than the variable display (for example, the ending or variable display of the jackpot game state). It is possible to execute it independently (when it is not executed), but when the player is playing a game, the most noticeable thing is during the execution period of the variable display. Therefore, in the variable display in-process effect in which both the reach notice and the setting suggestion can be executed, not only the setting suggestion can be executed during the execution period of the variable display that the player pays the most attention to, but also the setting suggestion can be executed in the second embodiment. As described above, by making it possible to execute the variable display effect multiple times in one variable display, not only can the chance of executing the setting suggestion be increased, but also the second period in the first period as described above. If it is executed at a higher rate, it is possible to execute the setting suggestion and the reach notice in a well-balanced manner without hindering the execution of the reach notice even in the fluctuation pattern of the jackpot.

Further, in the second embodiment, when it is decided to execute the effect during variable display, either the reach notice or the setting suggestion is executed in both the first period and the second period. The invention is not limited to this, and in at least one of the first period and the second period, a non-execution that neither the reach notice nor the setting suggestion is executed may be determined.

When non-execution can be determined in this way, even if the execution rate of the setting suggestion is set to be the same in the first period and the second period, if the execution rate of the reach notice is different between the first period and the second period. Can be made. Further, even if the execution rate of the reach notice is set to be the same in the first period and the second period, the execution rate of the setting suggestion can be made different between the first period and the second period.

(Second invention)
As described above, this embodiment includes the second invention shown below. That is, conventionally, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, the variable display result becomes a big hit by changing the set value, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. There were some that could change the probability of becoming (the probability of being controlled in an advantageous state). In the gaming machine described in the above patent gazette, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a set value depending on the type of animal displayed. When either of the setting suggestion effects can be executed, no consideration is given to which effect is prioritized, and the setting suggestion effect to be set as the set value when controlled in an advantageous state is executed. Then, there was a problem that the production became inappropriate. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a game machine that can prevent the production from becoming inappropriate,
The gaming machine of means 1 of the second invention is
It can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and is set to one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 6) having different advantages for the player. A possible gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1)
A predetermined effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 has one of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 as the effect during variable display) capable of executing the predetermined effect by any one of a plurality of types of effect modes. The part that can execute the setting suggestion based on
The effect mode of the predetermined effect is a special mode (for example, a reach notice based on the special pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9) that suggests that the predetermined effect is controlled, and a suggestion regarding the setting. Includes specific aspects (eg, setting suggestions based on any of the specific patterns PT-1 to PT-7).
When the predetermined effect executing means can execute both the predetermined effect of the special aspect and the predetermined effect of the specific aspect when the predetermined effect is executed a plurality of times (for example, in FIG. 9-21 as the second embodiment). As shown, during the variable display of normal reach and super reach), in the second number of times after the first number of times, than when the predetermined effect is executed in the first number of times. When the predetermined effect is executed, the predetermined effect of the special aspect can be executed at a higher rate (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-22 as the second embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is in the first period. Reach based on the special pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 when the variable display effect is executed in the second period after the first period than when the variable display effect is executed. The part that executes the notice at a high rate)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, as the predetermined effect is repeatedly executed, the predetermined effect of the special aspect is easily executed, so that the expectation for the advantageous state can be increased at a timing close to one game result.
More specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-22, the variable display effect executed in the second period is easier to execute the reach notice than the variable display effect executed in the first period. It is possible to increase the expectation that the jackpot game state will be controlled during the second period, which is closer to the timing when the variable display ends than the first period.

The gaming machine of the means 2 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to the means 1.
When the predetermined effect is executed in the second number of times, the predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect of the specific aspect at a rate lower than the ratio of executing the predetermined effect of the specific aspect in the first number of times. (For example, as shown in FIG. 9-22 as the second embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 performs the variable display during the effect in the first period in the second period after the first period. The part that executes the setting suggestion based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7, which is a specific pattern, at a lower rate when the effect during variable display is executed)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to suppress a decrease in expectation for an advantageous state because a predetermined effect of a specific mode is easily executed at a timing close to one game result.
Specifically, even if it is not possible to determine non-execution as a variable display effect, it is possible to determine the reach notice at a higher rate in the second period than in the first period.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to means 1 or 2.
The predetermined effect executing means is
When the predetermined effect is executed in the first number of times, the predetermined effect of the specific aspect can be executed at a higher rate than the predetermined effect of the special aspect (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-22 as Example 2). In addition, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the first period, the setting suggestion based on any of the specific patterns PT-1 to PT-7 is a special pattern pattern PT-. 8 or the part to be executed at a higher rate than the reach notice based on pattern PT-9),
When the predetermined effect is executed in the second number of times, the predetermined effect of the special aspect can be executed at a higher rate than the predetermined effect of the specific aspect (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-22 as Example 2). In addition, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the second period, the reach notice based on the special pattern pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 is given as the specific pattern pattern PT-1 to 1. The part to be executed at a higher rate than the setting suggestion based on any of PT-7)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, as the predetermined effect is repeatedly executed, it becomes easier to execute the predetermined effect of the special aspect, but it becomes difficult to execute the predetermined effect of the specific aspect. Expectations can be suitably increased.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3.
The gaming machine is capable of variable display (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes variable display of a special symbol by executing a special symbol variation process as shown in FIG. 5, and effect control as shown in FIG. 7. The part that executes the variable display of the decorative pattern by executing the effect processing during the variable display of the CPU 120),
The predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect a plurality of times in one variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-21 as the second embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is more than the start of the normal reach effect. The part where the effect can be executed during variable display in the first period and the second period, which are the previous periods)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, there are more opportunities to provide a predetermined effect of a special mode or a specific mode in one variable display, so that the interest is improved.

In the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-21, a mode in which the variable display effect can be executed in the first period and the second period before the start of the reach effect is illustrated. The present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display effect may be executed even during the reach effect.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4.
The gaming machine is capable of variable display (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes variable display of a special symbol by executing a special symbol variation process as shown in FIG. 5, and effect control as shown in FIG. 7. The part that executes the variable display of the decorative pattern by executing the effect processing during the variable display of the CPU 120),
The predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect a plurality of times over a plurality of variable displays (for example, the effect control CPU 120 has a variable display (target variation) based on the hold memory that is the target of the look-ahead notice. The part that executes reach notice or setting suggestion as a look-ahead notice for target fluctuation over multiple variable displays until it starts)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since it is possible to execute a predetermined effect of a special mode or a predetermined effect of a specific mode before the variable display that results in one game is started, the interest is improved.

The gaming machine of means 6 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 5.
The predetermined effect executing means can execute a predetermined effect of a special mode which is a suggestion of being controlled to the advantageous state and also a suggestion of setting (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can perform a reach notice and a setting suggestion). When both are feasible, the paraglider in which the character appears moves when displaying a specific image (for example, paraglider image Z1) that suggests both a jackpot and a maximum setting (setting value 6). The part that displays images, etc.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to effectively increase the player's expectation that the predetermined effect of the special mode or the special mode different from the specific mode is executed, so that the game interest can be improved.

(Third invention)
As described above, this embodiment includes the following third invention. That is, conventionally, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, the variable display result becomes a big hit by changing the set value, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. There were some that could change the probability of becoming (the probability of being controlled in an advantageous state). In the gaming machine described in the above patent gazette, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a setting value depending on the type of animal displayed. For example, when such a setting suggestion effect can be repeatedly executed a plurality of times. , There is a problem that the production may be inappropriate because no consideration is given to how to execute the setting suggestion effect in the first and second times of the multiple times. .. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a game machine that can prevent the production from becoming inappropriate,
The gaming machine of means 1 of the third invention is
It can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and is set to one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 6) having different advantages for the player. A possible gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1)
A predetermined effect executing means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 can execute an effect during variable display) is provided so that a predetermined effect can be executed by any one of a plurality of types of effect modes.
The production mode of the predetermined effect includes a first suggestion mode (for example, a setting suggestion (low) based on patterns PT-1 to PT-4) that suggests a setting, and a setting and a type suggested by the first suggestion mode. Includes a second suggestion embodiment (eg, setting suggestion (high) based on pattern PT-5 to pattern PT-7) that makes suggestions for different settings.
When the predetermined effect executing means can execute both the predetermined effect of the first suggestion mode and the predetermined effect of the second suggestion mode when the predetermined effect is executed a plurality of times (for example, FIG. As shown in 9-21, during the variable display of the normal reach and the super reach), the predetermined effect is executed in the first number of the plurality of times, and after the first number of the plurality of times. It is possible to execute the predetermined effect of the second suggestion mode at a higher rate when the predetermined effect is executed in the second number of times (for example, FIGS. 9-23 to 9-26 and 9-28 to 9). As shown in −31, when the effect control CPU 120 can execute the variable display effect in the first period and the second period during the variable display of the normal reach and the super reach as the second and third embodiments, The part where the setting suggestion (strong) is executed at a higher rate when the variable display effect is executed in the second period than when the variable display effect is executed in the first period)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, as the predetermined effect of the second suggestion mode is repeatedly executed, the predetermined effect of the second suggestion mode is easily executed, so that the player's expectation that the predetermined effect of the second suggestion mode is executed is maintained. Can be done.
Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 9-23 to 9-26, the variable display effect executed during the second period suggests a setting (stronger) than the variable display effect executed during the first period. Is easy to execute, so that the player's expectation that the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a high set value such as 4 to 6 can be maintained.

In the second embodiment, the setting suggestion (low) based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-4, which is the first suggestion mode for suggesting the setting, suggests an odd number setting or an even number setting, and the first suggestion. The setting suggestion (high) based on any of the patterns PT-5 to PT-7, which is the second suggestion mode in which the setting suggested in the mode and the setting of a different type are suggested, is a form suggesting an intermediate setting or higher or the highest setting. Although exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the second suggestion mode may be any one as long as it suggests a setting different from the setting suggested in the first suggestion mode, for example, the first suggestion. The set value suggested in the embodiment and the set value suggested in the second suggested embodiment may all be different set values (for example, the first suggested embodiment suggests the set value 1 and the second suggested embodiment is set). When the value 6 is suggested, or when the first suggestion mode suggests odd setting values 1, 3, 5 and the second suggestion mode suggests even number settings 2, 4, 6), the first suggestion mode suggests. A common setting value may be included in both the setting value to be set and the setting value suggested in the second suggestion mode (for example, the first suggestion mode suggests the setting values 1 to 4 and the second suggestion mode is Even if one of the first suggestion mode and the second suggestion mode is a suggestion about a setting change and the other is a suggestion about a set value that is set. Good. That is, not only the setting values suggested by the first suggestion mode and the second suggestion mode are different, but also the setting to be suggested when there are a plurality of setting values suggested by the first suggestion mode and the second suggestion mode. Includes those with different numbers and ranges of values, or those with different suggestions.

The gaming machine of the means 2 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to the means 1.
The predetermined effect executing means is specified including the first suggestion mode and the second suggestion mode when the predetermined effect is executed in the first number of times and when the predetermined effect is executed in the second number of times. The predetermined effect of the embodiment can be executed at the same ratio (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-27 as the third embodiment, the case where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect during the first period and the case where the effect is executed. The part where the setting suggestion based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 is executed at the same ratio in the case where the variable display effect is executed in the second period after the first period)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, regardless of whether the predetermined effect of the specific mode is executed at the first time or the second number of times, the execution of the predetermined effect of the specific mode can be expected in the same manner.
Specifically, after setting the execution rate of the entire setting suggestion to be the same (or a lower rate in the second period than in the first period) in the first period and the second period, the effect during variable display in the first period By executing the setting suggestion (strong) at a higher rate when executing the variable display effect in the second period than when executing, it is possible to prevent the setting suggestion from being executed excessively. At the same time, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the high set value.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to means 1 or 2.
The predetermined effect executing means is
It is possible to execute a predetermined effect of a special aspect (for example, a reach notice based on the special pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9) that suggests that the advantageous state is controlled.
When the predetermined effect is executed in the second number of times, the predetermined effect of the special aspect can be executed at a higher rate than the ratio of executing the predetermined effect of the special aspect in the first number of times (for example, Example 2). As shown in FIG. 9-22, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the second period after the first period, rather than executing the variable display effect in the first period. The part where the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9, which is a special pattern, is executed at a higher rate)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, as the predetermined effect of the special mode is repeatedly executed, the ratio of the predetermined effect of the special aspect is executed increases, so that the expectation for the advantageous state can be increased at a timing close to one game result.
In Example 2, if the execution rate of the entire setting suggestion is the same in the first period and the second period, the setting suggestion (strong) can be executed at a higher rate in the second period than in the first period. However, the reach notice can be executed at a higher rate in the second period than in the first period.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3.
The gaming machine is capable of variable display (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes variable display of a special symbol by executing a special symbol variation process as shown in FIG. 5, and effect control as shown in FIG. 7. The part that executes the variable display of the decorative pattern by executing the effect processing during the variable display of the CPU 120),
The predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect a plurality of times in one variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-21 as the second embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is more than the start of the normal reach effect. The part where the effect can be executed during variable display in the first period and the second period, which are the previous periods)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, there are more opportunities to provide a predetermined effect of a special mode or a specific mode in one variable display, so that the interest is improved.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4.
The gaming machine is capable of variable display (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes variable display of a special symbol by executing a special symbol variation process as shown in FIG. 5, and effect control as shown in FIG. 7. The part that executes the variable display of the decorative pattern by executing the effect processing during the variable display of the CPU 120),
The predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect a plurality of times over a plurality of variable displays (for example, the effect control CPU 120 has a variable display (target variation) based on the hold memory that is the target of the look-ahead notice. The part that executes reach notice or setting suggestion as a look-ahead notice for target fluctuation over multiple variable displays until it starts)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since it is possible to execute a predetermined effect of a special mode or a predetermined effect of a specific mode before the variable display that results in one game is started, the interest is improved.

The gaming machine of means 6 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 5.
The predetermined effect executing means can execute a predetermined effect of a special mode which is a suggestion of being controlled to the advantageous state and also a suggestion of setting (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can perform a reach notice and a setting suggestion). When both are feasible, the paraglider in which the character appears moves when displaying a specific image (for example, paraglider image Z1) that suggests both a jackpot and a maximum setting (setting value 6). The part that displays images, etc.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to effectively increase the player's expectation that the predetermined effect of the special mode or the special mode different from the specific mode is executed, so that the game interest can be improved.

(Fourth Invention)
As described above, this embodiment includes the fourth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, the variable display result becomes a big hit by changing the set value, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. There were some that could change the probability of becoming (the probability of being controlled in an advantageous state). In the gaming machine described in the above patent gazette, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a setting value depending on the type of animal displayed. For example, when such a setting suggestion effect can be repeatedly executed a plurality of times. , There is a problem that the production may be inappropriate because no consideration is given to how to execute the setting suggestion effect in the first and second times of the multiple times. .. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a game machine that can prevent the production from becoming inappropriate,
The gaming machine of means 1 of the fourth invention is
It can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and is set to one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 6) having different advantages for the player. A possible gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1)
A predetermined effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can perform a predetermined effect according to any one of a plurality of types of effect modes) as an effect during variable display, in any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7. It has a setting suggestion based on it, or a part where reach notice based on patterns PT-8 and PT-9 can be executed).
The effect mode of the predetermined effect is a special mode (for example, a reach notice based on the special pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9) that suggests that the predetermined effect is controlled, and a suggestion regarding the setting. Includes specific aspects (eg, setting suggestions based on any of the specific patterns PT-1 to PT-7).
The predetermined effect executing means is
The predetermined effect can be executed a plurality of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-21 as the second embodiment, the variable display effect can be executed in the first period and the second period before the reach effect is started. part),
The predetermined effect of the specific aspect is performed when the predetermined effect is executed in the first number of the plurality of times and when the predetermined effect is executed in the second number of times after the first number of the plurality of times. It can be executed at different ratios (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-22 as Example 2, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display during effect in the first period and after the first period. The part where the ratio of executing the setting suggestion based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 is different from the case where the variable display effect is executed in the second period of
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the easiness of appearance of the predetermined effect of the specific mode differs between the first number of times and the second number of times, it is possible to suppress the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-22, in the first period, the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution of the setting suggestion as the variable display effect at a higher rate than the execution of the reach notice, while the second period. In, by determining the execution of the setting suggestion as the effect during the variable display at a lower rate than the execution of the reach notice, not only is it difficult to execute the setting suggestion in the second period, which is a timing close to the variable display result, but also Since the reach notice is easily executed, the player's expectation for the big hit can be increased. In the first period, the execution of the setting suggestion may be determined at a lower rate than the execution of the reach notice, while in the second period, the execution of the setting suggestion may be determined at a higher rate than the execution of the reach notice. ..

The gaming machine of the means 2 of the fourth invention is the gaming machine according to the means 1.
The predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect of the special aspect at the same ratio when the predetermined effect is executed in the first number of times and when the predetermined effect is executed in the second number of times. For example, in the case where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the first period and the case where the variable display effect is executed in the second period after the first period, the pattern PT-8 Or the part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-9 at the same rate)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, regardless of whether the predetermined effect of the special aspect is executed at the first time or the second number of times, the execution of the predetermined effect of the special aspect can be expected in the same manner.
In the second embodiment, if the non-execution can be determined, the execution ratio of the reach notice can be made the same while the execution ratio of the setting suggestion is different between the first period and the second period.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the fourth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1.
The predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect of the special aspect at different ratios when the predetermined effect is executed in the first number of times and when the predetermined effect is executed in the second number of times (for example). As shown in FIG. 9-22 as the second embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is performing the variable display during the first period and during the variable display in the second period after the first period. The part where the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 is executed at the same ratio in the case of executing the production)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the appearance status of the predetermined effect of the special mode changes depending on the first number of times and the second number of times, it is possible to suppress the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.
Specifically, in the first period, the execution of the setting suggestion is determined at a higher rate than the execution of the reach notice, while in the second period, the execution of the setting suggestion is determined at a lower rate than the execution of the reach notice. In the second period, which is close to the variable display result, not only is it difficult to execute the setting suggestion, but also the reach notice is easily executed, so that the player's expectation for the big hit can be increased.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the fourth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3.
When the predetermined effect execution means executes the predetermined effect at the predetermined number of times among the plurality of times, the first set value is set among the plurality of set values, and the first set value is different from the first set value. When the two set values are set, the predetermined effect of the special aspect can be executed at the same ratio (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-22 as the second embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is the first. When executing the effect during variable display during the period, the part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 at the same ratio regardless of the set value, and the effect control CPU 120 When executing the variable display effect in the second period, the part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 at the same ratio regardless of the set value)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the appearance status of the predetermined effect of the special mode does not change regardless of the set value at the predetermined number of times, the same can be expected for the execution of the predetermined effect of the special mode.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the fourth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3.
When the predetermined effect execution means executes the predetermined effect at the predetermined number of times among the plurality of times, the second set value is different from the case where the first set value is set among the plurality of set values. It is possible to execute the predetermined effect of the special aspect at a different ratio than when the set value is set (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect during the first period). Set when the part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 at different ratios according to the set value and when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the second period. The part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 at different ratios depending on the set value)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the appearance state of the predetermined effect of the special mode at the predetermined number of times changes according to the set value, it is possible to suppress the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

(Fifth invention)
As described above, this embodiment includes the fifth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, the variable display result becomes a big hit by changing the set value, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. There were some that could change the probability of becoming (the probability of being controlled in an advantageous state). In the gaming machine described in the above patent gazette, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a setting value depending on the type of animal displayed. For example, when such a setting suggestion effect can be repeatedly executed a plurality of times. , There is a problem that the production may be inappropriate because no consideration is given to how to execute the setting suggestion effect in the first and second times of the multiple times. .. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a game machine that can prevent the production from becoming inappropriate,
The gaming machine of means 1 of the fifth invention is
It can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and is set to one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 6) having different advantages for the player. A possible gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1)
A predetermined effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can perform a predetermined effect according to any one of a plurality of types of effect modes) as an effect during variable display, in any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7. It has a setting suggestion based on it, or a part where reach notice based on patterns PT-8 and PT-9 can be executed).
The effect mode of the predetermined effect is a special mode (for example, a reach notice based on the special pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9) that suggests that the predetermined effect is controlled, and a suggestion regarding the setting. Includes specific aspects (eg, setting suggestions based on any of the specific patterns PT-1 to PT-7).
The predetermined effect executing means is
The predetermined effect can be executed a plurality of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-21 as the second embodiment, the variable display effect can be executed in the first period and the second period before the reach effect is started. part),
A plurality of times when the first set value is set among the plurality of set values and when the second set value different from the first set value is set among the plurality of set values. Among them, the predetermined effect of the specific mode can be executed at the same ratio in the predetermined number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-22 as the second embodiment, the pachinko game is performed for the variable display effect to be executed in the first period. The setting suggestion is executed at a rate of 60% regardless of the set value set in the machine 1, and the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is set regardless of the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1. The part where the suggestion is executed at a rate of 40%)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, regardless of which of the first set value and the second set value is set, the appearance status of the predetermined effect of the specific mode does not change at the predetermined number of times, so that the predetermined effect of the specific mode can be executed. On the other hand, we can expect the same.
Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 9-22 to 9-26, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed in the first period regardless of which of the values 1 to 6 is set as the set value. The rate at which the setting suggestion is executed as the variable display effect (appearance status) and the rate at which the setting suggestion is executed as the variable display effect during the second period (appearance status) are the same, that is, the set value is Since the appearance status of the setting suggestion is the same regardless of which of the low setting value and the high setting value is set, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the set value depending on the appearance status of the setting suggestion.

In the second embodiment, even if any of 1 to 6 is set as the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the setting suggestion is executed as the variable display effect executed in the first period. An example is illustrated in which the ratio (appearance status) is the same as the ratio (appearance status) in which the setting suggestion is executed as the variable display effect executed in the second period, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the ratio (appearance status) of setting suggestion as a variable display effect executed in the first period for at least two setting values (for example, 1 and 2) out of a plurality of setting values 1 to 6. If the ratio (appearance status) of the setting suggestion being executed as the variable display effect executed in the second period is the same, the setting values (for example, 3 to 6) other than the above two setting values are the second. The rate at which the setting suggestion is executed (appearance status) may not be the same in the first period and the second period.

Furthermore, only in the variable display effect of either the variable display effect executed in the first period or the variable display effect executed in the second period, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has 1 to 6 set values. Regardless of which value is set, the rate at which the setting suggestion is executed as the variable display effect executed in the first period (appearance status) and the variable display effect executed in the second period The rate at which the setting suggestion is executed (appearance status) may not be different.

The gaming machine of the means 2 of the fifth invention is the gaming machine according to the means 1.
The predetermined effect executing means is the special effect when the predetermined effect is executed in the first number of times out of a plurality of times and when the predetermined effect is executed in the second number of times after the first number of times. It is possible to execute the predetermined effect of the embodiment at the same ratio (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the first period and the variable display effect in the second period). Then, the part that executes the reach notice based on the patterns PT-8 and PT-9 at the same rate)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, regardless of whether the predetermined effect of the special aspect is executed at the first time or the second number of times, the execution of the predetermined effect of the special aspect can be expected in the same manner.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the fifth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1.
The predetermined effect executing means is the special effect when the predetermined effect is executed in the first number of times out of a plurality of times and when the predetermined effect is executed in the second number of times after the first number of times. The predetermined effect of the embodiment can be executed at different ratios (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-22 as the second embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect during the first period and the first. The part where the reach notice based on the patterns PT-8 and PT-9 is executed at different ratios depending on the case where the variable display effect is executed in the second period after the first period)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the appearance status of the predetermined effect of the special mode changes depending on the first number of times and the second number of times, it is possible to suppress the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the fifth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3.
When the predetermined effect execution means executes the predetermined effect at the predetermined number of times among the plurality of times, the first set value is set among the plurality of set values, and the first set value is different from the first set value. It is possible to execute the predetermined effect of the special aspect at the same ratio as when the two set values are set (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-22 as the second embodiment, the variable execution is performed in the first period. For the display effect, the reach notice is executed at a rate of 40% regardless of the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, and the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is set in the pachinko game machine 1. The part that executes reach notice at a rate of 60% regardless of the set value)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the appearance status of the predetermined effect of the special mode does not change regardless of the set value at the predetermined number of times, the same can be expected for the execution of the predetermined effect of the special mode.
Specifically, since the appearance status of the reach notice is the same regardless of which of the set values 1 to 6 is set, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the set value depending on the appearance status of the reach notice.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the fifth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3.
When the predetermined effect execution means executes the predetermined effect at the predetermined number of times among the plurality of times, the second set value is different from the case where the first set value is set among the plurality of set values. It is possible to execute the predetermined effect of the special aspect at a different ratio than when the set value is set (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect during the first period, it is set. It is set when the part that executes the reach notice based on the patterns PT-8 and PT-9 at different ratios according to the set value and when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the second period. The part that executes the reach notice based on the patterns PT-8 and PT-9 at different rates according to the set value)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the appearance state of the predetermined effect of the special mode at the predetermined number of times changes according to the set value, it is possible to suppress the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

Further, in the second embodiment, the first period and the second period are set between the start timing of the variable display and the start timing of the reach effect of the normal reach, but the present invention is limited thereto. It is possible to set a period other than the above as long as it is a period from the start to the end of the variable display until the variable display result is displayed. For example, the first period is from the start to the end of normal reach, the second period is from the start to the end of super reach, the first period is from the start of normal reach or super reach, and the second period is normal reach. Or until the end of Super Reach, or when the variable pattern temporarily stops the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarts the variable display, one variable display can be simulated multiple times. In the case of a pseudo-continuous fluctuation pattern accompanied by a pseudo-continuous effect that looks like the variable display of, the first period is set as the start timing of the first re-variable display, the second period is set as the start timing of the second re-variable display, and the like. , May correspond to the revariable display period.

In the second embodiment, the variable display effect can be executed twice during one variable display, and the same number of variable display effects can be reached regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. An example is shown in which the execution of the notice and the execution of the setting suggestion are determined at the same ratio. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIGS. 9-27 (A) and 9-27 (B) as Example 3, the effect during variable display is 2 during one variable display. When it is possible to execute the game times, the execution of the reach notice and the execution of the setting suggestion are determined at different ratios according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 even if the effect is being variablely displayed the same number of times. You may.

When it is decided to execute the variable display effect, the variable display effect and the second period to be executed in the first period are shown in FIGS. 9-27 (A) and 9-27 (B). It is decided to execute the setting suggestion and the reach notice at the same ratio for the variable display in-process effect to be executed in.

Here, as shown in FIGS. 9-28 and 9-29, paying attention to the case where the fluctuation pattern is the normal reach, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the first period The effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed is determined to be pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 64%, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT at a rate of 1%. Determined to be -8 {setting suggestion (high)}, determined to pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 30%, and to pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} at a rate of 5%. decide. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 63%, and a rate of 2%. In, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} was decided at a rate of 30%, and pattern PT-9 {reach was decided at a rate of 5%. Notice (high)} will be decided.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to 58.8% of the patterns PT-1 to 1 pattern. Determined to be PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)}, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 1.2%, and pattern PT-8 {reach at a rate of 35%. The notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 57.8%. Pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of 2%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} was decided at a rate of 35%, and pattern PT was decided at a rate of 5%. -9 {Reach notice (high)} is decided.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to the pattern PT-1 to pattern at a rate of 53.5%. Determined to be PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)}, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 1.5%, and pattern PT-8 {reach at a rate of 40%. The notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 52.5%. Pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of 5%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} was decided at a rate of 40%, and pattern PT was decided at a rate of 5%. -9 {Reach notice (high)} is decided.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to pattern PT-1 to pattern PT- at a rate of 48%. 4 {Setting suggestion (low)} was decided, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of 2%, and pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low) was decided at a rate of 45%. }, And the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a ratio of 47%, and a ratio of 3%. In, the pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was determined, and the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} was determined at a rate of 45%, and the pattern PT-9 {reach was determined at a rate of 5%. Notice (high)} will be decided.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 5, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to the pattern PT-1 to pattern at a rate of 41.5%. Determined to be PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)}, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 3.5%, and pattern PT-8 {reach at a rate of 50%. The notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 41.5%. Pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of 5%, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} was decided at a rate of 50%, and pattern PT was decided at a rate of 5%. -9 {Reach notice (high)} will be decided.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to pattern PT-1 to pattern PT- at a rate of 35%. 4 {Setting suggestion (low)} was decided, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of 5%, and pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low) was decided at a rate of 55%. }, And the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 34%, and a rate of 6%. In, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided, and pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} was decided at a rate of 55%, and pattern PT-9 {reach was decided at a rate of 5%. Notice (high)} will be decided.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-30 and 9-31, paying attention to the case where the fluctuation pattern is super reach, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the first period The effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed is determined to be one of pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 64%, and pattern PT5 at a rate of 1%. ~ Pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided, pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} was decided at a rate of 17.5%, and pattern PT was decided at a rate of 17.5%. -9 {Reach notice (high)} is decided. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 63%, and 2 Pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of%, and pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} was decided at a rate of 5%, and at a rate of 30%. The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to 58.8% of the patterns PT-1 to 1 pattern. Determined to be one of PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)}, determined to be one of pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 1.2%, and determined at a rate of 20%. The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 20%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 57.8%. 2. Determined to be one of pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 2.2%, and determined to pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 5%, 35 The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to the pattern PT-1 to pattern at a rate of 53.5%. Determined to be one of PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)}, and determined to be one of pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 1.5%, and 22.5%. The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided by the ratio, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at the ratio of 22.5%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 52.5%. , Pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 2.5%, and pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 5%, 40 The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to pattern PT-1 to pattern PT- at a rate of 48%. 4 Determined to be one of {setting suggestion (low)}, pattern PT5 to one of pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 2%, and pattern PT-8 at a rate of 25%. The {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 25%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 47%, and 3 Pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of%, and pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} was decided at a rate of 5%, and at a rate of 45%. The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 5, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to the pattern PT-1 to pattern at a rate of 41.5%. Determined to be one of PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)}, and determined to be one of pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 3.5%, 27.5% The ratio determines the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, and the ratio determines the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)}. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 40.5%. , 4.5% of pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)}, 5% of pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, 50 The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to pattern PT-1 to pattern PT- at a rate of 35%. 4 Determined to be one of {setting suggestion (low)}, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 at a rate of 5%, determined to be one of pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)}, and pattern PT-8 at a rate of 30%. The {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 30%. In addition, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the second period is determined to be one of pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 34%, and 6 Pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of%, and pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} was decided at a rate of 5%, and a rate of 55% The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided.

As described above, in the third embodiment, when it is decided to execute the effect during variable display, regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 to any of 1 to 6, in the first period. The rate at which patterns PT-1 to PT-7 {set value suggestion (low) or setting suggestion (high)} is determined as the effect type of the effect during variable display executed in the second period and the variable display executed in the second period The ratio at which patterns PT-1 to PT-7 {set value suggestion (low) or setting suggestion (high)} is determined is set to be the same as the effect type of the medium effect. Therefore, regardless of whether the setting suggestion is executed in the first period or the second period, the player can expect the setting suggestion result in the same way.

Furthermore, the rate at which pattern PT-8 and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (low) and reach notice (high)} are determined as the effect type of the variable display effect executed in the first period and in the second period The ratio at which the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (low) or reach notice (high)} is determined is set to be the same as the effect type of the effect during variable display to be executed. Therefore, regardless of whether the reach notice is executed in the first period or the second period, the player can expect the advantageous state suggestion result in the same way.

On the other hand, when the variable display effect is executed in the first period or the second period, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the first set value (for example, the set value 1) and the second. The rate at which patterns PT-1 to PT-7 {set value suggestion (low) or set value suggestion (high)} are determined as the effect type differs between when the set value (for example, set value 6) is used. , Since the appearance status of the setting suggestion in the first period or the second period changes depending on which of the first set value and the second set value is set, it is possible to suppress the effect during variable display from becoming monotonous.

Further, in the variable display during effect executed in the first period and the variable display during effect executed in the second period, a pattern is set as an effect type each time the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 increases. The rate at which PT-1 to PT-7 {set value suggestion (low) or set value suggestion (high)} is determined decreases, and pattern PT-8 and pattern PT-9 {reach notice (low) and reach notice ( High)} is determined more often. Therefore, when a high setting value (for example, 5, 6) is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the setting is suggested as compared with a case where a low setting value (for example, 1 to 4) is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Is difficult to execute, so that it is difficult for the player who recognizes the effect during variable display to specify the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Further, as in the second embodiment, in the third embodiment, the variable display effect executed in the second period is the effect type of the pattern PT-9 rather than the variable display effect executed in the first period. The rate at which {setting suggestion (high)} is determined is set high. That is, as the variable display effect is repeatedly executed, the reach notice based on the pattern PT-9 becomes easier to be executed, so that the player's expectation that the variable display effect is executed in the pattern PT-9 is maintained. Can be made to.

In the third embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-27, regardless of whether the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 6, the variable display executed in the first period is in progress. The ratio of patterns PT-1 to PT-7 {set value suggestion (low) or set value suggestion (high)} is the same between the effect and the variable display effect executed in the second period, and the ratio is the same. Although the embodiment in which the rate at which the pattern PT-8 and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (low) and reach notice (high)} are determined is the same is illustrated, the present invention is not limited thereto. , Even if the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are the same, the pattern PT-1 is obtained between the variable display effect executed in the first period and the variable display effect executed in the second period. ~ PT-7 {set value suggestion (low) or set value suggestion (high)} may be determined at different rates, and pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9 {reach notice (low) or reach notice The rate at which (high)} is determined may be different.

In the third embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the first period and the variable display effect in the second period, which are the same as the variable display effect. Although the embodiment in which the setting suggestion is executed by the ratio is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display during the effect in the first period and in the second period. The setting suggestion may be executed at different ratios as these variable display effects depending on the case of executing the variable display effect. By doing so, the rate (appearance rate) at which the setting suggestion is executed changes depending on whether the variable display effect is executed in the first period or the variable display effect is executed in the second period. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the effect from becoming monotonous during variable display.

Further, in the third embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-27, a variable display effect (first variable display effect) executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the first period and a variable display executed in the second period. When executing the reach notice as the middle effect (the second variable display during the effect), an example of a form in which the reach notice is executed at different ratios according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 at the same number of times. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display effect (the first variable display effect) executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the first period and the variable display effect executed in the second period. When executing the reach notice as (the second variable display effect), if the same number of variable display effects are performed, the reach notice is given at the same ratio regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. You may do it. By doing so, if the effect is during variable display the same number of times, the rate at which the reach notice is executed (appearance status) does not change according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. , The player can still expect the reach notice to be executed by the variable display during effect executed in the first period and the variable display during effect executed in the second period.

(Sixth Invention)
As described above, this embodiment includes the sixth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, the variable display result becomes a big hit by changing the set value, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. There were some that could change the probability of becoming (the probability of being controlled in an advantageous state). In the gaming machine described in the above patent gazette, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a setting value depending on the type of animal displayed. For example, when such a setting suggestion effect can be repeatedly executed a plurality of times. , There is a problem that the production may be inappropriate because no consideration is given to how to execute the setting suggestion effect in the first and second times of the multiple times. .. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a game machine that can prevent the production from becoming inappropriate,
The gaming machine of means 1 of the sixth invention is
It can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and is set to one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 6) having different advantages for the player. A possible gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1)
A predetermined effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can perform a predetermined effect according to any one of a plurality of types of effect modes) as an effect during variable display, in any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7. It has a setting suggestion based on it, or a part where reach notice based on patterns PT-8 and PT-9 can be executed).
The effect mode of the predetermined effect is a special mode (for example, a reach notice based on the special pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9) that suggests that the predetermined effect is controlled, and a suggestion regarding the setting. Includes specific aspects (eg, setting suggestions based on any of the specific patterns PT-1 to PT-7).
The predetermined effect executing means is
The predetermined effect can be executed a plurality of times (for example, as shown in the third embodiment, a portion in which the effect during variable display can be executed in the first period and the second period before the start of the reach effect).
The predetermined effect of the specific aspect is performed when the predetermined effect is executed in the first number of the plurality of times and when the predetermined effect is executed in the second number of times after the first number of the plurality of times. It can be executed at the same ratio (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-27 as the third embodiment, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display during the effect in the first period, and more than in the first period. The part where the setting suggestion is executed at the same ratio as when the variable display effect is executed in the second period later)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, regardless of whether the predetermined effect of the specific mode is executed at the first time or the second number of times, the execution of the predetermined effect of the specific mode can be expected in the same manner.
More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 9-27, the variable display is displayed depending on whether the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the first period or the variable display effect in the second period. Since the setting suggestion is executed at the same ratio (65% in the example shown in FIG. 9-27) as the middle effect, it is set between the variable display effect to be executed in the first period and the variable display effect to be executed in the second period. The player can be expected to do the same for the suggestion to be executed.

The gaming machine of means 2 of the sixth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1.
The predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect of the special aspect at the same ratio when the predetermined effect is executed in the first number of times and when the predetermined effect is executed in the second number of times. For example, as shown in FIG. 9-27 as the third embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during variable display in the first period and the variable display in the second period after the first period. The part where the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 is executed at the same ratio as in the case of executing the middle effect)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, regardless of whether the predetermined effect of the special aspect is executed at the first time or the second number of times, the execution of the predetermined effect of the special aspect can be expected in the same manner.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the sixth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1.
The predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect of the special aspect at different ratios when the predetermined effect is executed in the first number of times and when the predetermined effect is executed in the second number of times (for example). , The pattern in which the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the second period after the first period is a special pattern than the variable display effect in the first period. The part that executes reach notice based on PT-8 or pattern PT-9 at a high rate)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the appearance status of the predetermined effect of the special mode changes depending on the first number of times and the second number of times, it is possible to suppress the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.
In Example 3, if the non-execution can be determined, the execution ratio of the reach notice can be made different while the execution ratio of the setting suggestion is the same in the first period and the second period.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the sixth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3.
When the predetermined effect execution means executes the predetermined effect at the predetermined number of times among the plurality of times, the first set value is set among the plurality of set values, and the first set value is different from the first set value. When the two set values are set, the predetermined effect of the special aspect can be executed at the same ratio (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect during the first period). When the part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 at the same ratio regardless of the set value and the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the second period. In addition, the part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 at the same ratio regardless of the set value)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the appearance status of the predetermined effect of the special mode does not change regardless of the set value at the predetermined number of times, the same can be expected for the execution of the predetermined effect of the special mode.
Specifically, since the appearance status of the reach notice is the same regardless of which of the set values 1 to 6 is set, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the set value depending on the appearance status of the reach notice.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the sixth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3.
When the predetermined effect execution means executes the predetermined effect at the predetermined number of times among the plurality of times, the second set value is different from the case where the first set value is set among the plurality of set values. The predetermined effect of the special aspect can be executed at a different ratio than when the set value is set (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-27 as the third embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is in the first period. When executing the effect during variable display, the part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 at different ratios according to the set value, and the effect control CPU 120 are in the second period. The part where the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 is executed at different ratios according to the set value when the variable display effect is executed in
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the appearance state of the predetermined effect of the special mode at the predetermined number of times changes according to the set value, it is possible to suppress the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

(7th invention)
As described above, this embodiment includes the seventh invention shown below. That is, conventionally, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, the variable display result becomes a big hit by changing the set value, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. There were some that could change the probability of becoming (the probability of being controlled in an advantageous state). In the gaming machine described in the above patent gazette, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a setting value depending on the type of animal displayed. For example, when such a setting suggestion effect can be repeatedly executed a plurality of times. , There is a problem that the production may be inappropriate because no consideration is given to how to execute the setting suggestion effect in the first and second times of the multiple times. .. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a game machine that can prevent the production from becoming inappropriate,
The gaming machine of means 1 of the seventh invention is
It is possible to control an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and set one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 6) having different advantages for the player. A possible gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1)
A predetermined effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can perform a predetermined effect according to any one of a plurality of types of effect modes) as an effect during variable display, in any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7. It has a setting suggestion based on it, or a part where reach notice based on patterns PT-8 and PT-9 can be executed).
The effect mode of the predetermined effect is a special mode (for example, a reach notice based on the special pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9) that suggests that the predetermined effect is controlled, and a suggestion regarding the setting. Includes specific aspects (eg, setting suggestions based on any of the specific patterns PT-1 to PT-7).
The predetermined effect executing means is
The predetermined effect can be executed a plurality of times (for example, a portion in which the effect during variable display can be executed in the first period and the second period before the reach effect is started).
A plurality of times when the first set value is set among the plurality of set values and when the second set value different from the first set value is set among the plurality of set values. Among them, the predetermined effect of the specific mode can be executed at different ratios at a predetermined number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-27 as the third embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 performs the effect during variable display in the first period. When executing, the part where the setting suggestion based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 can be executed at a different ratio according to the set setting value)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the appearance status of the predetermined effect of the specific mode at the predetermined number of times changes depending on which of the first set value and the second set value is set, it is possible to suppress the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous. ..
Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 9-27 to 9-31, the effect control CPU 120 is variably displayed in the first period depending on which of 1 to 6 the value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is. Since the execution rate (appearance status) of the setting suggestion changes depending on whether the medium effect is executed or the variable display medium effect is executed in the second period, the player can perform not only the result of the setting suggestion but also the predetermined number of times. It is possible to predict the set value depending on the appearance status of the setting suggestion in.

The gaming machine of means 2 of the seventh invention is the gaming machine according to means 1.
The predetermined effect executing means is the special effect when the predetermined effect is executed in the first number of times out of a plurality of times and when the predetermined effect is executed in the second number of times after the first number of times. The predetermined effect of the embodiment can be executed at the same ratio (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-27 as the third embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect during the first period and the second. The part where the reach notice based on the patterns PT-8 and PT-9 can be executed at the same ratio as when the effect during variable display is executed during the period)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, regardless of whether the predetermined effect of the special aspect is executed at the first time or the second number of times, the execution of the predetermined effect of the special aspect can be expected in the same manner.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the seventh invention is the gaming machine according to means 1.
The predetermined effect executing means is the special effect when the predetermined effect is executed in the first number of times out of a plurality of times and when the predetermined effect is executed in the second number of times after the first number of times. It is possible to execute the predetermined effect of the mode at different ratios (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the first period and when the variable display effect is executed in the second period. Reach notice based on patterns PT-8 and PT-9 at different rates)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the appearance status of the predetermined effect of the special mode changes depending on the first number of times and the second number of times, it is possible to suppress the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the seventh invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3.
When the predetermined effect execution means executes the predetermined effect at the predetermined number of times among the plurality of times, the first set value is set among the plurality of set values, and the first set value is different from the first set value. When the two set values are set, the predetermined effect of the special aspect can be executed at the same ratio (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect during the first period). When the part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 at the same ratio regardless of the set value and the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the second period. In addition, the part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 at the same ratio regardless of the set value)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the appearance status of the predetermined effect of the special mode does not change regardless of the set value at the predetermined number of times, the same can be expected for the execution of the predetermined effect of the special mode.
Specifically, since the appearance status of the reach notice is the same regardless of which of the set values 1 to 6 is set, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the set value depending on the appearance status of the reach notice.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the seventh invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3.
When the predetermined effect execution means executes the predetermined effect at the predetermined number of times among the plurality of times, the second set value is different from the case where the first set value is set among the plurality of set values. The predetermined effect of the special aspect can be executed at a different ratio than when the set value is set (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-27 as the third embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is in the first period. When executing the effect during variable display, the part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 at different ratios according to the set value, and the effect control CPU 120 are in the second period. The part where the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 is executed at different ratios according to the set value when the variable display effect is executed in
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the appearance state of the predetermined effect of the special mode at the predetermined number of times changes according to the set value, it is possible to suppress the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

In the second and third embodiments of the feature unit 103SG of the above-described embodiment, the variable display effect can be executed twice during one variable display, and when the execution of the variable display effect is determined, the first period In each of the second period and the second period, the embodiment of determining whether to execute the reach notice or the setting suggestion based on the fluctuation pattern and the set value has been illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first period is not limited to this. Determines whether to execute the reach notice or the setting suggestion based on the set value regardless of the fluctuation pattern, while for the second period, the reach notice and the setting suggestion are based on the fluctuation pattern and the set value. It may be decided which to be executed, that is, whether to execute the effect to be executed in the first period or the second period according to different judgment criteria.

For example, as shown in FIG. 9-32 as the fourth embodiment, the first period and the first period between the start timing of the variable display and the start timing of the reach effect of the normal reach are targeted for the fluctuation patterns of the normal reach and the super reach. The variable display effect can be executed in the second period after the first period. Since the variable display time is short for the non-reach and small hit fluctuation patterns to execute the variable display effect twice or more, in the fourth embodiment, the variable display effect is executed as the normal reach and super reach variation patterns. Limited to.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, in the variable display effect determination process described above, when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach, the type of the variable display effect is determined based on the set value for the first period. In the second period, a process of determining the type of effect during variable display is executed based on the fluctuation pattern. In the following, the variable display effect determination process in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-33.

As shown in FIGS. 9-33, in the effect determination process during variable display, the effect control CPU 120 first identifies the variation pattern (103SGS311). As described above, the variation pattern can be specified by the variation pattern specification command stored in the variation pattern specification command storage area. Then, it is determined whether the specified fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach (103SGS312), and if it is normal reach or super reach, the process proceeds to 103SG313, and if it is other than normal reach or super reach, that is, a non-reach or small hit fluctuation pattern. In this case, since it is not the target of the variable display effect, the variable display effect determination process is terminated.

When the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach in 103SGS312, the set value stored in the RAM 102 is read out to specify the current set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (103SGS313). Next, based on the set value specified by 103SGS313, whether or not the variable display effect is executed in the first period and the effect type (effect pattern) when the variable display effect is executed are determined by a variable display effect execution determination table (not shown). It is determined using (common to normal reach and super reach) (103SGS314).

As shown in FIG. 9-34 (A), in 103SGS314, the effect control CPU 120 uses a variable display effect execution determination table whose fluctuation pattern is common to normal reach or super reach, and reaches notice, setting suggestion, and non-execution. Decide on one of. Specifically, when the setting value is 1, the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution of the reach notice (low) at a rate of 40%, the setting suggestion at a rate of 40%, and the non-execution at a rate of 10%. Determined by percentage. Further, in the case of the set value 6, the execution of the reach notice (low) is determined at a rate of 40%, the setting suggestion is determined at a rate of 55%, and the non-execution is determined at a rate of 5%. Although the execution ratio corresponding to the set values 2 to 5 is omitted here, the reach notice is determined by the common execution ratio regardless of the set value 1 to 6, and the setting suggestion is set. The larger the value, the higher the execution rate of the setting suggestion and the execution rate of the setting suggestion (high).

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 9-35, paying attention to the effect type determination ratio during variable display in the first period, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the first period. The effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed is determined to be non-execution at a rate of 20%, and pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 39%. Then, the pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} is determined at a rate of 1%, and the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined at a rate of 40%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, it is determined that the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is not executed at a rate of 18%. Pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} was decided at a rate of 8%, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of 1.2%. The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined at a rate of 40%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, it is determined that the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is not executed at a rate of 15%. Pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} was decided at a rate of 5%, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of 1.5%. The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined at a rate of 40%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is determined to be non-execution at a rate of 12.5%. Pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} was decided at a rate of 45.5%, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of 2%. The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined at a rate of 40%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 5, it is determined that the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is not executed at a rate of 10%. Pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} was decided at a rate of 5%, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of 3.5%. The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is determined at a rate of 40%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is determined to be non-execution at a rate of 5%, and 50%. Pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} was determined, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was determined at a ratio of 5%, and a ratio of 40%. Determine the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}.

Returning to FIG. 9-33, it is determined in 103SGS314 whether or not the execution of the variable display effect in the first period is determined (103SGS315), and if the execution is determined, the determined effect type (patterns PT-1 to PT). -9) is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (103SGS316), and a variable display effect execution decision flag indicating that the execution of the variable display effect in the first period is determined is set (103SGS317). Proceed to 103SGS318. If the execution is not decided in 103SGS315, that is, if the non-execution is decided, the process proceeds to 103SGS318.

Next, in 103SGS318, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the fluctuation pattern is normal reach (103SGS318), and if it is determined to be normal reach, the second is based on the specified fluctuation pattern and set value. Whether or not the variable display effect is executed during the period and the effect type (effect pattern) when the effect is executed are determined using a variable display effect execution determination table (for normal reach) (not shown) (103SGS319).

As shown in FIG. 9-34 (B), in 103SGS319, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether to reach notice, setting suggestion, or non-execution using the variable display during effect execution determination table for normal reach. Specifically, when the setting value is 1, the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution of the reach notice (low) at a rate of 60%, the setting suggestion at a rate of 35%, and the non-execution at a rate of 5%. Determined by percentage. Further, in the case of the set value 6, the execution of the reach notice (low) is determined at a rate of 60%, the setting suggestion is determined at a rate of 35%, and the non-execution is determined at a rate of 5%. Although the execution ratio corresponding to the set values 2 to 5 is omitted here, the reach notice and the setting suggestion are determined by the common execution ratio regardless of the set value 1 to 6, and the setting suggestion ( For high), the execution rate is set to increase as the set value increases.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 9-36, paying attention to the case of normal reach regarding the variable display advance notice effect type determination ratio in the second period, the case where the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1. Determines the non-execution of the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display during the first period to be executed at a rate of 5%, and patterns PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (setting suggestion) at a rate of 33%. Low)}, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 2%, and pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} at a rate of 55%. The pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is determined at a rate of 5%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, it is determined that the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is not executed at a rate of 5%. Pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} was decided at a rate of 8%, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of 2.2%. The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided at a rate of 55%, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is determined to be non-execution at a rate of 5%, and 32. Pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} was decided at a rate of 5%, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of 2.5%. The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided at a rate of 55%, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is determined to be non-execution at a rate of 5%, and 32%. Pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} was decided, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a ratio of 3%, and a ratio of 55% In, the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 5, it is determined that the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is not executed at a rate of 5%. Pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} was decided at a rate of 5%, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of 4.5%. The pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided at a rate of 55%, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is determined to be non-execution at a rate of 5%, and 29%. Pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} was decided, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a ratio of 6%, and a ratio of 55%. In, the pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 5%.

Further, when it is determined in 103SGS318 that the fluctuation pattern is not the normal reach, that is, it is the super reach, whether or not the variable display during the second period is executed and the execution are performed based on the specified fluctuation pattern and the set value. The effect type (effect pattern) to be performed is determined using a variable display effect execution determination table (for super reach) (not shown) (103SGS320).

As shown in FIG. 9-34 (C), in the 103SGS320, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether to reach notice, setting suggestion, or non-execution by using the effect execution determination table during variable display for super reach. .. Specifically, in the case of the setting value 1 and the setting value 6, the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution of the reach notice (low) at a rate of 60%, determines the setting suggestion at a rate of 40%, and does not execute. Do not decide. Although the execution ratio corresponding to the set values 2 to 5 is omitted here, the reach notice and the setting suggestion are determined by the common execution ratio regardless of the set value 1 to 6, and the setting suggestion ( For high), the execution rate is set to increase as the set value increases.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 9-36, paying attention to the case of super reach regarding the variable display advance notice effect type determination ratio in the second period, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1. In this case, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is determined to be pattern PT-1 to pattern PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)} at a rate of 36%, and 4%. The ratio was determined to be pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)}, the ratio was determined to be pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low)}, and the ratio was 55% to determine pattern PT-9 { Reach notice (high)} will be decided.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to the pattern PT-1 to pattern at a rate of 35.8%. Determined to be PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)}, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 4.2%, and pattern PT-8 {reach at a rate of 5%. The notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 55%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to the pattern PT-1 to pattern at a rate of 35.5%. Determined to be PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)}, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 4.5%, and pattern PT-8 {reach at a rate of 5%. The notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 55%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to pattern PT-1 to pattern PT- at a rate of 35%. 4 {Setting suggestion (low)} was decided, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of 5%, and pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low) was decided at a rate of 5%. }, And the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 55%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 5, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to the pattern PT-1 to pattern at a rate of 33.5%. Determined to be PT-4 {setting suggestion (low)}, pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} at a rate of 6.5%, and pattern PT-8 {reach at a rate of 5%. The notice (low)} is decided, and the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 55%.

When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the effect type (effect pattern) of the variable display effect to be executed in the first period is set to pattern PT-1 to pattern PT- at a rate of 32%. 4 {Setting suggestion (low)} was decided, and pattern PT5 to pattern PT-8 {setting suggestion (high)} was decided at a rate of 8%, and pattern PT-8 {reach notice (low) was decided at a rate of 5%. }, And the pattern PT-9 {reach notice (high)} is decided at a rate of 55%.

Returning to FIG. 9-33, it is determined in 103SGS319 or 103SGS320 whether or not the execution of the variable display effect in the second period is determined (103SGS321), and if the execution is determined, the determined effect type (pattern PT-1). ~ PT-9) is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (103SGS322), and the variable display effect execution decision flag indicating that the execution of the variable display effect in the second period is determined is set (103SGS323). ), Ends the effect during variable display. If the execution is not decided in 103SGS321, that is, if the non-execution is decided, the variable display during effect ends.

As described above, in the fourth embodiment, when the variable display effect is executed in the first period of the plurality of times, the installation value is 1 to 1 regardless of whether the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach. When deciding whether or not to execute the setting suggestion based on which of 6 is executed, and when the variable display in-process effect is executed in the second period, it depends on whether the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach. Reach notice or setting suggestion is determined based on a separate judgment table. That is, since the judgment criteria for whether to execute the reach notice or the setting suggestion is different between the first period and the second period, it is possible to suppress the effect during variable display from becoming monotonous.

Further, since the execution rate of the setting suggestion in the first period is higher than the execution rate of the setting suggestion in the second period, the setting suggestion is easily executed in the first period, whereas the reach notice is given in the second period. Is easier to execute, so even though it becomes normal reach or super reach in the second period, the setting suggestion does not become easier to execute in both the first period and the second period, and , Since the reach notice is executed in the first period and the setting suggestion is not easily executed in the second period, the setting suggestion and the reach notice can be executed in a well-balanced manner.

Further, since the execution rate of the reach notice in the second period is higher than the execution rate of the reach notice in the first period, it is variablely displayed by executing the reach notice in both the first period and the second period. It is possible to prevent the medium production from becoming monotonous. However, as shown in FIGS. 9-35 to 9-37, paying attention to each set value, when the variable display effect is executed in the first period, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not included. When the execution of the reach notice is decided at the same ratio (40%) and the variable display effect is executed in the second period, the reach notice is executed regardless of the set value set in the pachinko machine 1. It is decided at the same ratio (60%). Therefore, in the variable display during effect executed in the first period and the variable display in effect executed in the second period, regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the reach notice is executed. The player can be noticed in the same way.

In addition, even if the set value is set high (for example, set values 5 and 6), in the case of normal reach or super reach, not only is the reach notice easier to execute than the setting suggestion in the second period, but also the super reach In this case, the reach notice (high) is likely to be executed, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's expectation for a big hit.

Furthermore, even if the execution of the setting suggestion is decided in the second period, the setting suggestion (high) is more likely to be executed than in the case where the execution of the setting suggestion is decided in the first period. Even when is executed, the player's expectation for the high setting can be increased.

Further, in the first period, when the set value is 1, the execution of the reach notice and the setting suggestion is determined at the same ratio, whereas when the set value is 6, that is, the set values are 1, 2, The higher the setting is in the order of 3, 4, 5, and 6, the higher the execution of the setting suggestion is determined than the reach notice. Therefore, the higher the setting, the easier it is for the setting suggestion to appear. It will be easier to predict.

In the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-34, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect (first variable display effect) in the first period and in the second period. The present invention is not limited to the case where the variable display effect (the second variable display effect) is executed, and the form in which the execution of the reach notice is determined at different ratios is illustrated. , The execution of the reach notice may be determined at the same ratio depending on whether the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the first period or the variable display effect in the second period. .. By doing so, it is possible to make the player similarly expect the execution of the reach notice in the first variable display effect and the second variable display effect.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9-34, if the effect is during the variable display of the same number of times, the reach notice is executed at the same ratio regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Although the form to be determined is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the production during variable display of the same number of times, the reach notice is executed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. May be determined at different rates. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the execution of the same effect type from being determined between the first variable display effect and the second variable display effect, so that the variable display effect becomes monotonous. It can be suppressed.

(8th invention)
As described above, this embodiment includes the eighth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, the variable display result becomes a big hit by changing the set value, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. There were some that could change the probability of becoming (the probability of being controlled in an advantageous state). In the gaming machine described in the above patent gazette, it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect that suggests a setting value depending on the type of animal displayed. For example, when such a setting suggestion effect can be repeatedly executed a plurality of times. , There is a problem that the production may be inappropriate because no consideration is given to how to execute the setting suggestion effect in the first and second times of the multiple times. .. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a game machine that can prevent the production from becoming inappropriate,
The gaming machine of means 1 of the eighth invention is
It can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and is set to one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 6) having different advantages for the player. A possible gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1)
Whether the variable display pattern determining means capable of determining one variable display pattern from the plurality of variable display patterns (for example, the CPU 103 sets the display result as "big hit" or "small hit" in the variable pattern setting process of S111. The part that determines the fluctuation pattern to one of multiple types using the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on the pre-determination result of whether or not)
A variable display means capable of executing variable display by a determined variable display pattern (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is performing variable display. In the effect processing, a decorative pattern is displayed based on a display result or a variable pattern specified by an effect control command. The part that executes variable display) and
Of the patterns PT-1 to PT-9, as the effect pattern of the variable display effect in the process of determining the effect of the variable display, the predetermined effect determining means for determining the effect mode of the predetermined effect from a plurality of types The part that decides one from) and
Based on the determination result of the predetermined effect determining means, the predetermined effect executing means capable of executing the predetermined effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is based on any of the patterns PT-1 to PT-7 as the effect during variable display. Setting suggestion or reach notice based on patterns PT-8 and PT-9) and
With
The effect mode of the predetermined effect is a special mode (for example, a reach notice based on the special pattern PT-8 or pattern PT-9) that suggests that the predetermined effect is controlled, and a suggestion regarding the setting. Includes specific aspects (eg, setting suggestions based on any of the specific patterns PT-1 to PT-7).
The predetermined effect executing means is
The predetermined effect can be executed a plurality of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-32 as the fourth embodiment, a portion in which the variable display effect can be executed in the first period and the second period before the reach effect is started. ),
Based on at least the set value, the effect mode of the predetermined effect to be executed in the first of a plurality of times is determined (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-33 as the fourth embodiment, the effect control is performed. The part in which the CPU 120 determines the effect type of the variable display effect based on the set value in the variable display effect in the first period),
At least based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means, the effect mode of the predetermined effect to be executed in the second number of times after the first number of times is determined (for example, an embodiment). As shown in FIG. 9-33 as No. 4, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect type of the variable display effect based on the set value and the fluctuation pattern set in the variable display effect in the second period. )
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the determination criteria for determining the effect mode of the predetermined effect differ between the first and second times, it is possible to prevent the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.
Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 9-33, when determining the effect type of the variable display effect (first variable display effect) in the first period, the variable display is being performed based on the variable display variation pattern. Determine the production type of the production * Isn't it the set value? (Refer to 103SGS314) On the other hand, when determining the effect type of the variable display effect (second variable display effect) in the second period, the variation pattern of the variable display and the setting set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 The effect type of the variable display effect is determined based on the value (see 103SGS319 and 103SGS320). In other words, since the judgment criteria for determining the effect type are different between the first variable display effect and the second variable display effect, the first variable display effect and the second variable display effect It is possible to prevent the execution of the same effect type from being decided by, and it is possible to suppress that the effect during variable display becomes monotonous.

The gaming machine of means 2 of the eighth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1.
The predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect of the special aspect at the same ratio when the predetermined effect is executed in the first number of times and when the predetermined effect is executed in the second number of times. For example, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the first period and the variable display effect in the second period, the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 is given. Part to be executed at the same rate)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, regardless of whether the predetermined effect of the special aspect is executed at the first time or the second number of times, the execution of the predetermined effect of the special aspect can be expected in the same manner.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the eighth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1.
The predetermined effect executing means can execute the predetermined effect of the special aspect at different ratios when the predetermined effect is executed in the first number of times and when the predetermined effect is executed in the second number of times (for example). As shown in FIG. 9-34 as the fourth embodiment, the pattern PT is obtained when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the first period and the variable display effect in the second period. -8 or the part that executes reach notice based on pattern PT-9 at different rates)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the appearance status of the predetermined effect of the special mode changes depending on the first number of times and the second number of times, it is possible to suppress the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the eighth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3.
When the predetermined effect execution means executes the predetermined effect at the predetermined number of times among the plurality of times, the first set value is set among the plurality of set values, and the first set value is different from the first set value. 2 The predetermined effect of the special aspect can be executed at the same ratio as when the set value is set (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-34 as the fourth embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 is the first. When executing the variable display effect during the period, the part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 at the same ratio regardless of the set value, and the effect control CPU 120 are the first. A part in which the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 is executed at the same ratio regardless of the set value when the variable display effect is executed in two periods)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the appearance status of the predetermined effect of the special mode does not change regardless of the set value at the predetermined number of times, the same can be expected for the execution of the predetermined effect of the special mode.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the eighth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3.
When the predetermined effect execution means executes the predetermined effect at the predetermined number of times among the plurality of times, the second set value is different from the case where the first set value is set among the plurality of set values. It is possible to execute the predetermined effect of the special aspect at a different ratio than when the set value is set (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect during the first period, it is set. It is set when the part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 at different ratios according to the set value and the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect in the second period. The part that executes the reach notice based on the pattern PT-8 or the pattern PT-9 at different rates depending on the set value)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the appearance state of the predetermined effect of the special mode at the predetermined number of times changes according to the set value, it is possible to suppress the predetermined effect from becoming monotonous.

In the fourth embodiment, regardless of whether the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach, the embodiment of determining whether to execute the setting suggestion or the reach notice according to the set value is illustrated in the first period. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the first period, regardless of the fluctuation pattern, it is decided whether to execute the setting suggestion or the reach notice according only to the set value. You may.

Further, in the second period, the embodiment in which the execution of the reach notice is determined in preference to the setting suggestion according to whether the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, in the second period, the reach notice and the setting suggestion may be determined at the same ratio depending on whether the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, in the second period, a mode of determining whether to execute the reach notice or the setting suggestion depending on whether the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach is illustrated, but the present invention illustrates the embodiment. Not limited to this, in the second period, not only when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach, but also when it is non-reach or small hit, either reach notice or setting suggestion is executed. You may decide whether or not.

(Modification 2)
In Examples 2 to 4 of the feature unit 103SG of the above-described embodiment, the effect during variable display can be executed twice during one variable display, and the variable display is started for the fluctuation patterns of normal reach and super reach. The present invention exemplifies a mode in which the variable display effect can be executed in the first period between the timing and the start timing of the reach effect of the normal reach and the second period after the first period. The effect is not limited to the above, and the effect during variable display may be executed three times or more during one variable display. In addition, by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display, the variable display of one variable display is simulated multiple times. It may be executed at the timing corresponding to the re-variation of the decorative pattern in the variation pattern accompanied by the pseudo-continuous effect shown as.

For example, as shown in FIG. 9-38 as a modification 2, from the start timing of the variable display to the start timing of the reach effect of the normal reach for all the fluctuation patterns of non-reach / small hit, normal reach, and super reach. Therefore, the first period before the temporary stop of the first decorative symbol, the second period after the first period and corresponding to the revariable display period after the first temporary stop of the decorative symbol, and It is possible to execute the effect during variable display in the third period, which is after the second period and corresponds to the revariable display period after the third temporary stop of the decorative symbol.

In the second modification, the first period is exemplified before the temporary stop of the first decorative symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first period is the first time. The second period is executed according to the revariable display in the temporary stop of the decorative symbol, the second period is executed according to the revariable display in the temporary stop of the second decorative symbol, and the third period is executed in response to the revariable display in the temporary stop of the decorative symbol. It may be executed according to the revariable display.

In the second modification, in the above-described variable display effect determination process, any of the set values 1 to 6 set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set for the first period regardless of which fluctuation pattern is used. Variable display is being performed according to whether it is set to. For the second and third periods, variable display is being performed based on the set value only when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach. Executes the process of determining the type of effect.

Specifically, in the first period, the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution of the setting suggestion at a rate of 100% regardless of the fluctuation pattern (the execution of the reach notice is not determined). It should be noted that the larger the set value is in the order of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6, the higher the execution rate of the setting suggestion (high) is set. In the second period, only when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach, the execution of the reach notice is determined at a rate of 40%, and the execution of the setting suggestion is determined at a rate of 60%. It should be noted that the larger the set value is in the order of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6, the higher the execution rate of the setting suggestion (high) is set. In the third period, only when the fluctuation pattern is normal reach or super reach, the execution of the reach notice is determined at a rate of 100%, and the execution of the setting suggestion is not determined. It should be noted that the larger the set value is in the order of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6, the higher the execution rate of the setting suggestion (high) is set.

In addition, while the ratio of determining the setting suggestion in the second period and the third period is set to be lower than the ratio of determining the setting suggestion in the first period, the reach notice is determined in the first period. By setting the ratio for determining the reach notice in the second period and the third period to be higher than the ratio, the reach notice is more likely to be executed than the setting suggestion as the effect during variable display is repeatedly executed. Become.

As described above, in the present modification 2, when the variable display effect is executed in the first period, one of the effect patterns PT-1 to PT-7 corresponding to the setting suggestion is determined, and the second period and the second period and the second. When the variable display effect is executed in the three periods, one of the effect patterns PT-1 to PT-9 is determined based on at least the variation pattern. That is, since the determination criteria when the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect mode of the predetermined effect differs between the first period and the second period or the third period, it is possible to prevent the effect during variable display from becoming monotonous.

More specifically, the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the pseudo-continuous effect is a fluctuation pattern in which the expectation of a big hit increases as the number of revariable displays increases in the order of 1, 2, 3, ... Therefore, in the first period corresponding to the first revariable display, there is a high possibility that the fluctuation pattern is not super reach, so the setting suggestion is executed with priority over the reach notice, and the second revariable display is performed. In the second period corresponding to the display, there is a high possibility that the fluctuation pattern is not non-reach, but there is also a possibility of normal reach, so the setting suggestion is executed prior to the reach notice, and the third revariation is performed. In the third period corresponding to the display, since the fluctuation pattern has a high possibility of super reach, the reach notice is executed with priority over the setting suggestion.

By doing so, it is possible to suggest the setting while suppressing the frequent occurrence of reach notice and the decrease in the reliability of the reach notice in the case of a fluctuation pattern accompanied by one or two pseudo-continuous productions. On the other hand, it is possible to prevent the player's expectation for a big hit from being lowered due to frequent setting suggestions in the case of a fluctuation pattern accompanied by three pseudo-continuous effects.

Further, in the present modification 2, in the first period when the jackpot reliability is the lowest, the setting suggestion is preferred because the execution of the setting suggestion is prioritized over the reach notice according to the set value regardless of the fluctuation pattern. On the other hand, in the second period and the third period when the jackpot reliability is higher than the first period, the execution of the reach notice is set according to the fluctuation pattern of normal reach or super reach than the suggestion. Since the decision is given priority, the player's expectation for the big hit can be suitably increased.

In the second modification, the execution of the setting suggestion is determined at a rate of 100% in the first period, but the execution of the setting suggestion is determined at a higher rate than the reach notice in the first period. If so, it does not have to determine the execution of the setting suggestion at a rate of 100%. Further, in the second period, the embodiment in which the execution of the setting suggestion is determined at a higher rate than the reach notice is illustrated, but the execution of the reach notice may be decided at a higher rate than the setting suggestion. Further, in the third period, the form in which the execution of the reach notice is determined at a rate of 100% is illustrated, but in the third period, if the execution of the reach notice is determined at a rate higher than the setting suggestion, the reach notice is announced. Execution does not have to be determined at a 100% rate.

Further, in the present modification 2, in the first period, the execution of the setting suggestion is prioritized over the reach notice according to the set value regardless of the fluctuation pattern, and in the second period and the third period, the fluctuation pattern is determined. Although the embodiment in which the execution of the reach notice is determined in preference to the setting suggestion according to the normal reach or the super reach is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first period and the second period are not limited thereto. Then, regardless of the fluctuation pattern, the execution of the setting suggestion is prioritized over the reach notice according to the set value, and in the third period, the reach notice is executed according to the fluctuation pattern being normal reach or super reach. May be prioritized over the setting suggestion.

Further, in the present modification 2, the embodiment in which the execution of the setting suggestion is determined prior to the reach notice according to the set value is illustrated in the first period, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of the present inventions are not limited to this. In the first number of times (for example, the first period or the second period), if at least the setting suggestion or reach notice is determined according to the set value, the setting suggestion or the setting suggestion or the change pattern is determined according to the set value and the fluctuation pattern. The reach notice may be decided.

Further, in the second modification, in the second period and the third period, the embodiment in which the execution of the reach notice is determined prior to the setting suggestion according to the set value and the fluctuation pattern is illustrated. It is not limited, and in the second number (for example, the second period or the third period) after the first number among the plurality of times, the setting suggestion or the reach notice is determined at least according to the fluctuation pattern. If there is, the setting suggestion or reach notice may be determined according to the set value and the fluctuation pattern.

Further, in Examples 2 to 4, as the variable display effect to be executed in the first period, the setting suggestion is made by making the ratio at which the execution of the setting suggestion is determined higher than the ratio at which the reach notice is determined. Although the embodiment in which the execution is prioritized and determined is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 9-15 as the first embodiment, the variable display to be executed in the first period is in progress. As the effect, the execution of the setting suggestion may be prioritized and determined according to the order of the processes for determining the effect type.

Further, in the second to fourth embodiments, as the variable display effect to be executed in the second period, the reach notice is announced by making the ratio at which the execution of the reach notice is determined higher than the ratio at which the setting suggestion is determined. Although the embodiment in which the execution is prioritized and determined is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 9-15 as the first embodiment, the variable display to be executed in the second period is in progress. As the effect, the execution of the reach notice may be prioritized and determined according to the order of the processes for determining the effect type.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and the present invention may be changed or added without departing from the gist of the present invention. include.

For example, in the above-described embodiment, an embodiment in which the effect during variable display can be executed a plurality of times in one variable display is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of reach notices and setting suggestions are provided. It may be feasible over variable display (see means 5 of the second invention).

Specifically, the CPU 103 holds and stores information about the variable display whose execution is suspended when the start winning prize occurs (for example, a display result (including a jackpot type) or a random number value for determining a fluctuation pattern). The display result and the fluctuation pattern are pre-read and determined based on the extracted random number value, and the determination result is transmitted to the effect control board 12 as an effect control command at the time of starting winning, so that the effect control CPU 120 can perform the effect control CPU 120. When the pre-reading notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended) can be executed, the variable display (target fluctuation) based on the hold memory that is the target of the pre-reading notice is displayed. A reach notice or a setting suggestion as a look-ahead notice for a target change may be executed over a plurality of variable displays until the start.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 displays a plurality of images Z1 indicating the paraglider displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 in the variable display effect in a variable display of the 103SG277 at a predetermined timing. An example of a mode in which a process of executing a process of destroying and changing the number of images Z1 corresponding to the effect patterns PT-1 to PT-9 determined in the medium effect determination process into images Z2 indicating that the images Z1 are dropped has been illustrated. Is not limited to this, and when the operation of the push button 31B (or the stick controller 31A may be used) by the player is detected by the push sensor 35B, the image Z2 is changed at the timing corresponding to the operation. You may let it.

Further, when the effect control CPU 120 changes the image Z2 to the image Z2 at the timing corresponding to the operation by the player as described above in the variable display effect, the player operates the push button 31B during the operation valid period of the push button 31B. As the operation promotion effect for prompting, an operation promotion image (for example, a character image or a button image of "continuous hitting!") May be displayed in the display area of the image display device 5.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 displays an operation promotion image prompting the player to operate the push button 31B when the push sensor 35B detects a specific operation of operating the push button 31B during the operation valid period of the push button 31B. Regardless of whether or not the push button 31B is operated, the effect of changing the image Z1 to the image Z2 (destroying the paraglider and dropping it) can be executed according to the operation of the push button 31B, and the operation of the push button 31B is not detected. In that case, the paraglider may be faded out without being destroyed, that is, the effect during variable display may be terminated without giving a reach notice or setting suggestion.

By doing so, the player who knows the specific motion can execute the effect of changing the image Z1 to the image Z2 at a desired timing by performing the specific motion, so that the game entertainment can be improved. ..

As an operation promoting effect for encouraging the player to operate the push button 31B during the operation valid period of the push button 31B, an operation promoting image for encouraging the player to operate the push button 31B is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the variable display effect is executed without displaying the operation promotion image in the display area of the image display device 5 on which the variable display effect is executed. Even if the operation promotion effect is executed by emitting light from a light emitting unit built in or around the push button 31B provided at a position different from the display area of the image display device 5 that the player pays attention to. Good. By doing so, only the player who knows the specific movement or the player who notices the light emission can see the reach notice and the setting suggestion, so that the interest of the game is improved.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, as a predetermined effect in which the effect result is an advantageous state suggestion result, a form in which a reach notice suggesting the possibility of reaching is applied has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited thereto. The predetermined effect, which is the result of suggesting an advantageous state, is a stop symbol notice that suggests at which symbol the variable display symbol stops, a character notice in which the character appears, and a step in which the notice image changes stepwise. Various advance notices can be applied as long as they are suggestive effects that suggest the possibility of a big hit, such as up notices and group notices in which a group of predetermined characters crosses the display area.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the variable display effect has a common effect period for the reach notice and the setting suggestion, but the effect mode is different between the reach notice and the setting suggestion (corresponding to the common effect period). It may be a separate production (specifically, the reach notice is a suggestion using a character, the setting suggestion is a suggestion by a paraglider, etc.). Then, even when the reach notice and the setting suggestion having different production modes are executed together in the same period (same timing), the reach notice may be executed with priority over the setting suggestion.

For example, the first effect image corresponding to the reach notice and the second effect image corresponding to the setting suggestion unlike the first effect image are displayed together in the display area of the image display device 5 for the same period (same timing). In this case, for example, the visibility of the first effect image is made larger than the display area of the second effect image, or the display mode such as emission color, brightness, and contrast is different. Is made higher than the visibility of the second effect image, so that the reach notice can be executed with priority over the setting suggestion.

When the effect control CPU 120 can draw an image on a plurality of drawing layers, for example, the first effect image corresponding to the reach notice is drawn on the first drawing layer among the plurality of drawing layers and is set. When drawing the second effect image corresponding to the suggestion in the second drawing layer lower than the first drawing layer, the image display device 5 draws the image drawn in the first drawing layer and the second drawing layer. When the images are combined and displayed in duplicate, the visibility of the first effect image becomes higher than the visibility of the second effect image because the first effect image is duplicated in the second effect image. Therefore, it is possible to execute the reach notice in preference to the setting suggestion. Further, when the second effect image is drawn on the upper first drawing layer and the first effect image is drawn on the lower second drawing layer, the opacity of the second effect image is higher than the opacity of the first effect image. By lowering the transmittance (making the transmittance of the second effect image higher than the transmittance of the first effect image), it is possible to execute the reach notice with priority over the setting suggestion.

Further, by making the sound effects such as the volume and sound quality of the sound effects output from the speakers 8L and 8R different between the reach notice and the setting suggestion, the audibility of the sound effect corresponding to the reach notice corresponds to the setting suggestion. It may be higher than the audibility of, that is, the sound effect corresponding to the reach notice may be easier to hear than the sound effect corresponding to the setting suggestion. As a method of increasing the audibility of the sound effect corresponding to the reach notice, for example, not only the volume of the sound effect is increased, but also the volume of other sounds such as BGM is decreased to enhance the audibility. May be good. It should be noted that the sound effect corresponding to the reach notice is output, but the sound effect corresponding to the setting suggestion is not output.

Further, when the effect control CPU 120 has a plurality of reproduction channels (for example, reproduction channels 0 to 31) and can execute control to output the effect sound from the speakers 8L and 8R using any of the reproduction channels. In, for example, the first effect sound corresponding to the reach notice can be reproduced on the first reproduction channel, and the second effect sound corresponding to the setting suggestion can be reproduced on the second reproduction channel different from the first reproduction channel. At the same time, when the first effect sound and the second effect sound are reproduced from different reproduction channels (first reproduction channel and second reproduction channel) at the same timing, the first effect sound reproduced in the first reproduction channel By making the volume and sound quality different (improving) from the volume and sound quality of the second production sound reproduced on the second playback channel, the audibility of the first production sound is made higher than the audibility of the second production sound. It is also possible to prioritize the reach notice over the setting suggestion.

Further, by making the light emitting mode such as the light emitting color, the lighting mode, and the brightness of the game effect lamp 9 different between the reach notice and the setting suggestion, the visibility of the light emitting mode corresponding to the reach notice is the visual recognition of the sound effect corresponding to the setting suggestion. It may be higher than the sex, that is, the light emitting mode corresponding to the reach notice may be easier to see than the light emitting mode corresponding to the setting suggestion. It should be noted that the light is turned on in response to the reach notice, but the light is turned off without being turned on in response to the setting suggestion.

That is, to execute the reach notice with priority over the setting suggestion means that the effect result is either the advantageous state suggestion result or the setting suggestion result as described in Examples 1 to 4 and Modifications 1 and 2. In some cases, not only the execution rate of the reach notice is increased, but also when the effect result is both the advantageous state suggestion result and the setting suggestion result, the effect mode such as the reach notice display, sound, and light is more than the setting suggestion effect mode. Including prioritization. Furthermore, executing the reach notice with priority over the setting suggestion means that the execution ratio, display, and sound are such that the effect of the reach notice given to the player is higher than the effect of the setting suggestion given to the player. It also includes performing different production modes such as light, light, and movement of a movable body.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the setting suggestion, as a suggestion regarding the setting in the CPU 103, a mode suggesting which of 1 to 6 is set as the set value is exemplified, but the present invention is limited to this. However, as a suggestion regarding the setting in the CPU 103, for example, the possibility that the set value has been changed or the possibility that the set value has not been changed (deferred) may be suggested.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a mode in which the jackpot gaming state is applied is illustrated as an example of an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the prize ball is paid out more than in the normal state. A high base state (time saving state) that makes it easier for the conditions to be met, a high probability gaming state (high probability state) that has a high probability of becoming a big hit game state, a high probability low base state (latent probability change state), and a special reach state (for example). , Super reach, etc.), including the state where the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern based on the jackpot fluctuation pattern.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko game machine 1 is illustrated as an example of the game machine, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a game ball having a predetermined number of balls is a game machine. The number of rented balls that are circulated inside and lent out in response to the player's request for rent and the number of prize balls given in response to winning are added, while the number of game balls used in the game is subtracted. The present invention can also be applied to a so-called enclosed gaming machine that is stored and stored. In these enclosed game machines, points and points are given to the player instead of the game ball, and the points and points given are given to the game value.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a spherical game ball (pachinko ball) has been applied as an example of the game medium, but the present invention is not limited to the spherical game medium, and for example, a non-spherical game such as a medal. It may be a medium.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko game machine is applied as an example of the game machine, but for example, the game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the game value. At the same time, one game is completed by deriving the variable display result to the variable display device capable of variablely displaying a plurality of types of symbols that can be identified by each, and according to the variable display result derived to the variable display device. It can also be applied to slot machines that can generate prizes.

Further, in the slot machine, the advantageous state for the player is a state in which a big bonus bonus or a regular bonus that increases the winning probability of a small winning combination, or a state in which an operation mode advantageous for the player is notified (for example, an AT (assist time) state). ), A state in which an operation mode advantageous to the player is notified, and a state in which the winning probability of the replay combination is increased (for example, an ART (assist replay time) state) and the like are included.

In addition, when the predetermined effect of the present invention can be executed on a slot machine, a special role such as a big bonus bonus or a regular bonus is internally won, but the combination of symbols is not aligned and is carried over to the special role. Suggestion effects suggesting the possibility that the combination of corresponding symbols may be derived and displayed, and setting suggestions suggesting the setting values set in the slot machine can be executed over multiple games (variable display multiple times), or in the AT state. It is possible to execute the game over a plurality of games (multiple variable displays) until the AT state or the ART state is won and the AT state or the ART state is started.

(Explanation of feature 097IW)
Next, the feature unit 097IW will be described.

(Variation pattern table)
FIG. 10-1 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the fluctuation pattern table in the feature unit 097IW. Of these, FIG. 10-1 (A) shows a specific example of the variation pattern table for detachment. Further, FIG. 10-1 (B) shows a specific example of the fluctuation pattern table for big hits. As shown in FIG. 10-1 (A), in this example, when the deviation occurs, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns PA1 to PA5. Further, as shown in FIG. 10-1 (B), in this example, in the case of a big hit, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns PB2 to PB5.

In this example, the variation pattern PA1 is a variation pattern that specifies normal variation. Further, the fluctuation patterns PA2 and PB2 are fluctuation patterns that specify that normal reach is executed during the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol. Further, the fluctuation patterns PA3 and PB3 are fluctuation patterns that specify that Super Reach A is executed during the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol. Further, the fluctuation patterns PA4 and PB4 are fluctuation patterns that specify that Super Reach B is executed during the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol. Further, the fluctuation patterns PA5 and PB5 are fluctuation patterns that specify that Super Reach C is executed during the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 10-1, when the super reach (super reach A, super reach B, super reach C) is executed, the expectation for the big hit is compared with the case where the normal reach is executed. The degree (reliability) is high. Of the three types of super reach, when Super Reach C is executed, the expectation (reliability) for the jackpot is the highest, and when Super Reach B is executed, the expectation (reliability) for the jackpot is next. It is high, and when Super Reach A is executed, the degree of expectation (reliability) for a big hit is the lowest. Therefore, in this example, the normal reach and the super reach (super reach A, super reach B, super reach C) are effects that suggest whether or not the hit is a big hit, and which type of reach is executed. The degree of expectation (reliability) for the jackpot differs depending on the type.

Next, the operation of the effect control means (effect control CPU 120) will be described.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 10-2 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first reads the variable pattern command from the variable pattern command storage area (step 097IWS101). Next, the effect control CPU 120 receives the variation pattern command (effect control command for designating the variation pattern) read in step 097IWS101, and the data stored in the display result specification command storage area (that is, the received display result specification command (that is, the received display result specification command). The display result (stop symbol) of the decorative symbol is determined according to whether or not it is a big hit, whether or not it is a small hit, and the effect control command that specifies the big hit type) (step 097IWS102). That is, by executing the process of step 097IWS102 by the effect control CPU 120, the display result of the variable display of the identification information (stop of the decorative symbol) according to the variable display pattern (variable pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determining means. A display result determining means for determining a symbol) is realized. The effect control CPU 120 stores data indicating the determined stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. In step 097IWS102, the effect control CPU 120 may determine whether or not it is a big hit based on the received variation pattern command, and determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based only on the variation pattern command. ..

In step 097IWS102, for example, when the received display result designation command indicates a probability variation jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 has a decorative symbol having the same probability variation symbol (for example, an odd number symbol) as the stop symbol. Determine the combination. Further, for example, when the received display result designation command normally indicates a big hit, the effect control CPU 120 is a combination of decorative symbols in which the three symbols are the same as the stop symbol (for example, even-numbered symbols). To determine. Further, for example, when the received display result designation command indicates a small hit, the small hit symbol (for example, a combination of the symbols of "135") is determined as the stop symbol. If the received display result specification command indicates an error, a combination of decorative symbols other than the above is determined. However, when accompanied by a reach effect, a combination of decorative symbols in which the two left and right symbols are aligned is determined.

The effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, a random number for determining a stop symbol, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating a combination of decorative symbols and a numerical value are associated with each other to generate a stop symbol for the decorative symbol. decide. That is, the stop symbol is determined by selecting the data indicating the combination of the decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value corresponding to the extracted random number.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes a chance-up effect setting process for setting the presence / absence and type of the chance-up effect during super reach (step 097IWS103). In this example, the “chance-up effect” is an effect that is executed in such a manner that the expectation for the big hit is further increased (chance is increased) during the execution of the super reach.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects the process table according to the chance-up effect if the variation pattern and the execution of the chance-up effect are determined (step 097IWS104). Then, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 097IWS105).

The process table is a table in which process data to be referred to when the effect control CPU 120 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (effect component) such as the image display device 5 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of a collection of a plurality of combinations of process timer setting values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data. The display control execution data includes data and the like indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the decorative symbol. Specifically, data related to the change of the display screen of the image display device 5 is described. Further, in the process timer set value, the fluctuation time in the mode of the fluctuation is set. The effect control CPU 120 refers to the process table and controls the display control to display the decorative symbol in the variation mode set in the display control execution data only for the time set in the process timer set value. Further, the process table is stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12. In addition, the process table is prepared according to each fluctuation pattern.

In the process table used when executing the effect control for the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the reach effect, the left symbol is stopped and displayed when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, and the right symbol is stopped when the predetermined time elapses. Process data indicating that it is to be displayed is set.

Further, in particular, in the case of fluctuation patterns with super reach A to C (variation patterns PA3 to PA5, PB3 to PB5), a process table including super reach A to C was selected in step 097IWS104, and the process table was selected. By executing the process of step 097IWS106 and step 097IWS305 of the variable display effect processing (step S172) according to the process table, super reach A to C are executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol.

Further, when executing Super Reach A to C, if the execution of the chance-up effect is determined in the chance-up effect setting process of step 097IWS103, the process table including the chance-up effect is selected in step 097IWS104. By executing the processing of step 097IWS106 and step 097IWS305 of the variable display effect processing (step S172) according to the selected process table, super reach A to C are executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the chance is increased. The production is executed.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 serves as an effect device (image display device 5 as an effect component, as an effect component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Control of various lamps and speakers 8L, 8R as production parts) is executed (step 097IWS106).

In this feature unit 097IW, the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern command so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed according to the variation pattern corresponding to one-to-one. However, the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern command. The fluctuation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns corresponding to.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command in the fluctuation time timer (step 097IWS107). Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect process flag to “2” (step 097IWS108), and ends the variable display start setting process.

(Chance up production setting process)
FIG. 10-3 is a flowchart showing the chance-up effect setting process (step 097IWS103). In the chance-up effect setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command is a variation pattern (variation pattern PA3, PB3) including the super reach A (step 097IWS201). ). If it is a variation pattern including the super reach A, the effect control CPU 120 selects the chance-up effect determination table A as a table for determining the presence / absence and type of the chance-up effect (step 097IWS202). Then, the process proceeds to step 097IWS207.

If it is not a fluctuation pattern including super reach A, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern command is a fluctuation pattern including super reach B (variation patterns PA4, PB4) ( Step 097IWS203). If the variation pattern includes the super reach B, the effect control CPU 120 selects the chance-up effect determination table B as a table for determining the presence / absence and type of the chance-up effect (step 097IWS204). Then, the process proceeds to step 097IWS207.

If it is not a fluctuation pattern including super reach B, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern command is a fluctuation pattern including super reach C (variation patterns PA5 and PB5) ( Step 097IWS205). If the variation pattern includes the super reach C, the effect control CPU 120 selects the chance-up effect determination table C as a table for determining the presence / absence and type of the chance-up effect (step 097IWS206). Then, the process proceeds to step 097IWS207.

If the variation pattern does not include the super reach C (N in step 097IWS205), that is, if the variation pattern includes the non-reach loss or the normal reach, the chance-up effect setting process is terminated as it is.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs a lottery process based on random numbers using the chance-up effect determination table selected in steps 097IWS202, S204, and S206, and determines the presence / absence and type of the chance-up effect (step 097IWS207).

10-4 to 10-6 are explanatory views showing a specific example of the chance-up effect determination table. Of these, FIG. 10-4 shows a specific example of the chance-up effect determination table A selected in step 097IWS202. Further, FIG. 10-5 shows a specific example of the chance-up effect determination table B selected in step 097IWS204. Further, FIG. 10-6 shows a specific example of the chance-up effect determination table C selected in step 097IWS206.

First, the chance-up effect determination table A (chance-up effect determination table for super reach A) will be described with reference to FIG. 10-4. As shown in FIG. 10-4, in the chance-up effect determination table A, determination values are assigned to each of the chance-up effect and the chance-up effects A1 to A7.

As shown in FIG. 10-4, in this example, when Super Reach A is executed, in principle, four images of Image A1, Image A2, Image A3, and Image A4 are displayed during the execution of Super Reach A. It is displayed in order. Further, as shown in FIG. 10-4, these images A1, image A2, image A3, and image A4 are displayed in any display color of white, blue, green, or red in principle. Of these display colors, white corresponds to the normal mode, and when these images A1, image A2, image A3, and image A4 are displayed in the white display color, it corresponds to no chance-up effect. Further, among these display colors, blue, green, and red correspond to special aspects, and when these images A1, image A2, image A3, and image A4 are displayed in blue, green, and red, chances are increased. Corresponds to the state in which the production is being executed. Therefore, in this example, when the image A1, the image A2, the image A3, and the image A4 are displayed in blue, green, or red during the super reach A, the expectation for the big hit is further increased (chance is increased).

In this example, the image A1 displayed in the super reach A, the image A2, the image A3, the image A4, the image B1 displayed in the super reach B described later, the image B2, the image B3, and the super described later. The image C1 and the image C2 displayed during the reach C are also referred to as a chance-up image.

As shown in FIG. 10-4, in this example, there are seven types of chance-up effects A1 to A7 executed during the super reach A. The "chance-up effect A1" is a chance-up effect in which the image A1, the image A2, the image A3, and the image A4 are displayed in a blue display color. Further, the "chance-up effect A2" is a chance-up effect in which the image A1, the image A2, the image A3, and the image A4 are displayed in a green display color. Further, the "chance-up effect A3" is a chance-up effect in which the image A1, the image A2, the image A3, and the image A4 are displayed in a red display color.

As shown in FIG. 10-4, in this example, when the chance-up effect A2 is executed, the expectation (reliability) for the jackpot is higher than when the chance-up effect A1 is executed. Further, in this example, when the chance-up effect A3 is executed, the degree of expectation (reliability) for the jackpot is higher than when the chance-up effect A2 is executed. Therefore, in this example, when the chance-up effect is executed, the expectation (reliability) for the jackpot is highest when each chance-up image is displayed in red, and each chance-up image is displayed in green. Next, the expectation (reliability) for the jackpot is the highest, and when each chance-up image is displayed in blue, the expectation (reliability) for the jackpot is the lowest (however, each chance-up image is white). Expectation (reliability) for big hits is higher than when it is displayed).

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-4, in this example, even if the chance-up image is displayed in blue, the chance-up image displayed thereafter may be displayed in green or red. The "chance-up effect A4" is a chance-up effect in which the images A1 and A2 are displayed in a blue display color, and then the images A3 and A4 are displayed in a green display color. Further, in the "chance-up effect A5", after the images A1 and A2 are displayed in the blue display color, the image A3 is displayed in the green display color, and the image A4 is further displayed in the red display color. It is an up production. In this example, even if the chance-up image is displayed in blue and the chance-up effect is started, the chance-up image displayed after that may be displayed in green or red, so the degree of expectation (reliability) for the big hit. Even when the chance-up image is displayed with a display color with a low), it is possible to have a sense of expectation for the chance-up image displayed thereafter.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-4, in this example, even when the display color of the chance-up image changes, the display color with high expectation (reliability) for the jackpot changes from the display color with low expectation. (For example, after the chance-up image is displayed in red, the chance-up image displayed after that is not displayed in blue or green). With such a configuration, in this example, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged after the expectation for the big hit has increased.

Further, in this example, in principle, different chance-up images are displayed depending on which of Super Reach A to C, but a common chance-up image is displayed for Super Reach A and Super Reach B. May occur. The “chance-up effect A6” is a chance-up effect in which the image X that can be displayed in common with the super reach B is displayed instead of the image A1, and then the image A2, the image A3, and the image A4 are displayed in order. In this example, when a common image X is displayed, each chance-up image (image X, image A2, image A3, image A4) is displayed in a rainbow-colored display color. By displaying in a rainbow-colored display color different from blue, green, and red in this way, the player can be made to recognize that the image of the common mode is displayed as the chance-up image.

In this example, even when the chance-up image is displayed in rainbow color, the expectation for the big hit is further increased (chance is increased), so that the rainbow-colored display color also corresponds to the special mode.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 10-4, even if the chance-up image is displayed in white (normal mode), the chance-up image displayed thereafter may be displayed in red. The “chance-up effect A7” is a chance-up effect in which the image A1, the image A2, and the image A3 are displayed in a white display color, and then the image A4 is displayed in a red display color. Further, as shown in FIG. 10-4, in this example, when the chance-up effect A7 is executed (when the display color of the chance-up image changes from white to red), it is determined only when it becomes a big hit. There is no value allocation, and the jackpot is fixed. With such a configuration, in this example, the expectation can be maintained even when the chance-up image is displayed in white (normal mode).

Next, the chance-up effect determination table B (chance-up effect determination table for super reach B) will be described with reference to FIG. 10-5. As shown in FIG. 10-5, in the chance-up effect determination table B, determination values are assigned to each of the chance-up effect and the chance-up effects B1 to B7.

As shown in FIG. 10-5, in this example, when Super Reach B is executed, in principle, three images, Image B1, Image B2, and Image B3, are displayed in order during the execution of Super Reach B. To. Further, as shown in FIG. 10-5, these images B1, image B2, and image B3 are displayed in any display color of white, blue, green, or red in principle. Of these display colors, white corresponds to the normal mode, and when these images B1, image B2, and image B3 are displayed in the white display color, it corresponds to no chance-up effect. Further, among these display colors, blue, green, and red correspond to special modes, and when these images B1, image B2, and image B3 are displayed in blue, green, and red, a chance-up effect is executed. Corresponds to the state of being done. Therefore, in this example, when the image B1, the image B2, and the image B3 are displayed in blue, green, or red during the super reach B, the expectation for the big hit is further increased (chance is increased).

As shown in FIG. 10-5, in this example, there are seven types of chance-up effects B1 to B7 executed during the super reach B. The "chance-up effect B1" is a chance-up effect in which the image B1, the image B2, and the image B3 are displayed in a blue display color. Further, the "chance-up effect B2" is a chance-up effect in which the image B1, the image B2, and the image B3 are displayed in a green display color. Further, the "chance-up effect B3" is a chance-up effect in which the image B1, the image B2, and the image B3 are displayed in a red display color.

As shown in FIG. 10-5, in this example, when the chance-up effect B2 is executed, the expectation (reliability) for the jackpot is higher than when the chance-up effect B1 is executed. Further, in this example, when the chance-up effect B3 is executed, the degree of expectation (reliability) for the big hit is higher than when the chance-up effect B2 is executed. Therefore, in this example, when the chance-up effect is executed, the expectation (reliability) for the jackpot is highest when each chance-up image is displayed in red, and each chance-up image is displayed in green. Next, the expectation (reliability) for the jackpot is the highest, and when each chance-up image is displayed in blue, the expectation (reliability) for the jackpot is the lowest (however, each chance-up image is white). Expectation (reliability) for big hits is higher than when it is displayed).

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-5, in this example, even if the chance-up image is displayed in blue, the chance-up image displayed thereafter may be displayed in green or red. The "chance-up effect B4" is a chance-up effect in which the image B1 is displayed in a blue display color and then the image B2 and the image B3 are displayed in a green display color. Further, the "chance-up effect B5" is a chance-up effect in which the image B1 is displayed in the blue display color, the image B2 is displayed in the green display color, and the image B3 is displayed in the red display color. is there. In this example, even if the chance-up image is displayed in blue and the chance-up effect is started, the chance-up image displayed after that may be displayed in green or red, so the degree of expectation (reliability) for the big hit. Even when the chance-up image is displayed with a display color with a low), it is possible to have a sense of expectation for the chance-up image displayed thereafter.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-5, in this example, even when the display color of the chance-up image changes, the display color with high expectation (reliability) for the jackpot changes from the display color with low expectation. (For example, after the chance-up image is displayed in red, the chance-up image displayed after that is not displayed in blue or green). With such a configuration, in this example, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged after the expectation for the big hit has increased.

Further, in this example, in principle, different chance-up images are displayed depending on which of Super Reach A to C, but a common chance-up image is displayed for Super Reach A and Super Reach B. May occur. The "chance-up effect B6" is a chance-up effect in which the image X that can be displayed in common with the super reach A is displayed instead of the image B1, and then the image B2 and the image B3 are displayed in order. In this example, when a common image X is displayed, each chance-up image (image X, image B2, image B3) is displayed in a rainbow-colored display color. By displaying in a rainbow-colored display color different from blue, green, and red in this way, the player can be made to recognize that the image of the common mode is displayed as the chance-up image.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 10-5, even if the chance-up image is displayed in white (normal mode), the chance-up image displayed thereafter may be displayed in red. The "chance-up effect B7" is a chance-up effect in which the image B1 and the image B2 are displayed in a white display color, and then the image B3 is displayed in a red display color. Further, as shown in FIG. 10-5, in this example, when the chance-up effect B7 is executed (when the display color of the chance-up image changes from white to red), it is determined only when it becomes a big hit. There is no value allocation, and the jackpot is fixed. With such a configuration, in this example, the expectation can be maintained even when the chance-up image is displayed in white (normal mode).

Next, the chance-up effect determination table C (chance-up effect determination table for super reach C) will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-6. As shown in FIG. 10-6, determination values are assigned to the chance-up effect determination table C for no chance-up effect and for chance-up effects C1 to C5, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 10-6, in this example, when the super reach C is executed, in principle, the two images of the image C1 and the image C2 are displayed in order during the execution of the super reach C. Further, as shown in FIG. 10-6, these images C1 and C2 are displayed in any display color of white, blue, green or red in principle. Of these display colors, white corresponds to the normal mode, and when these images C1 and C2 are displayed in the white display color, it corresponds to no chance-up effect. Further, among these display colors, blue, green, and red correspond to special modes, and when these images C1 and images C2 are displayed in blue, green, and red, a chance-up effect is executed. Corresponds to the state. Therefore, in this example, when the image C1 or the image C2 is displayed in blue, green, or red during the super reach C, the expectation for the big hit is further increased (chance is increased).

As shown in FIG. 10-6, in this example, there are five types of chance-up effects C1 to C5 executed during Super Reach C. The "chance-up effect C1" is a chance-up effect in which the image C1 and the image C2 are displayed in a blue display color. Further, the "chance-up effect C2" is a chance-up effect in which the image C1 and the image C2 are displayed in a green display color. Further, the "chance-up effect C3" is a chance-up effect in which the image C1 and the image C2 are displayed in a red display color.

As shown in FIG. 10-6, in this example, when the chance-up effect C2 is executed, the expectation (reliability) for the jackpot is higher than when the chance-up effect C1 is executed. Further, in this example, when the chance-up effect C3 is executed, the degree of expectation (reliability) for the jackpot is higher than when the chance-up effect C2 is executed. Therefore, in this example, when the chance-up effect is executed, the expectation (reliability) for the jackpot is highest when each chance-up image is displayed in red, and each chance-up image is displayed in green. Next, the expectation (reliability) for the jackpot is the highest, and when each chance-up image is displayed in blue, the expectation (reliability) for the jackpot is the lowest (however, each chance-up image is white). Expectation (reliability) for big hits is higher than when it is displayed).

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-6, in this example, even if the chance-up image is displayed in green, the chance-up image displayed thereafter may be displayed in red. The “chance-up effect C4” is a chance-up effect in which the image C1 is displayed in the green display color and then the image C2 is displayed in the red display color. In this example, even if the chance-up image is displayed in green and the chance-up effect is started, the chance-up image displayed after that may be displayed in red, so the degree of expectation (reliability) for the jackpot is high. Even when the chance-up image is displayed with a low display color, it is possible to have a sense of expectation for the chance-up image displayed thereafter.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-6, in this example, even when the display color of the chance-up image changes, the display color with a high degree of expectation (reliability) for a big hit changes from a display color with a low degree of expectation (reliability). (For example, after the chance-up image is displayed in red, the chance-up image displayed after that is not displayed in blue or green). With such a configuration, in this example, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged after the expectation for the big hit has increased.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 10-6, even if the chance-up image is displayed in white (normal mode), the chance-up image displayed thereafter may be displayed in red. The “chance-up effect C5” is a chance-up effect in which the image C1 is displayed in a white display color and then the image C2 is displayed in a red display color. Further, as shown in FIG. 10-6, in this example, when the chance-up effect C5 is executed (when the display color of the chance-up image changes from white to red), it is determined only when it becomes a big hit. There is no value allocation, and the jackpot is fixed. With such a configuration, in this example, the expectation can be maintained even when the chance-up image is displayed in white (normal mode).

In this example, the presence / absence of the chance-up effect and the display color of each chance-up image are collectively determined by one lottery process using the chance-up effect determination tables A to C shown in FIGS. 10-4 to 10-6. However, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, when executing Super Reach A, if it is decided to execute the chance-up effect in one lottery process, the display colors of each chance-up image (image A1, image A2, image A3, image A4) are individually displayed. It may be configured to be decided by the lottery process of.

Further, in this example, when the display color of the chance-up image changes, it is set in advance so that the display color having a high expectation (reliability) for a big hit does not change to a display color having a low degree of expectation (reliability). Although the case where the pattern (chance-up effect A4, A5, B4, B5, C4) is determined is shown, it is not limited to such a determination method. For example, if the display color of each chance-up image is determined by individual lottery processing, prohibition processing is performed so that the chance-up image displayed later does not become lower than the chance-up image displayed earlier. May be configured to do. In this case, for example, when the display color of the chance-up image to be displayed first is determined and the display color of the chance-up image to be displayed later is determined, the expectation is higher than or the same as the display color. By performing the lottery process using the determination table including only the display color, the display color of the chance-up image to be displayed later may be determined. Further, for example, when a display color having a lower expectation than the chance-up image displayed earlier is determined, the determination result is discarded, and a display color having a higher expectation or the same expectation than the display color is displayed. It may be configured to repeatedly execute the process of determining the display color of the chance-up image to be displayed later until the determination is made.

Further, the types of chance-up effects are not limited to those shown in FIGS. 10-4 to 10-6. For example, in this example, when the display color of the chance-up image changes (chance-up effect A4, A5, B4, B5, C4), the display color changes stepwise in the order of blue, green, and red. However, for example, it may be configured so that there is a pattern in which green is skipped and the color changes from blue to red.

Further, for example, in this example, when the display color of the chance-up image changes (chance-up effect A4, A5, B4, B5, C4), after the chance-up image is displayed in the earlier display color, it is later. The case where the displayed chance-up image is configured to be displayed in a different display color from the previous one (the display color of the once-displayed chance-up image itself does not change in the middle) is shown. It is not limited to any aspect. For example, when executing Super Reach A, the image A1 may be displayed in blue as a chance-up image, and then the display color of the image A1 itself may be configured to have a pattern of changing to green or red. ..

Further, in this example, when super reach A and B are executed, there is a case where a common image X is displayed as the first chance-up image (chance-up effects A6 and B6). However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, all the chance-up images displayed in Super Reach A and B may be configured to be displayed in the common image X, or two or three chance-up images may be displayed in the common image X. It may be configured as follows.

Further, in this example, the common image X may be displayed only when the super reach A and B are executed, but the common image X is also displayed when the super reach C is executed. May be configured so that there is a pattern in which is displayed.

Further, in this example, when the chance-up image is displayed in white (normal mode) and then the chance-up image is displayed in red (special mode) (chance-up effects A7, B7, C5), the jackpot is confirmed. Although the case of allocating the judgment value as described above is shown, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, even when the chance-up image changes from white (normal mode) to red (special mode), it may be configured so that it may shift with a low probability.

Further, for example, the chance-up image may be configured to have a pattern that changes from white (normal aspect) to blue, green, or rainbow color as a special aspect.

Further, even when the chance-up image changes from blue to green or red or from green to red as in the chance-up effect A4, A5, B4, B5, C4, the jackpot is confirmed. It may be configured to allocate the judgment value so that the judgment value may be assigned.

Further, in this example, the case where three types of super reach A to C are executablely configured has been shown, but the configuration is not limited to such a mode, and for example, four or more types of super reach can be configured to be executable. Alternatively, only two types of super reach may be configured to be executable. Further, a type of super reach that does not display the chance-up image and does not execute the chance-up effect may be provided.

Further, in this example, the case where the chance-up image can be displayed up to 4 times during the super reach is shown, but not limited to such a mode, the chance-up image can be displayed 5 times or more. Good.

As described above, various modes can be considered as the mode of the chance-up effect.

(Variable display during production processing)
FIG. 10-7 is a flowchart showing the variable display during effect processing (step S172) in the effect control process process. In the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the process timer value (step 097IWS301) and 1 subtracts the variable time timer value (step 097IWS302). When the process timer times out (step 097IWS303), the process data is switched. That is, the next set process timer setting value in the process table is set in the process timer (step 097IWS304). Further, the control state for the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, and the sound number data set next (step 097IWS305).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not any one of Super Reach A to C is being executed (step 097IWS306). If none of Super Reach A to C is being executed, the process proceeds to step 097IWS316. If any one of Super Reach A to C is being executed, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is the display timing of any of the chance-up images (step 097IWS307). If it is the display timing of the chance-up image, the effect control CPU 120 determines the display color (white, blue, green, red,) of the chance-up image to be displayed in the image display device 5 by the chance-up effect setting process. Control to display in (rainbow color) (step 097IWS308). Further, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to display the effect display around the chance-up image in the same display color (white, blue, green, red, rainbow) as the displayed chance-up image. (Step 097IWS309).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the display color of the displayed chance-up image or effect image is white (normal mode) (step 097IWS310). If the display color is white (normal aspect), the process proceeds to step 097IWS316. If the display color is not white (normal mode) (that is, if it is a special mode), the effect control CPU 120 controls to output a predetermined notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R (step 097IWS311). Then, the process proceeds to step 097IWS316.

By executing the processing of steps 097IWS310 and S311, in this example, the notification sound is output only when the chance-up image is displayed in a special mode, so that the player is aware only when the expectation for the big hit is high. Can be made to.

If it is not the display timing of the chance-up image (N in step 097IWS307), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is within the operation valid period of the push button 31B (step 097IWS312). In this example, an operation valid period is provided in the latter half of the production period of each of the super reach A to C, and when the push button 31B is pressed within the operation valid period, or without the push button 31B being operated. When the operation valid period elapses, the image display device 5 controls to display a success / failure result notification that notifies whether or not a big hit is achieved. In this example, the display timing of each chance-up image is set in the first half of the production period of each super reach A to C (the period before the operation valid period), and each chance-up image can be displayed. It is configured so that the period during which the operation is valid and the period during which the result notification can be displayed do not overlap.

If it is not within the operation valid period, the process proceeds to step 097IWS316. Within the operation valid period, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the push button 31 is turned on (specifically, whether or not the detection signal from the push sensor 35B is input) (step 097IWS313). ). If the push button 31 is turned on, the process proceeds to step 097IWS315.

If the push button 31 is not turned on, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is the end timing of the operation valid period (step 097IWS314). If it is not the end timing of the operation valid period, the process proceeds to step 097IWS316. If the push button 31 is turned on (Y in step 097IWS313), or if the end timing of the operation valid period is reached (Y in step 097IWS314), the effect control CPU 120 determines the result in the image display device 5. Control to display the notification (step 097IWS315).

In step 097IWS315, the effect control CPU 120 confirms, for example, the display result indicated by the display result designation command, and if it becomes a big hit, controls to display a character display such as "big hit" as a hit / fail result notification. .. In addition, in the case of a loss, control is performed to display a character display such as "miss" as a notification of the result of success or failure.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the fluctuation time timer has timed out (step 097IWS316). If the variation time timer has timed out, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect process flag to "3" (step 097IWS317), and ends the variable display effect process.

(Direction execution timing)
Next, the display timing of the chance-up image during the execution of Super Reach and the notification of the result of success / failure will be described. FIG. 10-8 is a timing chart for explaining the display timing of the chance-up image during execution of the super reach and the notification of the result of success / failure. In the example shown in FIG. 10-8, as an example, a case where the chance-up effect A3 is executed when the super reach A is executed is shown.

In the example shown in FIG. 10-8, at the timing T1, the image display device 5 starts the variable display of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols, and then at the timing T2, the reach is established and the normal reach is started. Then, at the timing T3, when the development timing to the super reach comes, the super reach A is started.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-8, the images A1, the image A2, the image A3, and the image A4 can be displayed as the chance-up images during the execution of the super reach A. As shown in FIG. 10-8, in this example, the images A1, the image A2, the image A3, and the image A4 are displayed in the period T3 to T4 in the first half of the production period of the super reach A before the operation valid period. Is possible. Further, as shown in FIG. 10-8, in this example, when the chance-up images (image A1, image A2, image A3, image A4) are displayed, the effect image is also displayed at the same time. In addition, the effect image is displayed in the same display color as the chance-up image. In the example shown in FIG. 10-8, the case where the effect image is displayed in red corresponding to each chance-up image being displayed in red is shown.

Note that FIG. 10-8 is an example. When each chance amplifier image is displayed in green, the effect image is also displayed in green, and when each chance amplifier image is displayed in blue, the effect image is also displayed. If it is displayed in blue and each chance amplifier image is displayed in rainbow color, the effect image is also displayed in rainbow color, and if each chance amplifier image is displayed in white (normal mode), the effect image is also displayed. Displayed in white (normal aspect).

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-8, in the latter half of the effect period of Super Reach A, for example, when the operation valid period is started from the timing T4 and the pressing operation of the push button 31 is detected within the operation valid period, The display of the success / failure result notification is started from the timing (timing T5) when the pressing operation of the push button 31 is detected. If the push button 31B is not operated within the operation valid period, the display of the success / failure result notification is started at the end of the operation valid period. Then, when the variation time ends (timing T6), the variation display of the decorative symbol ends, and the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed on the image display device 5.

In this example, when the operation is not performed, the display of the success / failure result notification is started at the end of the operation valid period, but the case is not limited to such a mode and the operation is not performed. May be configured not to display the result notification.

As shown in FIG. 10-8, in this example, the chance-up image and the effect image can be displayed in the production in the first half of the execution period of the super reach, and the pass / fail result notification can be displayed in the production in the latter half. is there. In addition, it is restricted not to display chance-up images and effect images in the production during the latter half of the period. Therefore, the player's consciousness can be concentrated on the notification of the result of success or failure.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 10-8, the chance-up image and the effect image can be displayed only in the effect of the first half of the execution period of the super reach, and the result is notified in the effect of the latter half. Is shown, but is not limited to such a mode. For example, regardless of the timing during the execution period of Super Reach, the chance-up image or effect image can be displayed, and when the display timing of the chance-up image or effect image comes, the operation validity period If the inside or the result notification is being displayed, the prohibition process may be performed so as not to display the chance-up image or the effect image.

Further, for example, instead of displaying the chance-up image or the effect image at all during the operation valid period or the display of the pass / fail result notification, the chance-up image or the effect image may be displayed at an extremely low rate. .. Further, for example, when the operation valid period or the success / failure result notification is being displayed, the chance-up image or the effect image may be displayed in an inconspicuous display mode such as reducing the display size. It suffices if the display of the chance-up image or the effect image is restricted in some form.

(Example of super reach production)
Next, the production mode of super reach will be described. 10-9 to 10-16 are explanatory views for explaining a specific example of the effect mode of the super reach. Of these, FIGS. 10-9 and 10-10 show specific examples of the production mode of Super Reach A accompanied by a chance-up effect. Further, FIGS. 10-11 and 10-12 show specific examples of the production mode of Super Reach B accompanied by the chance-up effect. Further, FIGS. 10-13 and 10-14 show specific examples of the production mode of Super Reach A without the chance-up effect. Further, FIGS. 10-15 and 10-16 show specific examples of the production mode of Super Reach B without the chance-up effect. In FIGS. 10-9 to 10-16, the display screens change in the order of (A), (B), (C), and so on.

First, with reference to FIGS. 10-9 and 10-10, an effect mode of Super Reach A accompanied by a chance-up effect will be described. In the examples shown in FIGS. 10-9 and 10-10, a case where the execution of the chance-up effect A3 is determined will be described as an example. As shown in FIG. 10-9 (A), the image display device 5 executes variable display of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols, and as shown in FIG. 10-9 (B), the left and right decorative symbols are the same. The symbol (in this example, the symbol "7") is stopped and displayed to reach the reach state. Next, it is the timing of development to Super Reach A, and as shown in FIG. 10-9 (C), a predetermined character image 097IW11 is displayed on the image display device 5, and characters such as "Super Reach A rush" are displayed as character lines. The display is displayed and Super Reach A is started. In this example, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (C), when Super Reach A is started, the variation display of the decorative symbol is reduced and displayed on the upper left edge of the display screen of the image display device 5. It is shown.

Next, when the display timing of the image A1 comes, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (D), the image display device 5 displays the image 097IW12 imitating a bird as the image A1. Further, since the execution of the chance-up effect A3 has been decided, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (D), the bird wing portion is displayed in the red display color in the image 097IW12 (see step 097IWS308). .. Further, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (D), the effect image 097IW13 is displayed in a red display color around the image 097IW12 (see step 097IWS309). Further, since the chance-up image and the effect image are displayed in a special mode, the notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R (see step 097IWS311).

Next, when the display timing of the image A2 comes, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (E), the image display device 5 displays the image 097IW14 that imitates a bird different from the image A1 as the image A2. Further, since the execution of the chance-up effect A3 has been decided, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (E), the bird wing portion is displayed in the red display color in the image 097IW14 (see step 097IWS308). .. Further, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (E), the effect image 097IW15 is displayed in a red display color around the image 097IW14 (see step 097IWS309). Further, since the chance-up image and the effect image are displayed in a special mode, the notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R (see step 097IWS311).

Next, when the display timing of the image A3 comes, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (F), the image display device 5 displays the image 097IW16 as the image A3, which imitates a bird different from the images A1 and A2. .. Further, since the execution of the chance-up effect A3 has been decided, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (F), the bird wing portion is displayed in the red display color in the image 097IW16 (see step 097IWS308). .. Further, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (F), the effect image 097IW17 is displayed in a red display color around the image 097IW16 (see step 097IWS309). Further, since the chance-up image and the effect image are displayed in a special mode, the notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R (see step 097IWS311).

Next, when it comes to the display timing of the image A4, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (G), in the image display device 5, the image 097IW18 that imitates a bird different from the images A1, the image A2, and the image A3 is displayed as the image A4. Is displayed. Further, since the execution of the chance-up effect A3 has been decided, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (G), the bird wing portion is displayed in the red display color in the image 097IW18 (see step 097IWS308). .. Further, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (G), the effect image 097IW19 is displayed in a red display color around the image 097IW18 (see step 097IWS309). Further, since the chance-up image and the effect image are displayed in a special mode, the notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R (see step 097IWS311).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 10-11 and 10-12, an effect mode of Super Reach B accompanied by a chance-up effect will be described. In the examples shown in FIGS. 10-11 and 10-12, a case where the execution of the chance-up effect B3 is determined will be described as an example. As shown in FIG. 10-11 (A), the image display device 5 executes variable display of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols, and as shown in FIG. 10-11 (B), the left and right decorative symbols are the same. The symbol (in this example, the symbol "7") is stopped and displayed to reach the reach state. Next, it is the timing of development to Super Reach B, and as shown in FIG. 10-11 (C), a predetermined character image 097IW21 is displayed on the image display device 5, and characters such as "Super Reach B rush" are displayed as character lines. The display is displayed and Super Reach B is started. In this example, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (C), when the super reach B is started, the variation display of the decorative symbol is reduced and displayed on the upper left edge of the display screen of the image display device 5. It is shown.

Next, when the display timing of the image B1 comes, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (D), the image display device 5 displays the image 097IW22 imitating the moon as the image B1. Further, since the execution of the chance-up effect B3 has been decided, the moon is displayed in the red display color in the image 097IW22 as shown in FIG. 10-11 (D) (see step 097IWS308). Further, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (D), the effect image 097IW23 is displayed in a red display color around the image 097IW22 (see step 097IWS309). Further, since the chance-up image and the effect image are displayed in a special mode, the notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R (see step 097IWS311).

Next, when the display timing of the image B2 comes, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (E), the image display device 5 displays the image 097IW24 imitating Jupiter as the image B2. Further, since the execution of the chance-up effect B3 has been decided, Jupiter is displayed in the red display color in the image 097IW24 as shown in FIG. 10-12 (E) (see step 097IWS308). Further, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (E), the effect image 097IW25 is displayed in a red display color around the image 097IW24 (see step 097IWS309). Further, since the chance-up image and the effect image are displayed in a special mode, the notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R (see step 097IWS311).

Next, when the display timing of the image B3 comes, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (F), the image display device 5 displays the image 097IW26 imitating Saturn as the image B3. Further, since the execution of the chance-up effect B3 has been decided, Saturn is displayed in the red display color in the image 097IW26 as shown in FIG. 10-12 (F) (see step 097IWS308). Further, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (F), the effect image 097IW27 is displayed in a red display color around the image 097IW26 (see step 097IWS309). Further, since the chance-up image and the effect image are displayed in a special mode, the notification sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R (see step 097IWS311).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 10-13 and 10-14, an effect mode of Super Reach A without a chance-up effect will be described. Therefore, in the examples shown in FIGS. 10-13 and 10-14, it is assumed that the chance-up effect is not executed. As shown in FIG. 10-13 (A), the image display device 5 executes variable display of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols, and as shown in FIG. 10-13 (B), the left and right decorative symbols are the same. The symbol (in this example, the symbol "7") is stopped and displayed to reach the reach state. Next, it is the timing of development to Super Reach A, and as shown in FIG. 10-13 (C), a predetermined character image 097IW11 is displayed on the image display device 5, and characters such as "Super Reach A rush" are displayed as character lines. The display is displayed and Super Reach A is started. In this example, as shown in FIG. 10-13 (C), when the super reach A is started, the variation display of the decorative symbol is reduced and displayed on the upper left edge of the display screen of the image display device 5. It is shown.

Next, when the display timing of the image A1 comes, as shown in FIG. 10-13 (D), the image display device 5 displays the image 097IW32 imitating a bird as the image A1. Further, since it is decided not to execute the chance-up effect, the bird is displayed in a white display color in the image 097IW32 as shown in FIG. 10-13 (D) (see step 097IWS308). Further, as shown in FIG. 10-13 (D), the effect image 097IW33 is displayed in a white display color around the image 097IW32 (see step 097IWS309). Since the chance-up image and the effect image are displayed in the normal mode, the notification sound is not output.

Next, when the display timing of the image A2 comes, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (E), the image display device 5 displays the image 097IW34, which imitates a bird different from the image A1, as the image A2. Further, since it is decided not to execute the chance-up effect, the bird is displayed in a white display color in the image 097IW34 as shown in FIG. 10-14 (E) (see step 097IWS308). Further, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (E), the effect image 097IW35 is displayed in a white display color around the image 097IW34 (see step 097IWS309). Since the chance-up image and the effect image are displayed in the normal mode, the notification sound is not output.

Next, when the display timing of the image A3 comes, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (F), the image display device 5 displays the image 097IW36, which imitates a bird different from the images A1 and the image A2, as the image A3. .. Further, since it is decided not to execute the chance-up effect, the bird is displayed in a white display color in the image 097IW36 as shown in FIG. 10-14 (F) (see step 097IWS308). Further, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (F), the effect image 097IW37 is displayed in a white display color around the image 097IW36 (see step 097IWS309). Since the chance-up image and the effect image are displayed in the normal mode, the notification sound is not output.

Next, when it comes to the display timing of the image A4, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (G), in the image display device 5, as the image A4, an image 097IW38 that imitates a bird different from the images A1, the image A2, and the image A3 is displayed. Is displayed. Further, since it is decided not to execute the chance-up effect, the bird is displayed in a white display color in the image 097IW38 as shown in FIG. 10-14 (G) (see step 097IWS308). Further, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (G), the effect image 097IW39 is displayed in a white display color around the image 097IW38 (see step 097IWS309). Since the chance-up image and the effect image are displayed in the normal mode, the notification sound is not output.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 10-15 and 10-16, an effect mode of Super Reach B without a chance-up effect will be described. Therefore, in the examples shown in FIGS. 10-15 and 10-16, it is assumed that the chance-up effect is not executed. As shown in FIG. 10-15 (A), the image display device 5 executes variable display of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols, and as shown in FIG. 10-15 (B), the left and right decorative symbols are the same. The symbol (in this example, the symbol "7") is stopped and displayed to reach the reach state. Next, it is the timing of development to Super Reach B, and as shown in FIG. 10-15 (C), a predetermined character image 097IW21 is displayed on the image display device 5, and characters such as "Super Reach B rush" are displayed as character lines. The display is displayed and Super Reach B is started. In this example, as shown in FIG. 10-15 (C), when Super Reach B is started, the variation display of the decorative symbol is reduced and displayed on the upper left edge of the display screen of the image display device 5. It is shown.

Next, when the display timing of the image B1 comes, as shown in FIG. 10-15 (D), the image display device 5 displays the image 097IW42 imitating the moon as the image B1. Further, since it is decided not to execute the chance-up effect, the moon is displayed in a white display color in the image 097IW42 as shown in FIG. 10-15 (D) (see step 097IWS308). Further, as shown in FIG. 10-15 (D), the effect image 097IW43 is displayed in a white display color around the image 097IW42 (see step 097IWS309). Since the chance-up image and the effect image are displayed in the normal mode, the notification sound is not output.

Next, when the display timing of the image B2 comes, as shown in FIG. 10-16 (E), the image display device 5 displays the image 097IW44 imitating Jupiter as the image B2. Further, since it is decided not to execute the chance-up effect, Jupiter is displayed in a white display color in the image 097IW44 as shown in FIG. 10-16 (E) (see step 097IWS308). Further, as shown in FIG. 10-16 (E), the effect image 097IW45 is displayed in a white display color around the image 097IW44 (see step 097IWS309). Since the chance-up image and the effect image are displayed in the normal mode, the notification sound is not output.

Next, when the display timing of the image B3 comes, as shown in FIG. 10-16 (F), the image display device 5 displays the image 097IW46 imitating Saturn as the image B3. Further, since it is decided not to execute the chance-up effect, Saturn is displayed in a white display color in the image 097IW46 as shown in FIG. 10-16 (F) (see step 097IWS308). Further, as shown in FIG. 10-16 (F), the effect image 097IW47 is displayed in a white display color around the image 097IW46 (see step 097IWS309). Since the chance-up image and the effect image are displayed in the normal mode, the notification sound is not output.

As shown in FIGS. 10-9 to 10-16, unlike the chance-up images, the character image 097IW11 and the character image 097IW21 do not change in particular depending on whether they are out-of-order fluctuations or jackpot fluctuations. , It is an image displayed in a display mode not related to the degree of expectation for a big hit.

Further, in FIGS. 10-9 to 10-16, Super Reach A and Super Reach B are shown as an example, but when Super Reach C is executed, it is executed in a similar manner. For example, FIGS. 10-9 to 10-16 show a case where an image imitating a bird or an image of a celestial body is displayed as a chance-up image, but when Super Reach C is executed, another image is used as a chance-up image. (For example, an image imitating a vehicle such as a car or an airplane) is displayed, and these chance-up images are displayed in a special aspect (blue, green, red) or in the same manner as in FIGS. 10-9 to 10-16. It may be displayed in a normal mode (white), or the effect image may be displayed in a special mode (blue, green, red) or a normal mode (white).

Further, for example, when the chance-up effect A6 or the chance-up effect B6 is executed, a common image (for example, a common character image or a common item image) is used as the image X instead of the image A1 and the image B1. The common image X and the effect image are displayed in rainbow colors, and the chance-up image and effect image displayed thereafter are also displayed in rainbow colors.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 10-13 to 10-16, the chance-up images (image A1, image A2, image A3, image A4) are displayed during the execution of super reach A, and the super When the chance-up image (image B1, image B2, image B3) is displayed during the execution of reach B, the chance-up image is displayed by adding the effect image of the common white display color, but it is added. The aspect of the common effect image to be performed is not limited to such an aspect. For example, an image having exactly the same shape and the same display color (for example, an effect image) may be added to display a chance-up image, or an image having a different shape but the same display color may be added. A common image may be added to display a chance-up image. When displaying such a chance-up image in a normal mode, not only when an effect element such as the exact same image is added, but also an effect element such as a similar image may be added, and in some form. Anything may be used as long as it is configured to display a chance-up image by adding a common effect element.

As described above, according to the feature unit 097IW, it is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, super reach A to C) that suggests whether or not the control is performed in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state). It is possible to display a specific image (for example, a chance-up image) and a predetermined image (for example, character image 097IW11, character image 097IW21) different from the specific image during execution of the specific effect. Further, a plurality of types of specific effects (for example, super reach A to C) including at least the first specific effect (for example, super reach A) and the second specific effect (for example, super reach B) can be executed, and the specific image can be executed. As a result, at least, the first specific image (for example, image A1, image A2, image A3, image A4) can be displayed during the execution of the first specific effect, and the second specific image (for example, the second specific image (for example) during the execution of the second specific effect). For example, image B1, image B2, and image B3) can be displayed. In addition, a specific image in a normal mode (for example, white) and a specific image in a special mode (for example, blue, green, red, iridescent) suggesting that the expectation of being controlled in an advantageous state is higher than that in the normal mode. The predetermined image is a display mode that is not related to the degree of expectation controlled in an advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-9 to 10-16, the character image 097IW11 and the character image 097IW21. The display mode of is not changed). Further, when displaying a specific image in a special mode, it is possible to add a first special effect element (for example, an effect image having a display color of blue, green, red, or rainbow color) to display the specific image. When displaying a specific image, a second special effect element different from the first special effect element (for example, an effect image having a white display color) can be added to display the specific image. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the specific image is a preview image, and it is possible to draw the player's attention to the specific image.

Specifically, when the chance-up image is displayed in a special mode (for example, blue, green, red, rainbow color), only the effect image in the special mode is displayed, and the chance-up image is displayed in the normal mode (for example, white). If it is configured not to display any effect image when displaying, it is not possible to make the player recognize that the chance-up image is a preview image. Therefore, in this example, even when the chance-up image is displayed in the normal mode, the effect image in the normal mode is displayed, so that the player knows that the chance-up image is a preview image. It is possible to draw the player's attention to the chance-up image.

Further, in this example, when the chance-up image or effect image is displayed in the normal mode (when the chance is not increased), the chance-up image or effect image is displayed in a relatively inconspicuous display color (white in this example). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the display from being unnecessarily conspicuous when the chance is not increased, and conversely, it is possible to increase the recognition degree when the chance-up image and the effect image are displayed in a special mode.

The addition of the first special effect element or the second special effect element may be configured to generate and display an image in which an effect image is added to the chance-up image, or the chance-up image and the effect. The process of synthesizing the image is not executed, but the chance-up image and the effect image are displayed in the vicinity or superimposed, and it looks as if the effect image is added to the chance-up image. May be good.

Further, the first special effect element and the second special effect element are not limited to the effect image, but are other images (for example, a character image or an item image) displayed so as to be added to the chance-up image in some form. ) May be. Further, for example, as the first special effect element or the second special effect element, a lamp or LED near the display area of the chance-up image is displayed, or a predetermined effect sound is output in a manner associated with the chance-up image. It may be, as long as it adds a production element in some form.

Further, in this example, the character image 097IW11 and the character image 097IW21 are shown as specific examples of the "predetermined image", but the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, during the execution of super reach, the background image or the item image may be displayed as a predetermined image in a manner that does not change regardless of the degree of expectation.

Further, in this example, the case where the super reach A to C is executed is shown as a specific example of the "specific effect", but the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, a preview effect or a pseudo-ream can be executed as a specific effect, and a chance-up image is displayed in a special mode or a normal mode and an effect image is displayed in a special mode or a normal mode during the execution of the notice effect or the pseudo-ream. It may be configured to do so. Further, for example, a promotion effect suggesting whether or not to be promoted to a probabilistic jackpot during the jackpot game may be configured to be executable as a specific effect, and the chance-up image may be displayed in a special mode or a normal mode during the execution of the promotion effect. The effect image may be displayed in a special mode or a normal mode. As such, various modes can be considered as specific effects.

Further, in this example, regarding "the predetermined image is a display mode not related to the expectation degree controlled in the advantageous state", specifically, the display mode of the character image 097IW11 and the character image 097IW21 other than the chance-up image is shown. As shown, "not related" means that the expectation for a big hit like the chance-up image is not an element that raises the chance. Therefore, even when displaying images other than these chance-up images, those with different expectations (reliability) for big hits are included depending on the type of super reach itself in which those images are displayed.

Further, according to the feature unit 097IW, during the execution of the first specific effect, the first specific image is displayed in different modes (for example, blue, green, red, rainbow color) according to the degree of expectation controlled in an advantageous state. The first specific image is displayed by adding the first special effect element (for example, an effect image of blue, green, red, and rainbow display colors) of the display mode corresponding to the mode of the first specific image that can be displayed. It is possible. Therefore, it is possible to emphasize the difference in the mode of the specific image depending on the display mode of the added first special effect element.

Further, according to the present feature unit 097IW, it is possible to display an image of a common mode (for example, image X) as the first specific image and the second specific image, and it is common when displaying the image of the common mode. It is possible to display the first specific image and the second specific image by adding the first special effect element (for example, an effect image of a rainbow-colored display color). Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the image of the common mode is displayed as the specific image.

Further, according to the feature unit 097IW, it is possible to execute a notification effect (for example, output of a notification sound) when a specific image is displayed by adding a first special effect element. Further, when the specific image is displayed by adding the second special effect element, the notification effect is not executed. Therefore, the player can be made aware of it only when the expectation of being controlled in an advantageous state is high.

In this example, a common notification sound is output regardless of whether the chance-up image or effect image is displayed in any of the display colors of blue, green, red, and rainbow. It is not limited to such an aspect. For example, when a common image X is displayed as a chance-up image and a chance-up image or effect image is displayed in rainbow colors, a dedicated notification sound different from that of blue, green, or red is output. It may be configured. Further, even when the chance-up image or the effect image is displayed in blue, green, or red, different notification sounds may be output depending on whether the image is blue, green, or red.

Further, according to the feature unit 097IW, it is possible to execute an effect (for example, chance-up effects A7, B7, C5) in which a specific image to which the second special effect element is added is changed to a specific image to which the first special effect element is added. Is. Therefore, the expectation can be maintained even when the specific image is displayed by adding the second special effect element.

Further, according to the feature unit 097IW, the production of the first period (for example, the production of the first half of the production period of Super Reach A to C) and whether or not it is controlled to an advantageous state after the first period. It is possible to execute a specific effect including an effect of a second period (for example, an effect of the latter half of the effect period of Super Reach A to C) including an effect of notifying the result (for example, notification of a result of success or failure). Further, the specific image can be displayed during the first period, and the display of the specific image is restricted during the second period (see FIG. 10-8). Therefore, the player's consciousness can be concentrated on whether or not the control is performed in an advantageous state.

In this example, the case where the display of the chance-up image and the effect image is restricted during the operation valid period in the latter half of the super reach and the period for displaying the pass / fail result notification is not limited to such a mode. For example, when performing a production that develops from a weak reach with low expectations to a strong reach with high expectations during super reach, chance-up images and effect images are frequently displayed during the weak reach, and are strong. It may be configured to hide or limit the chance-up image or effect image during the reach period.

Further, according to the feature unit 097IW, it is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, super reach A to C) suggesting whether or not the control is performed in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state), and the execution of the specific effect. It is possible to display a specific image (for example, a chance-up image) and a predetermined image (for example, character image 097IW11, character image 097IW21) different from the specific image. Further, it is possible to execute a plurality of types of specific effects (for example, super reach A to C) including at least a first specific effect (for example, super reach A) and a second specific effect (for example, super reach B). In addition, a specific image in a normal mode (for example, white) and a specific image in a special mode (for example, blue, green, red, iridescent) suggesting that the expectation of being controlled in an advantageous state is higher than that in the normal mode. The predetermined image is a display mode that is not related to the degree of expectation controlled in an advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-9 to 10-16, the character image 097IW11 and the character image 097IW21. The display mode of is not changed). Further, when displaying a specific image in a special mode, it is possible to add a first special effect element (for example, an effect image having a display color of blue, green, red, or rainbow color) to display the specific image. When displaying a specific image, a second special effect element different from the first special effect element (for example, an effect image having a white display color) can be added to display the specific image. Then, the specific image can be displayed a different number of times depending on whether the first specific effect is executed or the second specific effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-4 and 10-5, the supermarket is displayed. Reach A can display the chance-up image four times (image A1, image A2, image A3, image A4), and Super Reach B can display the chance-up image three times (image B1, image B2, image B3). is there). Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the specific image is a preview image, and it is possible to draw the player's attention to the specific image.

Further, according to the present feature unit 097IW, when the specific image is displayed a plurality of times, when the specific image is displayed the first time and then the specific image is displayed the second time, the first time is performed at a high rate. It is possible to display a specific image in a mode having a higher degree of expectation that is controlled in a more advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-4 to 10-6, chance-up effects A4, A5, B4, B5, C4. Is feasible). Therefore, even when the specific image is displayed in a mode in which the degree of expectation is low in the first time, it is possible to have a feeling of expectation for the specific image displayed in the second time.

In this example, when performing Super Reach C, which has the highest expectation for a big hit among Super Reach A to C, the number of times the chance-up image is displayed is the smallest at 2 times, and the expectation for a big hit is the next highest. When Super Reach B is executed, the chance-up image is displayed 3 times, and when Super Reach A, which has the lowest expectation for a big hit, is displayed, the chance-up image is displayed 4 times, which is the largest number. ing. As such, in this example, the higher the expectation for the jackpot, the less the number of times the chance-up image is displayed, so that the chance-up image is frequently displayed even though the expectation is originally high. Is prevented from becoming annoying. On the contrary, in the case of a reach with a low expectation for a big hit, the player's expectation can be maintained even if the expectation for the reach is low by increasing the number of times the chance-up image is displayed. ..

The configuration shown in the feature unit 097IW can be appropriately combined with the configuration shown in the feature unit 103SG. For example, a configuration for setting the set value shown in the feature unit 103SG and a configuration for executing a predetermined effect of a specific mode for suggesting the setting are appropriately combined with a configuration for executing the chance-up effect shown in the feature unit 097IW. Can be configured.

1 Pachinko game machine 4A 1st special symbol display device 4B 2nd special symbol display device 5 Image display device 103 CPU
120 Production control CPU

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player and can be set to any of a plurality of set values that have different advantages for the player.
Display means that can display images and
A notice effect for displaying a notice image suggesting that the control is in an advantageous state on the display means, and a setting suggestion for displaying a setting suggestion image related to the setting suggestion on the display means, which is an image different from the notice image. Equipped with a production execution means that can execute the production,
When the notice effect and the setting suggestion effect are executed in parallel, the notice image and the setting suggestion image are displayed in different display areas.
further,
A specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect suggesting whether or not it is controlled in the advantageous state, and
An image display means capable of displaying a specific image and a predetermined image different from the specific image during execution of the specific effect is provided.
The specific effect executing means can execute a plurality of types of the specific effect including at least the first specific effect and the second specific effect.
The image display means
As the specific image, at least, the first specific image can be displayed during the execution of the first specific effect, and the second specific image can be displayed during the execution of the second specific effect.
It is possible to display the specific image according to the normal aspect and the specific image according to a special aspect suggesting that the expectation of being controlled in the advantageous state is higher than that of the normal aspect.
The predetermined image is a display mode that is not related to the degree of expectation controlled in the advantageous state.
The image display means
When displaying the specific image according to the special aspect, the specific image can be displayed by adding a first special effect element.
A gaming machine characterized in that when displaying the specific image according to the normal aspect, the specific image can be displayed by adding a second special effect element different from the first special effect element.

Images